Cd-Cdm-Ip 550 - r1

CDM-IP 550
Comtech EF Data is an ISO 9001 Registered Company.
IP-Centric Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual

Part Number CD/CDMIP550.IOM Rev. 1
Errata A
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject: Date: Original Document Part Number/Rev: Errata Part Number: Changes to Figure 6, CDM-IP Dimensional Envelope April 12, 2004 CD/CDMIP550.IOM
CD/CDMIP550.EA1
Rev 1
This information will be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
Replace Figure 6, Dimensional Envelope, in the CDM-IP 550 Installation and Operation manual, with Figure 6 attached.
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-a1.doc
Figure 6. CDM-IP Dimensional Envelope
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-a1.doc
Errata B
Subject: Date: Original Document Part Number/Rev: Errata Part Number: Changes to Redundancy Configuration Page October 12, 2004 CD/CDMIP550.IOM
CD/CDMIP550.EB1
Rev 1
Change Specifics:
Add the following highlighted paragraph to 6.5.11, page 154 as follows: If Redundancy is enabled on both the Online and Offline, their respective roles will be displayed on the Current State field on the Redundancy Configuration menu. Set online and offline modems to matching operational and HDLC addressing modes before connecting the redundancy cables. For example: Router Mode/Small Network. Configuration changes can only be made to the online modem. Changes will automatically be applied to the offline modem.
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-b1.doc
Errata C
Subject: Date: Original Document Part Number/Rev: Errata Part Number: Change Cable Part No. October 12, 2004 CD/CDMIP550.IOM
CD/CDMIP550.EC1
Rev 1
Change Specifics:
Refer to new Figure 13.
PL/9923-1
COMTECH EFDATA PART # PL/9923-1
Figure 13. CRS-100CDM-IP Cabling Details
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-c1.doc
CDM-IP 550
Comtech EF Data is an ISO 9001 Registered Company.
IP-Centric Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual

Part Number CD/CDMIP550.IOM REV. 1 January 19, 2004
Copyright Comtech EF Data, 2002. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, (480) 333-2200, FAX: (480) 333-2161i
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department for: Product support or training Information on upgrading or returning a product Reporting comments or suggestions concerning manuals Contact Customer Support using any of the following methods:
Mail: Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department 2114 West 7th Street Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA Email: cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com Internet: www.comtechefdata.com
Phone: (480) 333-2200 (Main Comtech EF Data Number) (480) 333-4357 (Customer Support Desk) Fax: (480) 333-2161
To return a Comtech EF Data product (in-warranty and out-of-warranty) for repair or replacement:
1. Request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department. 2. Be prepared to supply the Customer Support representative with the model number, serial number, and a description of the problem. 3. To ensure that the product is not damaged during shipping, pack the product in its original shipping carton/packaging. 4. Ship the product back to Comtech EF Data. (Shipping charges should be prepaid.)
For more information regarding the warranty policies, see Warranty Policy, p. xiv.
ii
Table of Contents
FIGURES .......................................................................................................................IX TABLES..........................................................................................................................X CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION.................................................................................... 1
1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 Major Assemblies.................................................................................................................... 2 1.3 Standard Features................................................................................................................... 2 1.3.1 AUPC................................................................................................................................. 2 1.3.2 Software ............................................................................................................................. 3 1.3.3 Verification ........................................................................................................................ 3 1.3.4 Data Interfaces ................................................................................................................... 3 1.3.5 1:1 Redundancy Configuration .......................................................................................... 3 1.3.6 IGMP Support for Multicast .............................................................................................. 4 1.3.7 CDM-550 Emulation Mode ............................................................................................... 4 1.3.8 easyConnect Mode ......................................................................................................... 4 1.3.9 CDM-IP Working Modes and HDLC Addressing Modes................................................. 5 1.3.10 IP Traffic Classifying..................................................................................................... 11 1.4 Options ................................................................................................................................... 12 1.4.1 Turbo Product Coding (TPC) .......................................................................................... 12 1.4.2 3xDES Encryption with Ability to Change Keys ............................................................ 12 1.4.3 IP Header Compression ................................................................................................... 13 1.4.4 Quality of Service ............................................................................................................ 14 1.4.5 Payload Compression....................................................................................................... 19 1.4.6 CDM-IP Demo Mode ...................................................................................................... 21 1.5 1.6 2 2.4 2.5 Specifications ................................................................................................................... 22 Dimensional Envelope .................................................................................................... 28 INSTALLATION..................................................................................................... 31 Unpacking and Inspection.............................................................................................. 31 Mounting Kits ................................................................................................................. 31
iii
2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3
Configuration .................................................................................................................. 32 Select Internal IF Loop................................................................................................... 32 Connect External Cables................................................................................................ 32 Connector Description.................................................................................................... 33 OPERATION.......................................................................................................... 37
3.4 Methods of Operation..................................................................................................... 37 3.4.4 Front Panel Operation ............................................................................................... 38 3.4.5 Serial Remote Control Operations ............................................................................ 38 3.4.6 Serial Command Line Interface (CLI) Operations ................................................... 38 3.4.7 Telnet Operations...................................................................................................... 38 3.4.8 Web Server Operation............................................................................................... 38 3.4.9 SNMP Operations ..................................................................................................... 39 4 FRONT PANEL MENUS........................................................................................ 41
4.4 Front Panel Operation.................................................................................................... 41 4.4.4 Keypad ...................................................................................................................... 41 4.4.5 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) ........................................................................ 42 4.4.6 Led Indicators ........................................................................................................... 43 4.4.7 Menu Tree................................................................................................................. 44 4.4.8 Menu Screens............................................................................................................ 47 4.4.9 SELECT\INFO ......................................................................................................... 64 4.4.10 SELECT\MONIT...................................................................................................... 68 4.4.11 SELECT\STORE\LD................................................................................................ 73 4.4.12 SELECT\UTIL.......................................................................................................... 74 4.4.13 SELECT\UTIL\FAST............................................................................................... 75 4.4.14 SELECT\UTIL\DEMO............................................................................................. 75 4.4.15 SELECT\ODU .......................................................................................................... 76 5 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL ............................................................................... 79 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 79 EIA-485 ............................................................................................................................ 79 EIA-232 ............................................................................................................................ 80 Basic Protocol .................................................................................................................. 80
5.8 Packet Structure.............................................................................................................. 81 5.8.4 Start Of Packet .......................................................................................................... 81

iv
5.8.5 5.8.6 5.8.7 5.8.8 5.8.9 6 6.4
Address ..................................................................................................................... 81 Instruction Code........................................................................................................ 82 Instruction Code Qualifier ........................................................................................ 82 Message Arguments.................................................................................................. 84 End Of Packet ........................................................................................................... 84
CLI AND TELNET INTERFACE .......................................................................... 103 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 103
6.5 Main Menu Page ........................................................................................................... 105 6.5.4 Administration Page................................................................................................ 107 6.5.5 Interface Configuration Page .................................................................................. 121 6.5.6 QoS (Quality of Service) Configuration Page ........................................................ 126 6.5.7 Route Table Configuration Page............................................................................. 132 6.5.8 Protocol Configuration Page................................................................................... 136 6.5.9 Modem Parameters Page......................................................................................... 142 6.5.10 Modem Summary Page........................................................................................... 143 6.5.11 Redundancy Configuration Page ............................................................................ 153 6.5.12 Operations and Maintenance Page.......................................................................... 156 6.5.13 Telnet - Logout Option ........................................................................................... 173 7 7.4 7.5 WEB SERVER PAGES ....................................................................................... 175 Web Server Usage ......................................................................................................... 175 Web Server Menu Tree ................................................................................................ 177
7.6 Home Pages.................................................................................................................... 178 7.3.1 Home Page ..................................................................................................................... 178 7.3.2 Contact Information ....................................................................................................... 179 7.3.3 Support........................................................................................................................... 179 7.3.4 Logoff ............................................................................................................................ 180 7.3.5 ODU Configuration ....................................................................................................... 181 7.3.6 ODU Utilities ................................................................................................................. 182 7.3.7 QoS Configuration ......................................................................................................... 183 7.3.8 ODU Status ................................................................................................................... 184 1.4.9 Reset Unit....................................................................................................................... 185 8 8.4 8.5 8.6 SNMP INTERFACE ............................................................................................. 187 SNMP Interface............................................................................................................. 187 SNMP Community String Access Levels.................................................................... 187 MIB-II ............................................................................................................................ 188
v
8.6.4 8.6.5 8.6.6 8.6.7 8.6.8 8.6.9 8.6.10 8.6.11 8.7
System Group.......................................................................................................... 189 Interface Group ....................................................................................................... 190 ICMP Group............................................................................................................ 196 TCP Group .............................................................................................................. 197 UDP Group ............................................................................................................. 198 EGP Group.............................................................................................................. 199 Transmission Group................................................................................................ 199 SNMP Group .......................................................................................................... 199
Private MIB Implementations ..................................................................................... 202
8.8 CDM-IP IP Controller Private MIB ........................................................................... 202 8.8.4 CDM-IP Administration Group ............................................................................. 202 8.8.5 Interface Group ....................................................................................................... 209 8.9 CDM-IP 550 Private MIB ............................................................................................ 223 8.9.4 CDM-IP 550 Objects Group ................................................................................... 223 8.10 8.11 9 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 10 CDM-IP Controller MIB Tree..................................................................................... 238 CDM-IP 550 MIB Tree................................................................................................. 247 FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION OPTIONS .................................................. 251 Introduction................................................................................................................... 251 Viterbi ............................................................................................................................ 251 Sequential....................................................................................................................... 252 Turbo Product Codec (Option).................................................................................... 253 Uncoded Operation (No FEC) ..................................................................................... 256 EDMAC CHANNEL.......................................................................................... 265
10.4 Theory Of Operation .................................................................................................... 265 10.4.4 On the transmit side ................................................................................................ 265 10.4.5 On the receive side.................................................................................................. 266 10.5 10.6 11 M&C Connection .......................................................................................................... 267 Setup Summary............................................................................................................. 268 EB/NO MEASUREMENT ................................................................................... 271
vi
11.4 12 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 13
Measuring Eb/No............................................................................................................ 271 CONNECTOR PINOUTS ................................................................................. 275 Data Connector - 25 Pin D Type Female.................................................................. 275 Alarms Connector - 15 Pin D Type Male................................................................. 276 Remote Control Connector - 9 Pin D Type Male .................................................... 277 Auxiliary Serial Connector He1402 3 Pin Header .................................................. 277 Async-Serial Console .................................................................................................... 278 Ethernet Interface Connector...................................................................................... 278 QUICK-START GUIDE .................................................................................... 281
13.4 Introduction................................................................................................................... 281 13.4.4 Equipment List........................................................................................................ 281 13.4.5 Equipment Setup..................................................................................................... 282 13.4.6 Transmit and Receive IF Configuration ................................................................. 282 13.4.7 Serial console port Command Line Interface (CLI) Configuration........................ 282 13.4.8 Main Menu.............................................................................................................. 283 13.4.9 Restoring Factory Default Configuration ............................................................... 283 13.5 easyConnect Point-to-Point System Configuration ................................................ 284 13.5.4 PC Configuration .................................................................................................... 284 13.5.5 CDM-IP Configuration .......................................................................................... 284 13.5.6 Setting IP Address(es)............................................................................................. 285 13.6 Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration .................................................. 286 13.6.4 PC Configuration .................................................................................................... 286 13.6.5 Setting CDM-IP Modems to Router Mode Operation............................................ 286 13.6.6 Setting IP Address(es)............................................................................................. 287 13.6.7 Route Table............................................................................................................. 288 13.7 Troubleshooting IP Module ......................................................................................... 290 13.7.4 easyConnect Mode Troubleshooting................................................................... 290 13.7.5 Router Mode Troubleshooting................................................................................ 292 14 14.4 14.5 FLASH UPGRADING CDM-IP SATELLITE MODEMS ................................... 295 Flash Upgrade Overview.............................................................................................. 295 Downloading Flash Upgrades from the Web ............................................................. 296
vii
14.2.1 Base Modem (M&C or BULK Firmware) .................................................................. 296 14.2.2 CDM-IP Module Firmware ......................................................................................... 297 14.3 CDM-IP Module Firmware ............................................................................................. 299 APPENDIX A. THEORY OF OPERATION ................................................................. 301 A.1 Functional Description ...................................................................................................... 301 A.2 Offset QPSK Operation..................................................................................................... 302 A.3 EIA-232 Operation............................................................................................................. 303 A.3.1 ASYNC EIA-232 Specifications .................................................................................. 303 A.3.2 Setup.............................................................................................................................. 303 A.3.3 CLOCKING .................................................................................................................. 304 A.3.4 Transmit and Receive Clocking.................................................................................... 306 A.4 AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control)...................................................................... 308 A.4.1 Setting AUPC Parameters............................................................................................. 308 A.4.2 Compensation Rate ....................................................................................................... 310 A.4.3 Monitoring .................................................................................................................... 310 INDEX ......................................................................................................................... 313 METRIC CONVERSIONS ........................................................................................... 317
viii
Figures
Figure 1. easyConnect Diagram ................................................................................................. 6 Figure 2. Router Mode, Point-to-Point Diagram ........................................................................... 7 Figure 3. Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint Diagram .................................................................. 8 Figure 4. Router Mode, Partial Mesh, 1 Hop Diagram............................................................... 9 Figure 5. Typical Coarse AGC Voltage Characteristic ............................................................... 27 Figure 6. CDM-IP Dimensional Envelope................................................................................... 28 Figure 7. Rear Panel..................................................................................................................... 32 Figure 8. Front Panel.................................................................................................................... 38 Figure 9. Front Panel Modem Menu Tree (1 of 3) ...................................................................... 44 Figure 10. Front Panel Modem Menu Tree (2 of 3) .................................................................... 45 Figure 11. Front Panel Modem Menu Tree (3 of 3) .................................................................... 46 Figure 12. Loopback Modes ........................................................................................................ 63 Figure 13. CRS-100/CDM-IP Cabling Details .......................................................................... 153 Figure 14. Viterbi Decoding ...................................................................................................... 258 Figure 15. Sequential Decoding 64 kbps .................................................................................. 259 Figure 16. Sequential Decoding 1024 kbps ............................................................................... 260 Figure 17. Sequential Decoding 2048 kbps ............................................................................... 261 Figure 18. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec .................................................................. 262 Figure 19. Differential Encoding No FEC................................................................................ 263 Figure 20. Eb/No Measurement................................................................................................. 271 Figure 21. Main Menu ............................................................................................................... 283 Figure 22. easyConnect Point-to-Point System Configuration............................................... 284 Figure 23. Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration ................................................. 286 Figure 25. Tx Clock Modes ....................................................................................................... 306 Figure 26. RX Clock Modes ...................................................................................................... 307
ix
Tables
Table 1. Front Panel LED Indicators ............................................................................................ 43 Table 2. Serial Remote Commands .............................................................................................. 85 Table 3. CDM-IP Web Server Menu Tree.................................................................................. 177 Table 4. MIB-II Support ............................................................................................................. 188 Table 5. System Group ............................................................................................................... 189 Table 6. System Services ............................................................................................................ 189 Table 7. Interfaces Table OIDs................................................................................................... 190 Table 8. Address Translation Table OIDs .................................................................................. 192 Table 9. IPGroup OIDs ............................................................................................................... 192 Table 10. IPAddress Table OIDs ................................................................................................ 194 Table 11. Address Translation Table OIDs ................................................................................ 195 Table 12. IP Routing Table OIDs ............................................................................................... 196 Table 13. TCP Group OIDs ........................................................................................................ 197 Table 14. TCP Connection Table OIDs...................................................................................... 198 Table 15. UDP Group OIDs........................................................................................................ 198 Table 16. UDP Listener Table OIDs........................................................................................... 199 Table 17. SNMP Group OIDs..................................................................................................... 199 Table 18. CDM-IP Name Password Config Subgroup OIDs .................................................... 202 Table 19. CDM-IP Access Lists Subgroup OIDs ....................................................................... 203 Table 20. FAST Features ............................................................................................................ 204 Table 21. Features Subgroup ...................................................................................................... 204 Table 22. Encryption Subgroup OIDs ........................................................................................ 205 Table 23. CDM-IP SMTP OIDs ................................................................................................. 206 Table 24. CDM-IP SNMP Trap Configuration OIDs................................................................. 208 Table 25. Ethernet Interface Subgroup OIDs ............................................................................. 209 Table 26. Satellite Interface Subgroup OIDs.............................................................................. 210 Table 27. Route Table OIDs ....................................................................................................... 210 Table 28. IGMP Configuration Subgroup OIDs......................................................................... 212 Table 29. Redundancy OIDs....................................................................................................... 213 Table 30. Operation and Maintenance Subgroup OIDs.............................................................. 214 Table 31. Remote Port B Configuration Subgroup OIDs ........................................................... 215 Table 32. IP Routing Statistics Subgroup OIDs ......................................................................... 217 Table 33. Ethernet Statistics Subgroup OIDs ............................................................................. 217 Table 34. QoS Statistics Subgroup OIDs.................................................................................... 218 Table 35. WAN Statistics Subgroup OIDs ................................................................................. 219 Table 36. Compression Statistics Subgroup OIDs...................................................................... 220 Table 37. QoS Rules Subgroup OIDs ......................................................................................... 220 Table 38. ARP Configuration Subgroup OIDs ........................................................................... 223 Table 39. Tx Parameters OIDs.................................................................................................... 223 Table 40. Rx Parameters OIDs ................................................................................................... 225 Table 41. Interface Parameters OIDs.......................................................................................... 226 Table 42. Utility Parameters OIDs.............................................................................................. 227 Table 43. AUPC Parameter OIDs............................................................................................... 228
x
Table 44. Status Parameter OIDs................................................................................................ 229 Table 45. Logs OIDs................................................................................................................... 231 Table 46. ODU System Information OIDs ................................................................................. 232 Table 47. ODU Unit OIDs .......................................................................................................... 233 Table 48. ODU Tx Parameters OIDs.......................................................................................... 234 Table 49. ODU Rx Parameters OIDs.......................................................................................... 235 Table 50. ODU Unit Status OIDs ............................................................................................... 236 Table 51. ODU Logs OIDs ......................................................................................................... 237 Table 52. Viterbi Decoding Summary ........................................................................................ 252 Table 53. Sequential Decoding Summary .................................................................................. 253 Table 54. Data Connector - 25 Pin D Type Female ................................................................ 275 Table 55. Alarms Connector - 15 Pin D Type Male ................................................................ 276 Table 56. Remote Control Connector - 9 Pin D Type Male .................................................... 277 Table 57. Auxiliary Serial Connector - He1402 3 Pin Header ................................................. 277 Table 58. Async-Serial Console RJ11-6..................................................................................... 278 Table 59. Ethernet Interface RJ45-8 ........................................................................................... 278
xi
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual provides installation and operation information for the Comtech EF Data CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem. This is a technical document intended for earth station engineers, technicians, and users responsible for the operation and maintenance of the CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Comtech EF Data CDM-IP 550 Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual
CONVENTIONS AND REFERENCES

CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Indicates information critical for proper equipment function.
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used to indicate other unsafe practices or risks of property damage.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
METRIC CONVERSION
Metric conversion information is located on the inside back cover of this manual. This information is provided to assist the user in cross-referencing English to Metric conversions.
RECOMMENDED STANDARD DESIGNATIONS

Recommended Standard (RS) Designations have been superseded by the new designation of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). References to the old designations are shown only when depicting actual text displayed on the screen of the unit (RS-232, RS485, etc.). All other references in the manual will be shown with the EIA designations (EIA-232, EIA-485, etc.) only.
TRADEMARKS
All product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
xii
REPORTING COMMENTS OR SUGGESTIONS CONCERNING THIS MANUAL

Comments and suggestions regarding the content and design of this manual will be appreciated. To submit comments, please contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
EMC COMPLIANCE
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference that requires the user to take adequate protection measures.
EN55022 COMPLIANCE
This equipment meets the radio disturbance characteristic specifications for information technology equipment as defined in EN55022.
EN50082-1 COMPLIANCE
This equipment meets the electromagnetic compatibility/generic immunity standard as defined in EN50082-1.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case, users are required to correct the interference at their own expense.
Note: To ensure compliance, properly shielded cables for DATA I/O shall be used. More specifically, these cables shall be shielded from end to end, ensuring a continuous shield.
SAFETY COMPLIANCE EN 60950

Applicable testing is routinely performed as a condition of manufacturing on all units to ensure compliance with safety requirements of EN60950. This equipment meets the Safety of Information Technology Equipment specification as defined in EN60950.
xiii
LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE (LVD)

The following information is applicable for the European Low Voltage Directive (EN60950):
<HAR> Type of power cord required for use in the European Community. CAUTION: Double-pole/Neutral Fusing. ACHTUNG: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung.
!
International Symbols:
Symbol
Definition Alternating Current.
Symbol
Definition Protective Earth.
Fuse.
Chassis Ground.
Note: For additional symbols, see Cautions listed earlier in this preface.
WARRANTY POLICY
This Comtech EF Data product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, Comtech EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective. For equipment under warranty, the customer is responsible for freight to Comtech EF Data and all related custom, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the customer. Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express, Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.
LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper installation or maintenance, abuse, unauthorized modification, or operation outside of environmental specifications for the product, or for damages that occur due to improper repackaging of equipment for return to Comtech EF Data. No other warranty is expressed or implied. Comtech EF Data specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular purpose.
xiv
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
The remedies provided herein are the buyer's sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech EF Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
DISCLAIMER
Comtech EF Data has reviewed this manual thoroughly in order to provide an easy-touse guide to your equipment. All statements, technical information, and recommendations in this manual and in any guides or related documents are believed reliable, but the accuracy and completeness thereof are not guaranteed or warranted, and they are not intended to be, nor should they be understood to be, representations or warranties concerning the products described. Further, Comtech EF Data reserves the right to make changes in the specifications of the products described in this manual at any time without notice and without obligation to notify any person of such changes. If you have any questions regarding the equipment or the information in this manual, please contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department.
xv
NOTES:
xvi
1. Introduction
Introduction ............................ Major Assemblies................... Options................................... Specifications ......................... Dimensional Envelope ........... 1 2 12 22 28
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The CDM-IP 550, hereafter referred to as the CDM-IP, is a high-performance, low-cost, IP-Centric satellite modem designed for closed network Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) links. It is ideal for many VSAT applications. Offering a range of data rates from 2.4 kbps to 2.048 Mbps in 1 bit per second steps, the modem includes Viterbi forward error correction as standard. The Turbo Product Codec is available as an option. The modem is compact, 1U high and 12 inches deep, and consumes only 25 Watts typically. It has the following configuration and control capabilities: Front panel VFD display and keypad for local configuration and control. Rear panel Remote Control Serial interface (DB9) for modem configuration and control. Rear panel Console Port (RJ-11) for Ethernet interface configuration and control. Rear panel Ethernet Data interface (RJ-45). For initial operation and setup, refer to 13, Quick-Start Guide.
1.2 MAJOR ASSEMBLIES

Assembly PL/0391 PL/9469-1 PL/9624-1 Or PL/9956-1 Description Modem Card IP Module Framer Module Note: PL/9956-1 is required for Payload Compression option
1.3 STANDARD FEATURES

10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface Static IP routing for unicast and multicast easyConnect Mode Powerful network management Web Server interface for complete product management SNMP with public and private MIB Telnet interface for remote product M & C Console Port interface for local network management Configurable serial interface (EIA-232 or RS-485) for local management Remote software/firmware upgrade via FTP Configuration backup and restore via FTP Local software/firmware via console port Data rates from 2.4 kbps to 2.048 Mbps Symmetric as well as asymmetric operation for maximum bandwidth efficiency Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) CDM-550 Emulation Mode 1:1 Redundancy (with CRS-100 Switch) IGMP support for multicast
1.3.1 AUPC
An important innovation in the CDM-IP is the addition of Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC). This feature enables the modem to automatically adjust its output power to maintain the Eb/No of the remote end of the satellite link constant. This provides protection against rain fading, a particularly severe problem with Ku-band links.
To accomplish this, the framed mode of operation must be used, and the distant end modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator Eb/No using reserved bytes in the overhead structure. Using the Eb/No , the local modem then adjusts its output power, and hence, a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link. A benefit of this feature is that whenever framed operation is selected, the remote demodulators Eb/No can be viewed from the front panel display of the local modem.
1.3.2 SOFTWARE
The internal software is both powerful and flexible, permitting storage and retrieval of up to 10 different modem configurations. The modem uses flash memory technology internally, and new firmware can be uploaded to the unit from an external PC. This simplifies software upgrading, and updates can now be sent via the Internet, E-mail, or on disk. The upgrade can be performed without opening the unit, by simply connecting the modem to the serial port of a computer.
1.3.3 VERIFICATION
The unit includes many test modes and loopbacks for rapid verification of the correct functioning of the unit. Of particular note is the IF loopback, which permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb external cabling. During the loopback, all of the receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match those of the transmit side. When normal operation is again selected, all of the previous values are restored.
1.3.4 DATA INTERFACES

The CDM-IP includes, as standard, a universal data interface which eliminates the need to exchange interface cards for different applications. The interfaces offered include: 10T/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45 connector) EIA-422 (EIA-530) DCE V.35 DCE Synchronous EIA-232 DCE Asynchronous EIA-232 (at data rates up to 56 kbaud) X.21 DTE and DCE
1.3.5 1:1 REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION

The CDM-IP supports 1:1 redundancy in conjunction with the CRS-100 IF Switch. In a redundant configuration the primary CDM-IP communicates with the backup CDM-IP for synchronization and status checks. If there is a failure of the primary unit, the backup CDM-IP assumes the role of the primary modem with minimal disruption to the traffic. The switchover is transparent to most devices on the LAN.
1.3.6 IGMP SUPPORT FOR MULTICAST

IGMP is a standard feature in the CDM-IP. If enabled, it responds to IGMP queries for the configured multicast routes on the transmit side and generates IGMP queries on the receive side. If there are no active IGMP receivers on the LAN, it will stop forwarding the multicast traffic (received from the satellite) to the LAN.
1.3.7 CDM-550 EMULATION MODE

The CDM-IP can be made to operate in CDM-550 emulation mode, where it functions exactly like the Comtech EF Data CDM-550 satellite modem. The emulation mode is selected from the front panel by selecting Configuration/Interface and then selecting either EIA-422/530, V.35, or EIA-232 as the interface rather than IP. The CDM-IP will then pass standard serial traffic, like a CDM-550, but will not pass IP traffic. The CDMIP can still be accessed via the ethernet port using Telnet, HTTP, or SNMP.
1.3.8 easyConnect MODE

easyConnect is the new CDM-IP modem intelligent networking solution that allows a link to be setup with minimal configuration (no specific routes need to be configured). The CDM-IP also supports non-IP traffic with easyConnect. All IP traffic will be subject to user configured QoS restrictions.
1.3.8.1 easyConnect OPERATION

The following is a detailed description of how an easyConnect pair should be setup and configured as well as information about how easyConnect functions. Because easyConnect is a smart wire, the devices that are attached to it on either side of the satellite should be on the same subnet and should not configure a next hop address to be the CDM-IP (as should be done with router mode). For purposes of configuration, easyConnect mode should be viewed to function in much the same way as a bridge (however, without spanning tree protocol). All of the features that groom and optimize the satellite link in router mode are also available in easyConnect mode. easyConnect Multicast Option Multicast packets in easyConnect mode are identified using multicast MAC address. These identified multicast packets are either routed or dropped based on the easyConnect multicast option. easyConnect uses MAC (layer 2) addresses to learn where to send packets. In comparison, router mode uses the destination IP address in the packet in conjunction with the route table to determine where to forward the packets. The CDM-IP Ethernet interface in easyConnect mode is configured to be in promiscuous mode with a data rate of 10BaseT Half Duplex. The CDM-IP needs to be in promiscuous mode in order to learn the attached networking devices.
Since easyConnect does not use a routing table, the determination of where to send a packet is made by a learning process. When the system is powered-up, all packets from each subnet (local and remote) will be sent over the satellite interface. However, as each CDM-IP learns which devices are attached to their local Ethernet interfaces, the CDM-IP begins to filter packets which it has learned are locally attached to its Ethernet interface. The easyConnect learning/forwarding algorithm is as follows: If the packet is destined for the CDM-IP, process it locally. If the packet is from the Ethernet interface, send it to the Satellite interface, unless the destination layer 2 (MAC address) of the packets matches the source layer 2 address for a packet we have already seen, the destination MAC address of this packet is on our local subnet; so why send it over the satellite interface. In this case, the CDM-IP will drop the packet. If the packet is from the satellite interface, send it out the Ethernet interface.
Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or satellite) on a CDM-IP operating in easyConnect when connected to a LAN. In this configuration, easyConnect will resend all layer 2 broadcast packets and cause a broadcast storm on the LAN. To perform a loop test to verify the modem or satellite link, do one of the following: 1. Reconfigure the CDM-IP to CDM-550 Emulation Mode by selecting Configuration/Interface and then selecting EIA-422/530, V.35, or EIA-232. 2. Set the CDM-IP to Router Mode.
IMPORTANT
1.3.9 CDM-IP WORKING MODES AND HDLC ADDRESSING MODES

There are two Working Modes of the CDM-IP available: easyConnect and Router Mode. There are also three HDLC Addressing Modes: Point-to-Point, Small Network, and Large Network. This section will describe the functionality of these modes in order to optimize the CDM-IP modems in your network.
The Working Mode and HDLC Address Mode of the CDM-IP modems must be identical to pass traffic between modems. Changing the Working Mode or HDLC address Mode of the CDM-IP modem requires the CDM-IP module to be rebooted. Before the user can select a different mode, the CDM-IP will notify the user that changing the mode will require a reboot.
IMPORTANT
easyConnect - This is the default Working Mode of the CDM-IP. easyConnect only operates in Point-to-Point Mode, meaning that it is only communicating with one other CDM-IP modem. This mode allows the CDM-IP to be setup with minimal configuration (no specific routes need to be configured). In this mode, the CDM-IP is acting as a smart wire over a satellite link between two CDM-IP modems. This allows the CDM-IP to simultaneously forward IP traffic and non-IP traffic, such as IPX.
5
Satellite
kb ps
6 25 kb
25 6
ps
PC IP 10.10.1.100/16
PC IP 10.10.2.100/16
Satellite dish 10 BaseT LAN 10.10.1.0 /16
Satellite dish 10 BaseT LAN 10.10.2.0 /16
TX
RX
TX
RX
Hub CDM-IP 1 (efi0) 10.10.1.1/16
Remote CDM-IP 2 (efi0) 10.10.2.1/16
Figure 1. easyConnect Diagram
This diagram shows a 256 kbps Point-to-Point duplex link in easyConnect Mode. Note that both sides of the link are on the same IP subnet - 10.10.0.0/16. There are no routes or HDLC addresses to configure. When the system is powered-up, all packets from each subnet (local and remote) will be sent over the satellite interface. Each CDM-IP learns which devices are attached to their local Ethernet interfaces and will only send packets over the satellite that are not destined for the locally attached devices. Router Mode This mode allows up to 256 static routes to be configured and can operate in Point-to-Point, Small Network and Large Network Mode. Small and Large Network Modes allow for multiple CDM-IP modem communication links. A Small Network is defined as up to 254 separate HDLC addresses and Large is from 255 to 32766 separate HDLC addresses. The reason for the separate HDLC Modes is to allow the user to minimize the HDLC overhead transmitted over the satellite based upon the size of their network. In Point-to-Point, no HDLC address is transmitted; Small Network transmits 1 byte and Large Network transmits 2 bytes as part of HDLC header for each packet. Non-IP traffic is not supported in Router Mode.
Satellite
kb ps
6 25 ps kb
PC IP 10.10.1.100/16 GW 10.10.1.1
25 6
PC IP 10.20.1.100/16 GW 10.20.1.1
10/100 BaseT LAN 10.10.1.0 /16
TX
RX
TX
RX
Hub CDM-IP 1 (efi0) 10.10.1.1/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 10.20.0.0/16 Point-to-Point
Remote CDM-IP 2 (efi0) 10.20.1.1/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 10.10.0.0/16 Point-to-Point
Type ToSat
Type ToSat
Figure 2. Router Mode, Point-to-Point Diagram
This diagram shows a 256 kbps Point-to-Point duplex link in Router Mode. Note that each side of the link has different IP subnets 10.10.0.0/16 and 10.20.0.0/16. Each CDM-IP has a static route defined for the distant CDM-IP subnet. The Next Hop is automatically defined as Point-to-Point and there are no HDLC addresses to configure. All that would be required to send traffic between the PCs on each subnet would be to define the local CDM-IP as the PC default gateway. The CDM-IP modems will only pass traffic over the satellite link by the ToSat routes configured in the Route Table.
10/100 BaseT LAN 10.20.1.0 /16
Satellite dish
Satellite dish
Satellite
2 56 k bp
-Ip s
s to
ot e
CD
Hub
CD
M- I P1
10/100 BaseT LAN 10.20.0.0 /16 10/100 BaseT LAN 10.30.0.0 /16
M bp
to
Satellite dish RX
PC IP 10.20.1.100/16 GW 10.20.1.1
al lR
em
256 s to kb p
PC IP 10.10.1.100/16 GW 10.10.1.1
2. 04 8
TX
P M-I CD 2
b Hu
Remote A, CDM-IP 3 (efi0) 10.20.1.1/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop Type 10.10.0.0/16 0x01 ToSat 239.255.30.10 N/A Sat-to-LAN RX HDLC Addresses - 0x02, 0x10
Satellite dish
TX
RX RX
10/100 BaseT LAN 10.10.0.0 /16
Hub CDM-IP 1 (efi0) 10.10.1.1/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 10.20.0.0/16 0x02 10.30.0.0/16 0x03 239.255.30.10 0x10 239.255.30.11 0x11 RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01 Type ToSat ToSat ToSat ToSat
PC IP 10.30.1.100/16 GW 10.30.1.1 Satellite dish RX TX Remote B, CDM-IP 4 (efi0) 10.30.1.1/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop Type 10.10.0.0/16 0x01 ToSat 239.255.30.10 N/A Sat-to-LAN 239.255.30.11 N/A Sat-to-LAN RX HDLC Addresses - 0x03, 0x10, 0x11
Hub CDM-IP 2 (RX Only) (efi0) 10.10.1.2/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 0.0.0.0/0 10.10.1.1 RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01 Type ToEth
Figure 3. Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint Diagram
Star Network Point-to-MultiPoint Configuration - Here, Hub CDM-IP 1 is transmitting a common 2.048 Mbps link to 2 remote CDM-IPs. In turn, Remote CDM-IP 3 is transmitting a 256 kbps link back to Hub CDM-IP 1. Remote CDM-IP 4 is also transmitting a 256 kbps link back to the Hub, but it is a separate link to Hub CDM-IP 2. Since this is a Point-to-MultiPoint configuration, HDLC addressing is used so that the traffic not intended for a particular destination can be filtered. For unicast traffic, it is best to associate a unique HDLC address for each site in the network. For this case, the Hub Site is HDLC 0x01, Remote A is HDLC 0x02 and Remote B is 0x03. Each CDM-IP modem would select the HDLC address associated with its site as a RX HDLC Address, so both CDM-IP modems at the Hub would have 0x01 as the first RX HDLC Address, CDM-IP 3 would have 0x02 and CDM-IP 4 would have 0x03. Hub CDM-IP 1 has static routes defined for both remote CDM-IP subnets with the Next Hop HDLC address being the HDLC address associated with the remote site. Both remote CDM-IPs have static routes to the hub with the next Hop being HDLC 0x01. The Hub RX only CDM-IP 2 has a default route (ToEth) to Hub CDM-IP 1 because all outbound traffic will go through CDM-IP 1.
Additionally, HDLC addresses can be used to select or filter multicast traffic on the hub outbound common carrier. Hub CDM-IP 1 has two multicast routes defined with two Next Hop HDLC addresses, 0x10 and 0x11. Remote CDM-IP 2 has RX HDLC Address 0x10 enabled to receive one of the multicast streams. Remote CDM-IP 3 has RX HDLC Addresses 0x10 and 0x11 enabled to receive both of the multicast streams. Additonal remote sites can be added through a dedicated RX Only CDM-IP at the hub for each remote.
Satellite 10/100 BaseT LAN 10.20.0.0 /16 Type ToSat ToSat 10/100 BaseT LAN 10.30.0.0 /16 Type ToEth PC IP 10.10.1.100/16 GW 10.10.1.1
emo all R te -IPs CDM
256 kbps to Hub CDM-IP 1
Satellite dish RX
ps 8 Mb 2.04
to
PC IP 10.20.1.100/16 GW 10.20.1.1
bp 6k 25
TX
Satellite dish
Remote A, CDM-IP 3 (efi0) 10.20.1.1/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 10.10.0.0/16 0x01 10.30.0.0/16 0x03 RX HDLC Addresses - 0x02
st oH MCD ub
TX
RX RX
IP 2
Hub CDM-IP 1 (efi0) 10.10.1.1/16 10/100 BaseT LAN 10.10.0.0 /16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 10.20.0.0/16 0x02 10.30.0.0/16 0x03 RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01 Type ToSat ToSat
Satellite dish RX TX
PC IP 10.30.1.100/16 GW 10.30.1.1
Hub CDM-IP 2 (RX Only) (efi0) 10.10.1.2/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 0.0.0.0/0 10.10.1.1 RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01 Type ToEth
Remote B, CDM-IP 4 (efi0) 10.30.1.1/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 10.10.0.0/16 0x01 10.20.0.0/16 0x01 RX HDLC Addresses - 0x03 Type ToSat ToSat
RX
Remote B, CDM-IP 5 (RX Only) (efi0) 10.30.1.2/16 Static Routes IP Dest Next Hop 0.0.0.0/0 10.30.1.1 RX HDLC Addresses - 0x03
Figure 4. Router Mode, Partial Mesh, 1 Hop Diagram
Full or partial Mesh Network Configuration The Star Network configuration works for a hub-centric network, where all traffic is either coming to, or from, one central hub. There are several ways to send traffic between remote sites.
The first method does not require any additional CDM-IP modems than is described in Figure 1 , Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint Diagram. Just by adding static routes, traffic could be sent between Remote Site A and B. Remote site A and B would add a static route for remote destination subnet, but since the path to the remotes must go through the Hub, the Next Hop HDLC Address would be 0x01, not the HDLC address of the Remote. Traffic from Remote B would be transmitted to Hub RX Only CDM-IP 2, forwarded to Hub CDM-IP 1 and retransmitted to Remote A. With this method, all traffic must go through a double hop in order to arrive at the destination. To avoid the additional delay of the double hop method, an alternative method would require an additional RX Only CDM-IP modem at remote site for every other remote site connection needed. In the Figure above, Router Mode, Partial Mesh, 1 Hop Diagram, Remote Site B has added a RX Only CDM-IP and a static route to 10.20.0.0/16, Next Hop 0x01 (through the Hub). Remote Site A has added a static route for 10.30.0.0/16, Next Hop 0x03. To establish a connection between Remote A and B, Remote A would reconfigure the TX frequency and data rate to set up a link with the Remote B RX Only modem. The return path still must go from B to the Hub and then to A, but A has a direct link to B, thus this is considered a 1 hop link. Additional RX Only or full duplex CDM-IPs can be added at Remotes based upon what 1 hop link or single hop connections are required. Always use the following guidelines: 1) All CDM-IP modems will list the Site HDLC as their first RX HDLC Address. 2) For Satellite routes, the Next Hop is the destination Site HDLC (unless there is not a direct satellite link, whereas the Next Hop must be the Hub Site). 3) RX Only CDM-IP modems will need a default To Ethernet route to a duplex CDM-IP at the site in order to forward traffic. Feature Support - The CDM-IP modem also has several standard and optional features that can be used to further optimize security, performance and efficiency. The following table defines how these features are supported in the two different Working Modes:
easyConnect Mode Point-to-Point Only HDLC Address Mode 10/100BaseT Operation Traffic Access Lists 10BaseT Only IP v4, non-IP None 1 Encrypt Decrypt Key All traffic encrypted when enabled Min/Max; Max/Priority; DiffServ Router Mode Point-to-Point, Small Network, Large Network (can be Point-toMultipoint) 10 or 100BaseT IP v4 only 4 Clients by IP or IP Subnet Up to 8 Encrypt Decrypt Keys or random Traffic encrypted on a per route basis Min/Max; Max/Priority; DiffServ
3xDES Encryption
Quality of Service
10
Header Compression Payload Compression Multicast IGMP Remote upgrade by FTP
Yes Yes Framer II required (PL/9956) Select either all or no Multicast, Uplink or Downlink No Yes
Yes, on a per route basis Yes, on a per route basis Framer II required (PL/9956) All or specific Multicast streams, Uplink or Downlink Yes Yes
1.3.10 IP TRAFFIC CLASSIFYING

Ability to classify IP traffic by Source, Destination, Port and Applications (FTP, RTP, HTTP, SMTP, etc).
11
1.4 OPTIONS
Enhancing the CDM-IPs performance is easy. Additional features can be added quickly on site, using the FAST access code purchased from Comtech EF Data. To enable these features, simply enter the code at the front panel.
Description Turbo Product Coding (TPC) 3x DES Data Encryption IP Header Compression Quality of Service (QoS) Payload Compression Software Version 1.1.0 and later 1.1.0 and later 1.1.0 and later 1.1.0 and later 1.3.0 and later
Note: Enabling the CDM-IP Demo Mode from the front panel can temporarily enable all IP FAST Options (except 3xDES Encryption) for evaluation. Once enabled, the IP FAST Options will be available for a total time period of seven (7) days (168 hours). The 7-day Demo Mode is a cumulative counter (can be stopped and started at any time).
1.4.1 TURBO PRODUCT CODING (TPC)

The optional Turbo Product Coding (TPC) is a recent development in FEC techniques that delivers significant performance improvements when compared to Viterbi with concatenated Reed-Solomon. TPC simultaneously offers increased coding gain, markedly lower decoding delay (leading to improved TCP/IP performance), and bandwidth savings of up to 40%. The TPC option includes two modes (BPSK 22/44 and BPSK 5/16) that permit operation from exceptionally small antennas where flux density issues are of concern.
1.4.2 3XDES ENCRYPTION WITH ABILITY TO CHANGE KEYS

The CDM-IP optionally supports 3xDES-128 encryption and decryption, for the highest level security for link encryption. Each unit supports eight encryption keys and eight decryption keys. The keys are user configurable. Each route can be assigned to be encrypted by any of the eight available keys, random key method, or transmitted in clear.
12
1.4.3 IP HEADER COMPRESSION

Header Compression is also an optional feature of the CDM-IP modem. The CDM-IP supports Header Compression for the following Ethernet and Layer 3 & 4 Headers:
Supported Ethernet Headers Ethernet 2.0 Ethernet 2.0 + VLAN-tag Ethernet 2.0 + MPLS 802.3-raw 802.3-raw + VLAN-tag 802.3 + 802.2 802.3 + 802.2 + VLAN-tag 802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP 802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP + VLAN-tag 802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP + MPLS Supported Layer 3&4 Headers IP TCP UDP RTP (Codec Independent)
Header Compression reduces the required VoIP bandwidth by 60%. Example: A G.729a voice codec, operating at 8 kbps, will occupy 32 kbps once encapsulated into IP framing on a LAN. Using IP/UDP/RTP Header Compression, the same traffic only needs 10.8 kbps total WAN satellite bandwidth to cross the link. A total maximum of 64 simultaneous VoIP calls can be compressed. Normal Web/HTTP traffic can be reduced an additional 10% via IP/TCP header compression. Header Compression Configuration Header Compression is completely independent from QoS, and there is no configuration required except enabling the Header Compression feature on both the sending and receiving CDM-IP modem. Packets with a Header Compression supported header will automatically be identified for compression. The only configuration consideration is the Header Compression Refresh Rate. This is how many compressed header packets will be sent before a single full header packet is sent. Some compressed header traffic could be lost during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full header packet will allow the return of the traffic stream. The Refresh Rate can be increased for poor satellite link conditions or decreased to further reduce overhead. Header Compression Statistics - These statistics will display the total bytes of the precompressed and post-compressed traffic and effective compression ratio.
13
1.4.4 QUALITY OF SERVICE

Quality of Service (QoS) is an optional feature of the CDM-IP modem. The user may select one of three modes of QoS operation: Mode 1 QoS Rules based on Maximum Bandwidth and Priority Mode 2 QoS Rules based on Minimum and Maximum Bandwidth Mode 3 DiffServ
QoS Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) Packet Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) is enabled automatically while QoS is enabled. However, SAR is an adaptive process; it will trigger only if the packet latency exceeds the threshold value (default to 20 msec). Latency value is calculated based on the satellite transmission bandwidth. The minimum segment size was limited to 480 bytes excluding satellite HDLC header in order to avoid satellite overhead and consumption of CPU cycles.
1.4.4.1 MAXIMUM BANDWIDTH/PRIORITY MODE

QoS Rules can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.), Source/Destination IP (specific or range), and/or Layer 3 Source/Destination Port. Priority - A Priority level from 1 to 8 is assigned for each flow. The CDM-IP module classifies each packet that is to be forwarded over the satellite. The packet will then have a Priority assigned according to the defined QoS Rules. Any packet that does not meet a QoS Rule is assigned to the Default Rule and will be assigned a Priority of 8. Priority 1 packets will be forwarded immediately, Priority 2 packets will be forwarded as soon as there are no Priority 1 packets in the Queue, and so on. Any latency critical traffic, such as VoIP/RTP should always be assigned Priority 1. Maximum Bandwidth - This can also be assigned to a flow to restrict the Maximum Bandwidth that any particular flow will utilize, or the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected. Filtering - QoS also allows specific flows to be designated as filtered, so the CDM-IP will discard traffic that the user does not want to forward over a satellite link. QoS Rule Hierarchy - It is quite possible to have traffic that meets the definitions of several QoS Rules. All traffic will be classified into the first QoS Rule that is a match, or fall into the Default Rule. The most specific QoS Rule will always be first. For example, a QoS Rule that identified a Source and Destination IP Address would be assigned ahead of a rule that just defined RTP protocol. QoS Rules that have the same amount of variables defined are sorted as follows:
14
1. Having a Protocol defined. Protocol Priority: a. VOCE b. VDEO c. RTPS d. RTP e. PFTP f. HTTP g. TELN h. SMTP i. SNMP j. SQL k. ORCL l. CTRX m. SAP n. UDP o. TCP p. IP q. N-IP Voice Real Time Protocol Video Real Time Protocol Real Time Protocol Signalling All Real Time Protocol Passive File Transfer Protocol Hypertext Transfer Protocol Telnet Protocol Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol Structured Query Language Protocol ORACLE Protocol CITRIX Protocol Service Announcement Protocol User Datagram Protocol Transmission Control Protocol All Internet Protocol All Non-Internet Protocol
2. Source IP Address or subnet defined. 3. Destination IP Address or subnet defined. 4. Source Port defined (lowest Port number first). 5. Destination Port defined (lowest Port number first). The CDM-IP modem will sort each QoS rule as they are added and the QoS Configuration display will be updated to reflect the order with which rules are matched. QoS Statistics - Every QoS Rule defined can be monitored to see the traffic flow for each Queue. These statistics will display the traffic sent in each Queue, the amount of dropped traffic, and the number of Active Flows. Protocol and Port Number Considerations - When defining QoS Rules, it is important to be aware of specifics of the traffic for which the rule is intended.When selecting a protocol for a QoS Rule, be aware that the CDM-IP allows for a very abroad selection (such as IP) or a very specific protocol. For example, RTP traffic can consist of UDP portion (for voice or video) and a TCP portion (for RTP signaling). These could have separate QoS Rules created or all be included in a single Rule by selecting RTP as the protocol. The following diagram illustrates where each protocol selection resides.
15
UDP
VOCE VDEO
IP
RTP RTPS TCP TELN ORCL pFTP SMTP CTRX HTTP SAP SQL
Non IP
Note: Selecting pFTP as the protocol only applies to passive FTP, so it is necessary to insure the FTP server and client are operating in passive FTP.
Selection of Source/Destination Ports should only be done if the user is aware of the port usage of the desired protocol or application. There are well known ports for various protocols, but often only the command messaging is transacted on these ports and the data is transferred through a negotiated port.
16
The following table can be used as a reference for some well known Port numbers:
Port 1 7 20 21 22 23 25 42 53 69 70 80 108 109 110 115 Description TCP Port Service Multiplexer (TCPMUX) ECHO FTP - Data FTP - Control SSH Remote Login Protocol Telnet Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Host Name Server (Nameserv) Domain Name System (DNS) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) Gopher Services HTTP SNA Gateway Access Server POP2 POP3 Simple File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) Port 118 119 137 139 150 156 161 179 190 197 396 443 444 546 547 1080 Description SQL Services Newsgroup (NNTP) NetBIOS Name Service NetBIOS Datagram Service NetBIOS Session Service SQL Server SNMP Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Gateway Access Control Protocol (GACP) Directory Location Service (DLS) Novell Netware over IP HTTPS Simple Network Paging Protocol (SNPP) DHCP Client DHCP Server Socks
IMPORTANT
Once the QoS Rules are defined, each type of traffic flow should be isolated and sent to verify that it is being sent in the intended QoS Rule.
1.4.4.2 MINIMUM/MAXIMUM BANDWIDTH QOS MODE

QoS Rules can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.), Source/Destination IP (specific or range), and/or Layer 3 Source/Destination Port. Maximum Bandwidth - This can be assigned to a flow to restrict the Maximum Bandwidth that any particular flow will utilize, or the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected. Minimum Bandwidth - Minimum specification that allows a committed information rate (CIR) to be applied to user defined classes of traffic, or the default of no minimum bandwidth can be selected.
17
Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) Without Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED), output buffers fill during periods of congestion. When the buffers are full, tail drop occurs; all additional packets are dropped. Since the packets are dropped all at once, global synchronization of TCP hosts can occur as multiple TCP hosts reduce their transmission rates. As the congestion clears, the TCP hosts increase their transmissions rates, resulting in waves of congestion followed by periods where the transmission link is not fully used. WRED allows for more graceful dropping of packets, as QoS queues get full. In the previous CDM-IP release, a simple tail drop algorithm was applied to packets as they were being added to the QoS queues. This can result in large number of contiguous packets being dropped which causes many protocols such as RTP and TCP to ungracefully degrade performance in a overconsumed or bursty scenario. WRED applies a randomization which means that the percentage change to drop packets increases as the queue becomes full, and minimizes the chances of global synchronization. Thus, WRED allows the transmission line to be used fully at all times. Filtering Any specific flow can be designated as filtered (see Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS). QoS Rule Hierarchy The QoS Rule Hierarchy is the same as Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS. QoS Statistics - QoS Statistics are displayed as Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS.
1.4.4.3 DIFFSERV QOS MODE

The CDM-IP QoS can also be set to DiffServ Mode to make it fully compliant to the Differential Services QoS standards. Class Selector DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) Some implementations of DiffServ will prioritize traffic by Class Selector assignment. This is defined in the DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) within the IP header. The first 3 bits of the DSCP define the Class Selector Precedence (or Priority): Class Selector Precedence 1 Precedence 2 Precedence 3 Precedence 4 Precedence 5 Precedence 6 Precedence 7 Default DSCP 001 000 010 000 011 000 100 000 101 000 110 000 111 000 000 000 CDM-IP Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
The CDM-IP will prioritize the traffic based upon the DSCP Class Selector Precedence. NOTE: All traffic that does not have the DSCP Class Selector Precedence defined (000 000) will be placed in the Default Queue and have a Precedence of 9.
18
Expedited Forwarding and Assured Forwarding DSCP Another implementation of DiffServ uses all 6 bits of the DSCP to define Expedited and Assured Forwarding: DiffServ Type Expedited Forwarding Assured Forwarding Class 1 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Class Selector Precedence 1 Precedence 8 Precedence 8 Precedence 8 Precedence 8 DSCP 101 110 001 xx0 010 xx0 011 xx0 100 xx0 CDM-IP Priority 1 8 8 8 8
Expedited Forwarding (EF) DSCP This defines premium service and is recommended for real time traffic applications such as VoIP and video conferencing. Assured Forwarding (AF) DSCP This defines 4 service levels and also uses the last 3 bits of the DSCP to define the Drop Precedence (Low, Medium, or High). The Drop Precedence determines which packets will most likely be dropped during periods of over congestion, similar to Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED). As a result, each of the 4 AF service levels also have 3 Drop Precedence levels for which the CDM-IP provides 12 seperate queues. Minimum Bandwidth (AF only) - Minimum specification that allows a committed information rate (CIR) to be applied to user defined classes of traffic, or the default of no minimum bandwidth can be selected. Maximum Bandwidth (AF only) - This can be assigned to a flow to restrict the maximum bandwidth that any particular flow will utilize, or the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected. NOTE: Minimum and maximum bandwidth is only configurable for each of the 4 Assured Forwarding classes. NOTE: Typically, DiffServ is implemented using exclusively Class Selector DSCP or exclusively Expedited and Assured Forwarding DSCP. The CDM-IP is fully DiffServ compliant and will work with either DiffServ implementation or with a combination of both.
1.4.5 PAYLOAD COMPRESSION

Traffic optimization through Payload Compression is another optional feature of the CDM-IP modem. Framer II required FAST feature to upgrade Uses AHA chip Compression algorithm applied to all data (HDLC header excluded)
19
Compression statistics are fed back to QoS in order to maximize WAN utilization while maintaining priority, jitter and latency. 1024 simultaneous compression sessions to maximize compression across multiple distinct traffic flows. Compression algorithm not applied to RTP streams because this traffic is already compressed and would only INCREASE the sat bandwidth if compressed again. Additional statistics have been added to the compression statistics menu in order to provide feedback on the compression efficiency that has been achieved.
ADLC vs LZS compression comparison Note: These numbers have been generated by using an internally created test program. This program takes the target benchmark files and splits the files into payload size chunks and compresses each chunk in a separate invocation of the compression algorithm. This is important to note because most compression algorithms are applied to the entire file data set as a single invocation of the compression algorithm which is easier for other types of compression algorithms (LZS, GZIP in specific). This, of course, does not apply to streamed packet data across an IP network (ftp transfer, for example). Algorithm ADLC ADLC ADLC ADLC ADLC ADLC ADLC ADLC LZS LZS LZS LZS LZS LZS LZS LZS 1472 1000 500 100 1472 1000 500 100 1472 1000 500 100 1472 1000 500 100 Payload size File Set Calgary Calgary Calgary Calgary Canterbury Canterbury Canterbury Canterbury Calgary Calgary Calgary Calgary Canterbury Canterbury Canterbury Canterbury 1.76 1.76 1.77 2.09 1.71 1.72 1.74 2.04 1.66 1.66 1.68 1.97 1.61 1.62 1.63 1.91 Ratio
20
1.4.6 CDM-IP DEMO MODE

The CDM-IP Demo Mode allows for the enabling of the following IP optional features for seven days (168 hours): IP Header Compression Payload Compression Quality of Service To enable Demo Mode, use the CDM-IP Front Panel to select UTIL\DEMO\ON. The seven day Demo Mode Timer will start but can be stopped at any time by setting Demo Mode to OFF.
21
1.5
SPECIFICATIONS
52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 176 MHz (option), stability 1.5 ppm, 0 to 500 C 50 and 75 (Front panel selectable), 17 dB min. return loss BNC, female 10T/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45 connector) DB25 female, providing: (CDM-550 mode only) EIA422/EIA530 DCE V.35 DCE X.21 DCE and DTE Sync / Async EIA232
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS (FULLY ENHANCED) Frequency Range Input/Output Impedance IF Connector Data Interface
External TX Carrier Off WAN Encapsulation Data rate range
By TTL low signal or external contact closure hardware function automatically overrides processor HDLC 1 Overall, 2.4 kbps 2.048 Mbps 4.8 kbps - 2.048 Mbps, Uncoded BPSK 9.6 kbps - 2.048 Mbps, Uncoded QPSK/OQPSK 2.4 kbps - 1024 kbps, Rate 1/2 BPSK 4.8 kbps - 2.048 Mbps, Rate 1/2 QPSK/OQPSK 7.2 kbps - 2.048 Mbps, Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK 8.4 kbps - 2.048 Mbps, Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK 2.4 kbps - 1145 kbps, Rate 21/44 BPSK Turbo 2.4 kbps - 750 kbps, Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo (Fully Independent Tx and Rx rates) Transparent mode, no RS coding - per CCITT V.35 EDMAC mode, no RS coding - externally synchronized Turbo Product Code mode - externally synchronized
Scrambling
22
FEC FEC None: Uncoded BPSK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi: k=7, per IESS 308/309 BPSK: Rate 1/2 QPSK/OQPSK: Rate 1/2, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 Sequential: k=36 (Rate 1/2) per IESS 309 k= 63 (Rate 3/4) per IESS 309 k= 87 (Rate 7/8) Turbo Product Codec (Optional plug-in card): Rate 3/4 QPSK - 2 dimensional Rate 21/44 BPSK - 3 dimensional Rate 5/16 BPSK - 3 dimensional 5% overhead (Except Turbo BPSK modes, which add 1.5%) Target Eb/No Range: 0 to 9.9 dB Max AUPC Range: 0 to 9 dB Monitor Functions Miscellaneous Front panel Loopbacks Fault relays M&C Interface Tactile keypad, 6 keys (Up/Down, Left/Right, Enter/Clear) Vacuum Fluorescent Display (blue) - 2 lines of 24 characters Internal IF, digital, and near/far Hardware fault, Rx and Tx Traffic Alarms EIA-232 and EIA-485 (addressable multi-drop) EIA-485 may be either 2-wire or 4-wire RJ-11 Command Line Interface (CLI) for control of IP configuration parameters. EDMAC software for control of local and distant units Distant end Eb/No Tx power level increase
Overhead Framed EDMAC/AUPC AUPC
M&C Software
23
NETWORKING PROTOCOLS 1 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Internet Protocol (IP) Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) IPv4 Routing Internet Group Management Protocol User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Simple Network Management Protocol Telnet Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) File transfer protocol (FTP) Supported RFCs and PROTOCOLS1 RFC 768 User Datagram Protocol RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol RFC 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol RFC 862 Echo Protocol RFC 959 File Transfer Protocol RFC 1213 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internet: MIB-II RFC 2045 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) RFC 2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the Ipv4 and Ipv6 Headers RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2) RFC 2598 An Expedited Forwarding PHB RFC 2821 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol RFC 791 Internet Protocol RFC 793 Transmission Control Protocol RFC 856 Telnet Binary Transmission RFC 894 A Standard for the Transmission of IP Datagrams over Ethernet Networks RFC 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting RFC 1812 Requirements for IP Version 4 Routers RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 RFC 2475 An Architecture for Differentiated Services RFC 2597 Assured Forwarding PHB Group RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP/1.1 RFC 3412 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configurable static ARP entries IP v4 Configurable PING response or ignore; Trace route Configurable static routes Supports IGMP v1 & v2 IP v4 IP v4 Supports SNMP v1 or v2 Configurable Telnet access or ignore IP v4 IP v4
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
24
OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE CONFIGURATION & MANAGEMENT Console interface SNMP v2 Private Modem Specific MIB SNMP MIB II support Telnet HTTP Remote software / firmware upgrade Local software / firmware upgrade Configuration backup & restore Event Log Diagnostics Traffic statistics Faults & alarms SECURITY Password Protection 3 levels of access Access Lists 4 definable Access Lists (individual IP or IP range) CONSOLE / REMOTE CONTROL PORT Interface
1
EIA-232 or EIA-485 (2- or 4-wire)
Not available in CDM-550 emulation mode
MODULATOR Transmit Filtering Frequency Stability Harmonics and Spurious Transmit On/Off Ratio Phase Noise Output Power Accuracy DEMODULATOR Input Range -30 to -60 dBm 6th order Butterworth, per IESS 308 1.5 ppm, 0 to 50 C < -55 dBc/4 kHz 55 dB minimum < 0.24 rms double-sided, 100 Hz to 1 MHz 0 to -20 dBm, 0.1dB steps 0.5 dB over frequency and temperature
25
Max Composite Level Acquisition Range Acquisition Time Example: Clock tracking range
+35 dBc up to a max of -5 dBm 1 to 30 kHz (1 kHz steps) Depends on data rate, FEC rate and acquisition range At 512 kbps, R1/2 QPSK, 30 kHz sweep, acquisition time = 0.25 seconds, average 100 ppm min.
BER PERFORMANCE (Met with two adjacent carriers 7 dB higher) Guaranteed Eb/No , in dB (Typical values in parentheses) Viterbi 10 10
-5 -6
5.4 (4.9) 6.0 (5.5) 6.7 (6.2) 4.8 (4.2) 5.2 (4.5) 5.6 (4.8) 3/4(Q) 3.9 (3.5) 4.1 (3.7) 4.3 (4.0)
6.8 (6.3) 7.4 (6.9) 8.2 (7.7) 5.8 (5.3) 6.4 (5.8) 6.9 (6.3) 21/44(B) 2.8 (2.5) 3.1 (2.8) 3.3 (3.0)
7/8 7.7 (7.2) 8.4 (7.9) 9.0 (8.6) 7/8 7.0 (6.6) 7.5 (7.2) 8.0 (7.7) 5/16(B) 2.3 (2.0) 2.6 (2.3) 2.8 (2.5)
10-7 Sequential (64 kbps) 10-5 10 10

-6 -7
Turbo Product Codec 10

-6
10-7 10
-8
Monitor Functions
Eb/No , Frequency Offset, BER, Buffer fill status, coarse AGC value
ENVIRONMENTAL AND PHYSICAL Temperature Operating: 0 to 50 C Storage: -25 to 70 C Power Supply Power Consumption Physical Dimensions Weight CE Approvals 100 to 240 volts AC, 50/60 Hz 22 W typical, 30 W maximum 1U high, 12 (305 mm) deep 7 lbs (3.2 kg) EN55022 Class B (Emissions) EN50082-1 Part 1 (Immunity) EN60950 (Safety) FCC Approval FCC Part 15 Class B
26
Figure 5. Typical Coarse AGC Voltage Characteristic
27
1.6
DIMENSIONAL ENVELOPE
Figure 6. CDM-IP Dimensional Envelope
28
NOTES
29
Installation
Unpacking and Inspection ....... Mounting Kits ........................... Configuration ........................... Select Internal IF Loop ............ Connect External Cables......... Connector Description ............. 31 31 32 32 32 33
2.1
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION

Inspect shipping containers for damage. If shipping containers are damaged, keep them until the contents of the shipment have been carefully inspected and checked for normal operation. Remove the packing list from the outside of the shipping carton. Open the carton and remove the contents, checking the contents against the packing list. Verify completeness of the shipment and that the unit functions correctly. If damage is evident, contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data immediately and submit a damage report. Keep all shipping materials for the carrier's inspection. If the unit needs to be returned to Comtech EF Data, please use the original shipping container.
2.2
MOUNTING KITS
If the CDM-IP is to be mounted in a rack, ensure that there is adequate clearance for ventilation. The limit is four units, and then a blank 1U panel must be inserted to allow sufficient airflow around the units. In rack systems where there is high heat dissipation, forced air cooling must be provided by top or bottom mounted fans or blowers. Under no circumstances should the highest internal rack temperature be allowed to exceed 50 C. The CDM-IP is very light - under 7 pounds (3.2 kgs), and very short - 12 inches (305 mm). For this reason, it has not been designed to have rack slides mounted to the side of the chassis. However, Comtech EF Data recommends that some method of support within the rack should be employed, such as rack shelves. If there is any doubt, please consult the factory.
31
2.3
CONFIGURATION
There are no internal jumpers to configure, no interface cards to install, and no other options to install. All configuration is carried out entirely in software. The unit should first be configured locally, using the front panel keypad and display. The unit will ship with a default 64 kbps, QPSK, Rate 1/2 configuration. Please see the FRONT PANEL OPERATION section for details on how to fully configure the unit for the desired operating parameters.
2.4
SELECT INTERNAL IF LOOP

Correct operation of the unit may be verified rapidly, without the need for externally connected equipment. From the top level menu, select TEST, then IF LOOP (see the FRONT PANEL OPERATION section). The demod should synchronize, and the green RECEIVE TRAFFIC LED should illuminate. If the unit does not pass this test, call the factory for assistance.
Note: Please ensure the unit is not plugged into LAN while performing this test.
2.5
CONNECT EXTERNAL CABLES

Having verified correct operation in IF loop, enter the desired configuration, and proceed to connect all external cables. If difficulties occur, please call the factory for assistance. Please note that the modulator gives an output power level in the range 0 to -20 dBm, and the demodulator expects to see a signal in the range -30 to -60 dBm.
Figure 7. Rear Panel
32
2.6
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
External cables are attached to connectors on the rear panel of the CDM-IP. These comprise the IEC line input connector, the Receive and Transmit IF connectors, the Data connector, Alarms connector, Remote Control connector, and Auxiliary Serial connector. See 12, Connector Pinouts, for details. The IEC line input connector contains the ON/OFF switch for the unit. It is also fitted with two fuses - one each for line and neutral connections (or L1, L2, where appropriate). These are contained within the body of the connector, behind a small plastic flap. For 230 volt AC operation, use T0.5A, (slow-blow) 20 mm fuses. For 115 volt AC operation, use T1A fuses, (slow-blow) 20 mm fuses.
FOR CONTINUED USER SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.
IF Ports - The IF port connectors are both a 50 BNC female type. 75 cable connectors (male) will have no problem mating with this 50 type. Data - The primary Data connector for the CDM-IP is the RJ-45 connector providing the 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface. In CDM-550 emulation mode, the Data connector is a 25 pin D type female (DB25-F). This connector conforms to the EIA-530 pinout, which allows for connection of different electrical standards, including EIA-422/530, V.35, and EIA-232. Please note that it is the responsibility of the user to provide the appropriate cables to connect to this EIA-530 connector. A shielded 25 pin D type provides a very solid solution to EMC problems, unlike the sometimes used V.35 Winchester connector. The pinout for the EIA-530 connector is provided in the next section. Note that the currently selected interface type is indicated by a small orange LED which is located immediately above the connector. This provides an easy visual indication to anyone mating a connector at the rear of the unit. Alarms - The Alarms connector is a 15 pin 'D' type male (DB15-M). This provides the user with access to the Form-C relay contacts which indicate the fault status of the unit. These are typically connected to an external fault monitoring system, often found in satellite earth stations. In addition, the receive I and Q demodulator samples are provided on this connector. Connecting these signals to an oscilloscope in X,Y mode will provide the receive signal constellation diagram, which is a useful diagnostic aid. A pin is also provided which can mute the transmit carrier. This requires that the pin be shorted to ground, or a TTL low, or an EIA-232 high signal be applied.
33
As an aid to antenna pointing, or for driving step-track equipment, an analog AGC signal is provided on a pin of this connector. The demodulator incorporates three separate AGC control loops, one of which is analog, and two of which are entirely digital. The first of these loops keeps the signal level constant at the input to the flash A/D converter in the final IF stage. This loop has a limited dynamic range (~ 35 dB) and operates on the total power within the IF bandwidth (which varies with data rate). The characteristics of this control voltage are shown at the rear of the specifications section. The pinout details for this connector are provided in the appendices. Remote Control - The Remote Control connector is a 9 pin 'D' type female (DB9-M). Access is provided to remote control ports of the modem, both EIA-232 and RS485. The pinout details for this connector are provided in the next section. Console Port The console port is available for local configuration and management of the Ethernet interface. This port is an EIA-232 port and uses a standard RJ-11. Auxiliary Serial Port - The Auxiliary Serial connector is an HE1402 3 pin header. A suitable mate for this connector is AMP part number 281838-3, with three crimp pins, AMP part number 182734-2, also required. This is an additional EIA-232 serial port, which is only used when the modem is part of a 1:1 pair. The pinout details for this connector are provided in the next section.
34
NOTES:
35
Operation
Methods of Operation .............................. 37 Front Panel Operation ............................. 38 Serial Remote Control Operations........... 38 Serial Command Line Interface (CLI) Operations ............................................... 38 Telnet Operations .................................... 38 Web Server Operation............................. 38 SNMP Operations.................................... 39
3.1
METHODS OF OPERATION
The CDM-IP IP-Centric Modem may be setup and operated using any of the following methods:
User Interface Front Panel Serial Remote Control Serial Command Line Interface (CLI) Telnet
Connection Keypad Serial RS-232/RS-485 via Remote Control Port B Serial RS-232 via Console Port Ethernet via 10/100BaseT IP interface Ethernet via 10/100BaseT IP interface Ethernet via 10/100BaseT IP interface
Modem Functions ALL ALL
CDM-IP Functions IP Address/Subnet only IP Address/Subnet only
Reference Chapter 4 Chapter 5
ALL ALL
ALL ALL
Chapter 6 Chapter 6
ALL
ALL
Chapter 7
Web Server
ALL
ALL
Chapter 8
SNMP
37
LED Panel
Keypad
Display
CD M-IP 5 50 SATELLITE M OD EM
Figure 8. Front Panel
3.1.1
FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The front panel provides a menu driven, easy to operate, user interface that provides control of all modem parameters plus selection of the IP address and network prefix length. On the front panel of the unit, there is a keypad, the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD), and eight LED indicators. The user enters data via the keypad, and messages are displayed on the VFD. The LEDs indicate, in a summary fashion, the status of the unit. See 4, Front Panel Menus, for detailed operations.
3.1.2
SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The CDM-IP modem provides a standard serial (EIA-232, EIA-485 4-wire, or EIA-485 2-wire) interface that can be used only for monitor and control of CDM-IP modem parameters (Monitor and Control of the CDM-IP IP parameters is provided separately via the Console Port interface). Access to this application is provided via the Remote Control B (DB9) port on the back of the modem. See 5, Serial Remote Control, for detailed operations using this interface.
3.1.3
SERIAL COMMAND LINE INTERFACE (CLI) OPERATIONS

Serial Command Line Interface (CLI) via the RJ-11 Console Port for the CDM-IP has been combined with the Telnet interface. See 6, CLI and Telnet Interface, for detailed operations using this interface.
3.1.4
TELNET OPERATIONS
The CDM-IP modem provides a Telnet interface with an embedded, easy to use, multiple-level, menu system that can be used to monitor and control all CDM-IP modem and IP parameters. Access to this application is provided via the 10/100BaseT IP interface (RJ-45). See 6, CLI and Telnet Interface, for detailed operations using this interface.
3.1.5
WEB SERVER OPERATION

The CDM-IP modem provides an embedded web server application that serves standard HTML web pages that can be used to monitor and control all CDM-IP modem and IP parameters. These web pages have been designed for optimal performance when using Microsofts Internet Explorer version 5 or higher. Access to this application is provided via the 10/100BaseT IP interface (RJ-45). See 7, Web Server Pages, for detailed operations using this interface.
38
3.1.6
SNMP OPERATIONS
The CDM-IP modem supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP v1 or v2) interface that can be used to monitor and control all CDM-IP modem and IP parameters. Access to this application is provided via the 10/100BaseT IP interface (RJ-45). See 8, SNMP Interface, for detailed operations using this interface.
39
NOTES:
40
Front Panel Menus

Front Panel Operation .......... Keypad ................................. Menu Tree ............................ Menu Screens ...................... 41 41 44 47
4.1
FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The user can fully control and monitor the operation of the CDM-IP modem from the front panel, using the keypad and display. Nested menus are used, which display all available options, and prompt the user to carry out a required action. The display has two lines each of 24 characters. On most menu screens, the user will observe a flashing solid block cursor, which blinks at a once-per-second rate. This indicates the currently selected item, digit, or field. Where this solid block cursor would obscure the item being edited (for example, a numeric field) the cursor will automatically change to an underline cursor. If the user were to display the same screen for weeks at a time, the display could become burnt with this image. To prevent this, the unit has a screen saver feature which will activate after 1 hour. The top line of the display will show the Circuit ID (which can be entered by the user) and the bottom line will show the circuit Eb/Novalue (if the demod is locked) followed by Press any key..... The message moves from right to left across the screen, then wraps around. Pressing any key will restore the previous screen.
4.1.1
KEYPAD
The keypad comprises six individual key switches, mounted directly behind a fully sealed membrane overlay. They have a positive click action, which provides the user with tactile feedback. These six switches are identified as UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, RIGHT ARROW, LEFT ARROW, ENTER and CLEAR.
ENT CLR
41
Key RIGHT ARROW LEFT ARROW UP ARROW DOWN ARROW ENTER (ENT)
Function Moves the cursor to the right, when it is displayed. Moves the cursor to the left, when it is displayed. Used for editing the value at the current cursor position, if appropriate. If this is a numeric field, this will increment the value. Used for editing the value at the current cursor position, if appropriate. If this is a numeric field, this will decrement the value. Used to accept an edited entry. Most menus prompt the user to press this key, by displaying the text (PRESS ENTER), (ENTER) or (ENT). This results in the entry being accepted, and the user is then returned to the previous menu. Used to escape from the current operation and return to the previous menu.
CLEAR (CLR)
Note:
The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. If a key is held down for more than 1 second, the key action will repeat, automatically, at the rate of 15 keystrokes per second. This is particularly useful when editing numeric fields, with many digits, such as frequency or data rate.
4.1.2
VACUUM FLUORESCENT DISPLAY (VFD)

The VFD is an active display showing 2 lines, each of 24 characters. It produces a blue light, the brightness of which can be controlled by the user. It has greatly superior viewing characteristics compared to a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), and does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast.
42
4.1.3
LED INDICATORS
There are 8 LED indicators. The functions of these indicators are shown in the table below.
Table 1. Front Panel LED Indicators
LED Color Condition
Unit Status
Red Orange Green
A Unit Fault exists (Example: PSU fault) No Unit Faults, but a Traffic Fault exists No Unit Faults, or Traffic Faults No Tx Traffic Faults A Tx Traffic fault exists OR the Tx Carrier is in OFF state No Rx Traffic Faults (demod and Viterbi decoder are locked, everything is OK) A Rx Traffic fault exists (the demod may still be OK) The Unit is On Line, and carrying traffic The Unit is Off Line (standby) - forced by externally connected 1:1 or 1:N redundancy system There is a Stored Event in the log, which can be viewed from the front panel, or retrieved via the remote control interface There are no Stored Events The Unit is in Remote Mode - local monitoring is possible, but no local control The Unit is in Local Mode - remote monitoring is possible, but no remote control Framing on, EDMAC on, and unit defined as Slave Either no EDMAC, EDMAC Master, or Transparent mode is selected A Test Mode is selected (Example: IF Loopback) There is no Test Mode currently selected
Transmit Traffic
Green Off
Receive Traffic
Green Off
On line
Green Off
Stored Event Orange Off Remote Orange Off EDMAC Mode Orange Off Test Mode Orange Off
43
4.1.4
MENU TREE
The following figures show the menu structure of the CDM-IP front panel menu. The detailed screens and menus are described in subsequent paragraphs.
Figure 9. Front Panel Modem Menu Tree (1 of 3)
44
45
46
4.1.5
MENU SCREENS
4.1.5.1 OPENING SCREEN

DISPLAY COMTECH IP MODEM S/N 1209 S/W VER 1.22 SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This is an example of the Opening Screen. See CDM-IP Manual for correct version information. This screen is displayed whenever power is first applied to the unit. Pressing any key will take the user to the top level selection screen.
4.1.5.2 SELECT
DISPLAY SELECT: CONFIG TEST INFO MONIT STORE/LD UTIL ODU SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION CONFIG - Allows the user to fully configure the unit. TEST - Allows the user to invoke one of several test modes (loopbacks, for example). INFO - Allows the user to view information on the unit, without having to go into configuration screens. MONIT - Allows the user to monitor the alarm status of the unit, to view the log of stored events, and to display the Receive Parameters screen. STORE/LD - Allows the user to store and to retrieve up to 10 different modem configurations. UTIL - Allows the user to perform miscellaneous functions, such as setting the Real-time clock, adjusting the display brightness, etc. ODU - Allows the user to monitor and control a Comtech EF Data RF Transceiver, if connected.
47
4.1.5.2.1
SELECT\CONFIG
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION ALL TX RX The ALL menu sub-branch permits the user to completely configure the unit, being prompted, step by step, to make choices, or edit data. This is highly recommended for new users, as it will clearly demonstrate all the parameters which need to be set.
CONFIG: ALL TX RX FRAME INTFC REMCONT MASK IMPED
SELECT\CONFIG\TX
Allows the user to define, on a parameter-by-parameter basis, the transmit configuration of the unit. These menu sub-branches would be used if the user wished to change, for example, just the Transmit frequency.
DISPLAY TX: MOD FREQ DATA FEC ON/OFF PWR SCRAM CLK TSI SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Please select one of the following options: MOD FREQ DATA FEC ON/OFF PWR SCRAM CLK TSI
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\MODULATION
DISPLAY Note: SELECT TX MODULATION: BPSK QPSK OQPSK (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION If a TURBO FEC option is selected, the modulation type will be automatically fixed, and the user will be presented with a warning screen.
48
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\FREQUENCY
DISPLAY EDIT TX FREQUENCY: 72.2345 MHz (PRESS ENT SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Select the digit to be edited. Change the value of the digit using the UP/DOWN arrow keys, then press ENTER. The range of frequencies is from 52 88 MHz (70 MHz factory option) or 104 176 MHz (140 MHz factory option).
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\DATA RATE
DISPLAY EDIT TX DATA RATE: 2048.000 kbps(PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Select the digit to be edited. Change the value of the digit using the UP/DOWN arrow keys, then press ENTER. The overall range of data rates is from 2.4 kbps to 2.048 Mbps. Note: The minimum and maximum data rates are dependent on modulation type and FEC encoder rate. If the user changes the modulation or FEC, and the currently selected data rate is then invalid, it will be adjusted automatically.
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\FEC TYPE
DISPLAY SELECT FEC TYPE: VITERBI SEQUENTIAL NONE (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Any FEC type except TURBO If the Turbo Codec option is not installed, this menu will be displayed.
SELECT FEC TYPE: VITERBI SEQ TURBO NONE (ENTER
FEC screen displayed if the Turbo Codec option is installed.
Note: SELECT FEC ENCODER RATE: 1/2 3/4 7/8 (PRESS ENTER)
If BPSK is selected, only Rate 1/2 is permitted. A warning screen appears if this sub-branch is entered when in BPSK mode.
49
If the Turbo Codec option is installed, the following menu will be displayed: TX TURBO: 3/4-Q 21/44-B 5/16-B 3/4-OQ (ENTER) FEC Rate (Turbo Only) The Rate 3/4 OQPSK is new for Version 1.19. For further details, see Section 9.4, Turbo Product Codec (Option).
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\ON-OFF
DISPLAY SELECT TX OUTPUT STATE: ON OFF RTI (ENTER) ON OFF RTI* SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION
* NEW FEATURE RTI means RECEIVE/TRANSMIT INHIBIT. When selected, it will prevent the TX carrier from being transmitted, until the demodulator is locked. To avoid the Tx Carrier from being turned off when the demodulator loses lock for a very short period of time, the demodulator must be unlocked continuously for a period of 10 seconds before the transmit carrier is inhibited. This time interval is fixed and the user cannot change it.
Note: Having this feature enabled does not affect the internal IF loopback feature. But if an external IF loopback is attempted (connecting an external cable from the Tx IF output to the Rx IF input), then this will not work! The Tx carrier cannot turn on until the demod is locked, and the demod cannot lock, because the Tx output is off. The net result is that the demod will not lock, and the Tx carrier will not turn on.
USE THE RTI FEATURE WITH EXTREME CARE!

IMPORTANT
50
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\PWR
DISPLAY OUTPUT POWER LEVEL MODE: MANUAL AUPC (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION MANUAL AUPC
EDIT OUTPUT POWER LEVEL: -20.0 dBm (PRESS ENTER)
MANUAL display screen Default value is 3.0 dB, and upper limit is 9.9 dB
WARNING! AUTO UPLINK PWR CONTRL NEEDS FRAMED MODE
AUPC warning screen is shown if Framed Mode is not selected. See SELECT-CONFIG-FRAME menu.
TARGET Eb/No MAX RANGE ALARM DEMOD-UNLOCK(ENT)
AUPC screen if Framed mode is selected. ALARM DEMOD UNLOCK TARGET Eb/No screen EDIT TARGET Eb/No of the remote modem. Default value is 3.0 dB, and upper limit is 9.9 dB. MAX RANGE screen Default value is 1dB, and upper limit is 9 dB.
EDIT TARGET MIN Eb/No OF REMOTE MODEM:9.9dB (ENT
EDIT MAX PERMITTED POWER INCREASE: 1dB (ENTER)
SELECT ACTION AT MAXIMUM TX POWER: NONE TX ALARM
ALARM screen NONE TX
51
ACTION WHEN REMOTE DEMOD UNLOCKS: NOM-PWR MAX-PWR
DEMOD UNLOCK screen Select the action that will occur if the remote demod is unlocked. NOM-PWR MAX-PWR
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\SCRAM
DISPLAY SELECT TX SCRAMBLING OFF ON (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION When Transparent mode is selected, a V.35 scrambler is used. In Framed modes, a frame synchronized scrambler is used.
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\CLK
DISPLAY SELECT TX CLOCKING MODE: INT EXT LOOP-TIMED (ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION INT EXT LOOP-TIMED
INTERNAL - indicates that the CDM-IP will supply a clock to the DTE, which is derived from its internal high-stability source. EXTERNAL - indicates that the CDM-IP expects to receive a clock from the DTE, to which the unit can phase-lock its internal circuits. LOOP-TIMED - indicates that the transmit timing source should be the receive clock, from the direction of the satellite. This is a useful mode, in that no external connection needs to be made in this mode. If the demodulator loses lock, or if there is no receive signal present, the internal clock is substituted. Note also that this mode will work even with asymmetric RX and TX data rates.
52
SELECT\CONFIG\TX\TSI
DISPLAY SELECT TRANSMIT SPECTRAL INVERSION: OFF ON(ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION TSI - Transmit Spectral Interval ON OFF When in the ON position, and QPSK is selected, the transmit spectrum is inverted (which is the same as reversing the direction of phase rotation in the modulator). In BPSK, the time-order of bits out of the FEC encoder is reversed, to make the modem compatible with certain other manufacturers modems.
4.1.5.2.2
SELECT\CONFIG\RX
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Please select one of the following options: MOD FREQ DATA FEC ACQ DESCRAM CLK BUF RSI Eb/No
RX: MOD FRQ DATA FEC ACQ DESCRAM CLK BUF RSI Eb/No
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\MOD
DISPLAY SELECT RX MODULATION: BPSK QPSK OQPSK (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION BPSK QPSK OQPSK Note: If a TURBO FEC option is selected, the demodulation type will be automatically fixed, and the user will be presented with a warning screen.
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\FRQ
DISPLAY EDIT RX FREQUENCY: 72.2345 MHz (PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The range is 52 - 88 MHz (70 MHz factory option) or 104 - 176 MHz (140 MHz factory option).
53
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\DATA
DISPLAY EDIT RX DATA RATE: 64.000 kbps (PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The range is 2.4 kbps to 2.048 Mbps. Note: The minimum and maximum data rates are dependent on modulation type and FEC decoder rate. If the user changes the modulation or FEC, and the currently selected data rate is then invalid, it will be adjusted automatically.
SELECT\CONFIG\RX/FEC
DISPLAY SELECT FEC TYPE: VITERBI SEQUENTIAL NONE (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Any FEC type except TURBO If the Turbo Codec option is not installed, this menu will be displayed. VITERBI SEQUENTIAL NONE FEC screen displayed if the Turbo Codec option is installed. VITERBI SEQ TURBO NONE Note: SELECT FEC ENCODER RATE: 1/2 3/4 7/8 (PRESS ENTER) If BPSK is selected, only Rate 1/2 is permitted. A warning screen appears if this sub-branch is entered when in BPSK mode.
SELECT FEC TYPE: VITERBI SEQ TURBO NONE (ENTER
If the Turbo Codec option is installed, the following menu will be displayed: TX TURBO: 3/4-Q 21/44-B 5/16-B 3/4-OQ (ENTER) FEC Rate (Turbo Only) The Rate 3/4 OQPSK is new for Version 1.19. (For further details, see Section 9.4, Turbo Product Codec (Option).
54
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\ACQ
DISPLAY EDIT RX ACQ SWEEP RANGE: +/- 25 kHz (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The range is +/- 1 kHz to +/- 30 kHz. The value entered here determines the amount of frequency uncertainty the demodulator will sweep over in order to find and lock to an incoming carrier. When operating at low bit rates, large values of sweep range (compared to the data rate) will cause excessively long acquisition times. For example: selecting +/- 30 kHz with a data rate of 2.4 kbps, BPSK, will result in an average acquisition time of around 5 minutes.
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\DESCRAM
DISPLAY SELECT RX DE-SCRAMBLING: ON OFF (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION When Transparent mode is selected, a V.35 descrambler is used. In Framed mode, a framesynchronized descrambler is used. It is recommended that scrambling/descrambling be used at all times.
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\CLK
DISPLAY SELECT RX CLOCKING MODE: BUFFER ON OFF(PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION When OFF is selected, the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is disabled. The receive clock will then be derived from the satellite signal, and will therefore be subject to clock offsets relative to the local transmit clock, and a small amount (< 5%) clock jitter, due to the demodulation bit-timing recovery process at low values of Eb/No. When ON is selected, the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is enabled. The input to the buffer will be the signal from the satellite, with any clock offsets and jitter. The output from the buffer will be derived from the local TRANSMIT clock. In this way, the receive data will be perfectly synchronous with this local clock. The CDM-IP can be operated with independent transmit receive and transmit data rates. Even in this configuration, where RX data rate <> TX data rate, the output clock for the buffer will be phase locked to the transmit clock.
55
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\BUF
DISPLAY EDIT RX BUFFER SIZE: +/-4096 BITS (PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Edit the size, in bits of the Plesiochronous/Doppler Buffer. Values of +/- 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bits are possible. If the buffer is disabled, a warning message will be displayed if this screen is entered.
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\RSI
DISPLAY SELECT RECEIVE SPECTRAL INVERSION: OFF ON(ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This should normally be in the OFF position. When in the ON position, the receive spectrum is inverted (which is the same as reversing the direction of phase rotation in the demodulator). Note that in BPSK mode, the demodulator will automatically synchronize to either the normal time-ordering of bits FEC codeword pairs, or the inverted ordering used by certain other manufacturers.
SELECT\CONFIG\RX\Eb/No
DISPLAY EDIT Eb/No ALARM POINT: 2.0 dB (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The range of values is from 2.0 to 16.0 dB. The user may select a value here, and if the Eb/No falls below this value, a receive traffic fault will be generated.
56
4.1.5.2.3
SELECT\CONFIG\FRAME
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION TRANSPARENT - No framing is selected. No overhead is added, and the unit will be compatible with other manufacturers equipment, when operating in a standard configuration (IESS 308 filtering, V.35 scrambling, Viterbi).
SELECT FRAMING MODE: TRANSPARENT FRAMED (ENT)
SELECT\CONFIG\FRAMED
DISPLAY SELECT FRAMING OPTION: EDMAC-OFF EDMAC-ON (ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Embedded Distant-end Monitor & Control is enabled or disabled in this sub-menu. If EDMAC-OFF is selected then none of the EDMAC features are available, even though framing will still be enabled. If EDMAC-ON is selected, the user is further prompted to select whether the unit is an EDMAC master, or an EDMAC slave: An EDMAC MASTER is a unit which is local to the M&C computer, and which passes messages, via the overhead, to a distant-end modem. An EDMAC SLAVE is a unit which is not local to the M&C computer, which is at the distant-end of a satellite link. (FRAMED/ON) EDMAC MASTER Edit the address of the distant-end modem to which this unit will pass messages. There is a restriction on values which can be entered here - they may only be in increments of 10. This is automatically taken care of the user may not edit the last digit of the address. This has been implemented so that a single MASTER may pass messages for up to 10 devices at the distant end. The valid range of addresses is from 10 to 9990.
SELECT EDMAC MODE: MASTER SLAVE (ENTER)
EDIT DISTANT-END'S ADDR: 0240 (SEE HANDBOOK)(ENT)
57
EDIT THIS UNIT'S ADDRESS 0245 (SEE HANDBOOK)(ENT)
(FRAMED/ON) EDMAC SLAVE The valid range of addresses is from 1 to 9999, although base 10' values will be automatically skipped. Remember that this is a unit which is intended to be located at the distant-end of a link, and will therefore be under the control of a MASTER at the other end. This is the equivalent of putting the unit into Remote Control mode - no local control is possible.
4.1.5.2.4
SELECT\CONFIG\INTFC
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION EIA-422/530 V.35 EIA-232 IP Note: Selecting either EIA-422/530, V.35, or EIA232 as the interface rather than IP will change the CDM-IP to CDM-550 emulation mode. The CDM-IP will then pass standard serial traffic, like a CDM-550, but will not pass IP traffic. The CDM-IP can still be accessed via the ethernet port using Telnet, HTTP, or SNMP. If the user selects IP, the following screen is displayed:
DATA INTERFACE: EIA422/530 V.35 EIA-232 IP (ENTER)
EDIT UNITS IP ADDRESS: 010.006.007.224/16 (ENT)
58
4.1.5.2.5
SELECT\CONFIG\REMCONT
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION LOCAL REMOTE If LOCAL is selected then remote control will be disabled. Remote monitoring is still possible. If REMOTE is selected AND if the unit has not been defined as an EDMAC SLAVE then the following sub-menu will be displayed:
SELECT REMOTE CONTROL: LOCAL REMOTE (PRESS ENT)
SELECT\CONFIG\REMCONT\REMOTE
DISPLAY REMOTE CONTROL: BAUDRATE INTERFACE (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION BAUDRATE INTERFACE
EDIT LOCAL BUS BAUDRATE: 19200 BAUD FORMAT 8-N-1
BAUDRATE screen Edit the baud rate of the remote control bus, connected locally to the M&C computer. Possible selections are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 baud. FORMAT selections are: 8-N-1, 7-E-2, 7-O2. The asynchronous character format is FIXED at 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity (8-N-1). INTERFACE screen EIA-232 EIA-485-2W EIA-485-4W At this point the user will be further prompted to enter the bus address. In EIA-232 mode the bus address is fixed at 0, and this screen is displayed.
SELECT. INTERFACE: EIA-232 EIA485-2W EIA485-4W (ENT)
IN EIA-232 MODE THE BUS ADDRESS IS FIXED AT 0000
EDIT UNIT'S BUS ADDRESS: 0245 (PRESS ENTER)
If either RS-485 mode is selected, this screen is displayed. The valid range of addresses is from 1 to 9999.
59
4.1.5.2.6
SELECT\CONFIG\MASK
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Eb/No TX-AIS AGC Eb/No RX-AIS BUF-SLIP TX-AIS
ALARM MASK: AGC RX-AIS BUF-SLIP
SELECT\CONFIG\MASK\AGC
DISPLAY SELECT AGC ALARM MASK: ACTIVE MASKED(PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION ACTIVE - If the user selects ACTIVE, then a Receive Traffic fault will be generated whenever the demodulator senses that the composite input level being applied will cause compression in the IF stages, and hence degrade the performance of the demodulator. MASKED - If the user selects MASKED, no alarm will be generated.
SELECT\CONFIG\MASK\Eb/No
DISPLAY SELECT Eb/No ALARM MASK: ACTIVE MASKED(PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION ACTIVE - If the user selects ACTIVE, then a Receive Traffic fault will be generated whenever the demodulator determines that the Eb/No of the received carrier has fallen below the threshold defined under CONFIG, RX, Eb/No. MASKED If the user selects MASKED, no alarm will be generated.
SELECT\CONFIG\MASK\RX-AIS
DISPLAY SEL RX-AIS ALARM MASK: ACTIVE MASKED(PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION ACTIVE - If the user selects ACTIVE, then a Receive Traffic fault will be generated whenever the demodulator senses that the all ones condition is present in the receive data. MASKED - If the user selects MASKED, no alarm will be generated.
60
SELECT\CONFIG\MASK\BUF-SLIP
DISPLAY SEL BUF-SLIP ALARM MASK: ACTIVE MASKED(PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION ACTIVE - If the user selects ACTIVE, then a Receive Traffic fault will be generated whenever the receive circuitry senses that the buffer has either underflowed, or overflowed. MASKED - If the user selects MASKED, no alarm will be generated.
SELECT\CONFIG\MASK\TX-AIS
DISPLAY SEL TX-AIS ALARM MASK: ACTIVE MASKED(PRESS ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION ACTIVE - If the user selects ACTIVE, then a Transmit Traffic fault will be generated whenever the transmit circuitry senses that the all ones condition is present in the transmit data. MASKED - If the user selects MASKED, no alarm will be generated.
4.1.5.2.7
SELECT\CONFIG\IMPED
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION 50 75
SELECT IF IMPEDANCE: 50 OHMS 75 OHMS (ENTER)
4.1.5.3 SELECT\TEST
DISPLAY TEST: NORM IF DIG TX-CW TX-1,0 I/O RF (ENT) NORM TX-CW TX-1,0, IF LOOP DIG LOOP I/O LOOP SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION
NORM TX-CW
(Normal) This clears any test modes or loopbacks, and places the unit back into an operational state. (Transmit CW) This is a test mode which forces the modulator to transmit a pure carrier (unmodulated).
61
TX-1,0
(Transmit an alternating 1,0,1,0 pattern) This is a test mode which forces the modulator to transmit a carrier modulated with an alternating 1,0,1,0 pattern, at the currently selected symbol rate. This causes two discrete spectral lines to appear, spaced at +/- half the symbol rate, about the carrier frequency. This mode is used to check the carrier suppression of the Modulator. (IF Loopback) This test mode invokes an internal IF loop.This is a particularly useful feature, as it permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb external cabling. Furthermore, all of the receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match those of the transmit side. When NORMAL is again selected, all of the previous values are restored. Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or satellite) on a CDM-IP operating in easyConnect when connected to a LAN. In this configuration, easyConnect will resend all layer 2 broadcast packets and cause a broadcast storm on the LAN. To perform a loop test to verify the modem or satellite link, do one of the following: 1. Reconfigure the CDM-IP to CDM-550 Emulation Mode by selecting Configuration/Interface and then selecting EIA422/530, V.35, or EIA-232. 2. Set the CDM-IP to Router Mode. (Digital Loopback) This test mode invokes a digital loopback, which loops data at the output of the digital FIR filter on the transmit side, back into the Viterbi decoder on the receive side. This tests all of the interface, transmit baseband circuits, FEC encoder, FEC decoder, and buffer. Note: CDM-550 Emulation Mode only. (Inward/Outward loopback) This test mode invokes two distinct loopbacks. The first of these is the inward loop, which takes data being received from the satellite direction, and passes it directly to the modulator. Simultaneously, the outward loop is invoked, whereby data being fed to the transmit data interface is routed directly back out of the receive data interface. Note: CDM-550 Emulation Mode only.
IF LOOP
IMPORTANT
DIG LOOP
I/O LOOP
The three loopback modes are illustrated in the following figure.
62
Figure 12. Loopback Modes
63
4.1.6
SELECT\INFO
DISPLAY INFO:ALL TX RX BUFF MASK EDMAC ID FW MISC FAST ALL TX RX BUFF MASK EDMAC ID FW MISC FAST SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION
4.1.6.1 SELECT\INFO\TX
DISPLAY Tx:140.0000 2048.000 VIT Q R1/2 S LOP -20.0 ON I SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The information displayed here is as follows: Top line: Transmit Frequency and Data Rate FEC Encoder type (VIT = Viterbi, SEQ = Sequential VRS=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, SRS=Sequential + Reed-Solomon TUR = Turbo, UNC = uncoded) Bottom line: Modulation type (Q = QPSK, O= OQPSK, B = BPSK) Code Rate (shows blank in uncoded mode) Scrambler state (S = Scrambler on, N = Scrambler off) Clocking Mode (INT = internal, EXT = external, LOP = loop) Output power level Transmit output state (ON = on , OFF = off, EOF = external off) TSI state (I = Transmit Spectral Inversion on, N = off)
64
4.1.6.2 SELECT\INFO\RX
DISPLAY Rx: 70.0000 512.000 SEQ B R3/4 D BUFF +/-23k I SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The information displayed here is as follows: Top line: Receive Frequency Receive Data Rate FEC Decoder type (VIT = Viterbi, SEQ = Sequential VRS=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, SRS=Sequential + Reed-Solomon TUR = Turbo, UNC = uncoded) Bottom line: Demodulation type (Q = QPSK, O= OQPSK, B = BPSK) Code Rate (shows blank in uncoded mode) Descrambler state (D = Descrambler on, N = off) Clocking Mode Demod Sweep Acquisition range RSI state (I = Receive Spectral Inversion on, N = off)
4.1.6.3 SELECT\INFO\BUFF
DISPLAY BUFFER: ENABLED (TX=RX) SIZE: +/-4096 BITS SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This displays if the buffer is enabled or disabled, shows the exact clocking mode (TX=RX, or TX<> RX), and the buffer size.
65
4.1.6.4 SELECT\INFO\MASK
DISPLAY ALARMS MASKED: RX-AIS SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This shows, in the same format as the CONFIG, MASK sub menu, which alarms are currently masked. If an alarm is not masked, a blank is displayed in the relevant screen position.
TX-AIS
4.1.6.5 SELECT\INFO\EDMAC
DISPLAY FRAMING: ON EDMAC MODE: ON SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This screen shows the framing mode, EDMAC mode, and shows if the unit is an EDMAC MASTER or SLAVE.
(SLAVE)
4.1.6.6 SELECTINFO\ID
DISPLAY CIRCUIT ID ________________________ SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This displays the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is entered via the UTIL, ID screen.
4.1.6.7 SELECTINFO\FW
DISPLAY FIRMWARE: M&C VER 1.22 IP MODULE VER 1. 1. 0_ SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This displays the M&C and IP Module versions.
66
4.1.6.8 SELECT\INFO\MISC
DISPLAY MISC: NORMAL 1:1 LINK=IDLE 50 OHMS ONLINE SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This screen shows the following: Test mode IF impedance 1:1 link status - if the CRS-100 1:1 module is being used, this shows the status of the serial link between the two units. Redundancy status - either online or standby (1:1 or 1:N)
4.1.6.9 SELECT\INFO\FAST
FAST OPTIONS: 123456789 550T LS MODE: ON FAST OPTIONS are: 1 = LS MODE 2 = Reserved 3 = Data Encryption 4 = Reserved 5 = Quality of Service 6 = Reserved 7 = Reserved 8 = IGMP 9 = Header Compression 550T LS MODE: ON/OFF
67
4.1.7
SELECT\MONIT
DISPLAY MONITOR:ALARMS RX-PARAMS STORED-EVENTS STATS AUPC SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION ALARMS RX-PARAMS STORED-EVENTS STATS AUPC
If the user selects ALARMS, the following sub-menu is displayed:
4.1.7.1 SELECT\MONIT\ALARMS
DISPLAY LIVE ALARMS: UNIT RECEIVE TRANSMIT (ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION UNIT RECEIVE TRANSMIT
4.1.7.1.1
SELECT\MON\ALARMS\UNIT
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The screen will indicate if there are any Unit Faults. If not, it will display NONE.
UNIT FAULT: -12 VOLT PSU IS UNDER-VOLTAGE
4.1.7.1.2
SELECT\MONIT\ALARMS\RECEIVE
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The screen will indicate if there are any Receive Traffic Faults. If not, it will display NONE.
RX TRAFFIC: AGC ALARM REDUCE COMPOSITE I/P LVL
68
4.1.7.1.3
SELECT\MONIT\ALARMS\TRANSMIT
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The screen will indicate if there are any Transmit Traffic Faults. If not, it will display NONE.
TX TRAFFIC: NO CLOCK DETECTED FROM INTERFACE
4.1.7.2 SELECT\MONIT\RX-PARAMS
DISPLAY DEMODULATOR UNLOCKED SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This screen displays if the demodulator is unlocked. (ENTER)
RX:Eb/No=05.7dB dF=+11.7k BER=3.4E-9 BUF=50 AGC=24
If the demodulator is locked, this screen shows the following:
Eb/No dF BER BUF AGC
This shows the value of Eb/No calculated by the demodulator. The value referred to here is the energy per information bit (Ebi), divided by the noise spectral density (No). The frequency offset of the received carrier, in kHz, with a displayed resolution of 100 Hz. This is an estimate of the corrected BER. (Buffer fill state) This shows the fill state (in percent), of the receive Buffer. After a reset, it will read 50. A value <50 indicates that the buffer is emptying, and >50 indicates that it is filling. A number between 0 and 99 indicating the gain setting of the coarse AGC loop in the demod. It has a limited dynamic range, and should not be taken as an accurate measurement of signal level.
4.1.7.3 SELECT\MONIT\STORED-EVENTS
DISPLAY STORED EVENTS: VIEW CLEAR ALL (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION VIEW CLEAR ALL
69
4.1.7.3.1
SELECT\MONIT\EVENTS\VIEW
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The event log can store up to 100 events. When a fault condition occurs, it is time-stamped and put into the log. Similarly, when the fault condition clears, this is also recorded, as shown.
LOG23: 30/11/97 10:37:32 FT - DEMOD LOCK (UP/DWN)
LOG24: 30/11/97 10:37:35 OK - DEMOD LOCK (UP/DWN)
4.1.7.3.2
SELECT\MONIT\STORED-EVENTS\CLEAR ALL
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION VIEW CLEAR ALL
STORED EVENTS: VIEW CLEAR ALL (PRESS ENTER)
MONITOR:ALARMS RX-PARAMS STORED-EVENTS STATS AUPC
If the user selects CLEAR ALL, the event log is cleared, and the user is taken directly back to the previous menu. However, if there are faults present on the unit at this time, they will be re-time-stamped, and new log entries will be generated. In accordance with international convention, the date is shown in DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
4.1.7.4 SELECT\MONIT\STATS
DISPLAY LINK STATISTICS: VIEW CLEAR CONFIGURE (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION VIEW CLEAR CONFIGURE
70
4.1.7.4.1
SELECT\MONIT\STATS\VIEW
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION VIEW CLEAR ALL The user may scroll backward or forward through the entries in the statistics log, using the UP/DOWN arrow keys. The event log can store up to 250 events.
STA198:02/11/00 10:37:32 16.0,16.0,9.0,9.0(UP/DN)
The top line of the display indicates the log entry number, and the time and date of the entry.
Note: In accordance with international convention, the date is shown in DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
The bottom line of the display shows the statistics data which has been measured and recorded. The meaning and format of the numbers is as follows: Minimum Eb/No, Average Eb/No, Maximum TPLI, Average TPLI (where TPLI means Transmit Power Level increase, if AUPC is enabled). The user defines a measurement interval (see MONITOR, STATS, CONFIGURE) and during this interval, Eb/No and TPLI are observed, at a one second rate. At the end of this period, the average Eb/No is calculated and recorded, and the minimum value seen in the interval. Similarly, the average TPLI is calculated, along with the highest value seen in the interval.
Notes: a. If the demod has lost lock during the measurement interval, the minimum Eb/No will show LOSS rather than indicate a value. However, the average value (while the demod was locked) will still be calculated and shown. If, on the other hand, the demodulator has been unlocked for the entire measurement interval, the average Eb/No will also show LOSS. (The display will show LOSS,LOSS.) If the measured values are greater than, or equal to 16.0 dB, the display will show 16.0 dB. If AUPC is not enabled, the values of maximum and average TPLI will both show 0.0'.
b. c.
Examples: 08.0,13.5,2.5,1.8 means: Minimum Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 8.0 dB Average Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 13.5 dB Maximum TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 2.5 dB Average TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 1.8 dB
71
LOSS,04.5,0.0,0.0 means: There was a loss of demod lock during the measurement interval Average Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 4.5 dB Maximum TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 0 dB Average TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 0 dB (Which indicates no AUPC activity, or that AUPC is disabled.) If the user selects CLEAR, the statistics log is cleared, and the user is taken directly back to the previous menu.
4.1.7.4.2
SELECT\MONIT\STATS\CONFIGURE
DISPLAY SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The user is prompted to enter the logging interval (the period of time over which the statistics will be measured). The user can choose 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90 minutes.
LOGGING INTERVAL:90 MINS (SET 00 TO DISABLE)(ENT)
4.1.7.5 SELECT\MONITOR\AUPC
DISPLAY FRAMING NOT ENABLED! (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION If AUPC is selected, and the modem is not in Framed mode, this menu is displayed.
AUPC: REMOTE Eb/No=14.0dB TX POWER INCREASE=2.2dB
If AUPC is selected, and the modem is in Framed mode, this menu is displayed. The top line displays the value of Eb/No of the demodulator at the distant end of the satellite link. The Eb/No will display UNLOCK if the remote demod is unlocked. The bottom line shows how much the AUPC system has increased the output power. If AUPC is not enabled, the value of TX POWER INCREASE will show as 0.0 dB.
72
4.1.8
SELECT\STORE\LD
DISPLAY STORE/LOAD CONFIG: STORE LOAD (PRESS ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION STORE LOAD These sub-menus permit the user to store or load up to 10 different modem configurations in the nonvolatile memory of the modem.
4.1.8.1 SELECT\STORE/LD\STORE
DISPLAY STORE CONFIGURATION TO LOCATION: 10 (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Select the location to store the current configuration, using the UP/DOWN arrow keys, then press ENTER. Locations 1 through 10 are available. If the selected location does not contain a previously stored configuration, the following screen is displayed: If, however, the selected location contains a previously stored configuration, the following screen is displayed:
YOUR CONFIGURATION HAS BEEN STORED! (ENTER)
WARNING!LOC 10 CONTAINS DATA! OVERWRITE? NO YES
Selecting YES will overwrite the existing configuration at the selected location.
4.1.8.2 SELECT\STORE/LD\LOAD
DISPLAY LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM LOCATION: 10 (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Select the location from which to load a configuration, using the UP/DOWN arrow keys, then press ENTER. Locations 1 through 10 are available. If the selected location contains valid data, the following screen will be displayed: If, however, the selected location does not contain valid data, the following screen will be displayed:
THE NEW CONFIGURATION HAS BEEN LOADED (ENTER)
73
WARNING! LOC 10 CONTAINS NO DATA! (ENTER)
4.1.9
SELECT\UTIL
DISPLAY UTILITY: SET-RTC DISPLAY MAN-1:1 RECENTER-BUF ID SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION SET-RTC VFD ID MAN-1:1 CENTER-BUF FAST
4.1.9.1 SELECT\UTIL\ \RTC

DISPLAY EDIT REAL TIME CLOCK: 12:00:00 24/04/98 (ENT) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Edit the time and date settings of the real-time clock. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the UP/DOWN arrow keys. Note: In accordance with international convention, the date is shown in DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
4.1.9.2 SELECT\UTIL\VFD
DISPLAY EDIT DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS: 100% (PRESS ENTER) 100% 75% 50% 25% SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION
4.1.9.3 SELECT\UTIL\MAN-1:1
DISPLAY PRESS ENT TO FORCE THIS UNIT TO STDBY (1:1 ONLY) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION If the unit is part of a 1:1 redundant pair of modems, and this unit is currently on-line, pressing ENTER will cause the unit to switch to standby.
74
4.1.9.4 SELECT\UTIL\RECENTER-BUF
DISPLAY PRESS ENTER TO RE-CENTER THE RECEIVE BUFFER SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Pressing ENTER will cause a forced re-centering of the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer.
4.1.9.5 SELECT\UTIL\ID
DISPLAY EDIT CIRCUIT ID: (ENTER) THIS IS A TEST MESSAGE SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Only the bottom line is available (24 characters). The cursor selects the position on the bottom line (LEFT/RIGHT) and the character is then edited (UP/DOWN). The following characters are available: Space ( ) * + - , . / 0-9 and A-Z. When the user has composed the string, press ENTER.
4.1.10 SELECT\UTIL\FAST
DISPLAY ENTER NEW CONFIG CODE 00000000000000000000 SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION Enter the Configuration Code to enable a FAST option. Contact CEFD to purchase FAST options.
4.1.11 SELECT\UTIL\DEMO
DISPLAY IP DEMO MODE: OFF ON SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION The CDM-IP Demo Mode enables all of the IP optional features (3xDES Encryption, IP Header Compression, Quality of Service, and IGMP) for seven Days (168 hours). To enable Demo Mode, use the CDM-IP front panel to select UTIL\DEMO\ON. The seven day Demo Mode Timer will start but can be stopped at any time by setting Demo Mode to OFF.
75
4.1.12 SELECT\ODU
DISPLAY TRANSCEIVER CONTROL: DISABLE ENABLE (ENTER) SELECTIONS/DESCRIPTION This screen allows for the enabling or disabling of transceiver control.
76
NOTES:
77
Serial Remote Control

EIA-485.................. EIA-232.................. Basic Protocol........ Packet Structure .... 79 80 80 81
5.1
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the protocol and message command set for remote monitor and control of the CDM-IP Modem. The electrical interface is either an EIA-485 multi-drop bus (for the control of many devices) or an EIA-232 connection (for the control of a single device), and data is transmitted in asynchronous serial form, using ASCII characters. Control and status information is transmitted in packets, of variable length, in accordance with the structure and protocol defined in later sections.
5.2
EIA-485
For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled, a full-duplex (or 4-wire plus ground) EIA-485 is preferred. Half-duplex (2-wire plus ground) EIA-485 is possible, but is not preferred. In full-duplex EIA-485 communication there are two separate, isolated, independent, differential-mode twisted pairs, each handling serial data in different directions. It is assumed that there is a controller device (a PC or dumb terminal), which transmits data, in a broadcast mode, via one of the pairs. Many target devices are connected to this pair, which all simultaneously receive data from the controller. The controller is the only device with a line-driver connected to this pair - the target devices only have linereceivers connected. In the other direction, on the other pair, each target has a tri-state line driver connected, and the controller has a line-receiver connected. All the line drivers are held in highimpedance mode until one (and only one) target transmits back to the controller. Each target has a unique address, and each time the controller transmits, in a framed packet of data, the address of the intended recipient target is included. All of the targets receive the packet, but only one (the intended) will reply. The target enables its output line driver, and transmits its return data packet back to the controller, in the other direction, on the physically separate pair.
79
EIA-485 (full duplex) summary: Two differential pairs - one pair for controller to target, one pair for target to controller. Controller-to-target pair has one line driver (controller), and all targets have linereceivers. Target-to-controller pair has one line receiver (controller), and all targets have tristate drivers.
5.3
EIA-232
This a much simpler configuration in which the controller device is connected directly to the target via a two-wire-plus-ground connection. Controller-to-target data is carried, via EIA-232 electrical levels, on one conductor, and target-to-controller data is carried in the other direction on the other conductor.
5.4
BASIC PROTOCOL
Whether in EIA-232 or EIA-485 mode, all data is transmitted as asynchronous serial characters, suitable for transmission and reception by a UART. In this case, the asynchronous character format is fixed at 8 data bits, one stop bit, no parity. The baud rate may vary between 50 baud and 19,200 baud. All data is transmitted in framed packets. The controller is assumed to be a PC or ASCII dumb terminal, which is in charge of the process of monitor and control. The controller is the only device which is permitted to initiate, at will, the transmission of data. Targets are only permitted to transmit when they have been specifically instructed to do so by the controller. All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters, less than ASCII code 127. In this context, the Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable. All messages from controller to target require a response (with one exception). This will be either to return data which has been requested by the controller, or to acknowledge reception of an instruction to change the configuration of the target. The exception to this is when the controller broadcasts a message (such as Set time/date) using Address 0, when the target is set to EIA-485 mode.
80
5.5
Start of Packet < ASCII code 60
PACKET STRUCTURE
Controller-to-target:
Target Address Address De-limiter / ASCII code 47 (4 characters) (1 character) (3 characters) Instruction Code Code Qualifier = or ? ASCII code 61 or 63 (1 character) (n characters) Optional Arguments End of Packet Carriage Return ASCII code 13 (1 character)
(1 character)
Example:
Start of Packet > ASCII code 62 (1 character) Target Address
<0135/TFQ=70.2345{CR}
Address De-limiter / ASCII code 47 (1 character) Instruction Code Code Qualifier =, ?, !, or * ASCII code 61, 63, 33 or 42 (1 character) Optional Arguments End of Packet Carriage Return, Line Feed ASCII code 13,10 (2 characters)
Target-to-controller:
(4 characters)
(3 characters)
(From 0 to n characters)
Example:
>0654/RSW=32{CR}{LF}
Each of the components of the packet is explained below.
5.5.1
START OF PACKET
Controller to Target: This is the character < (ASCII code 61) Target to Controller: This is the character > (ASCII code 62) Because this is used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet, these two characters may not appear anywhere else within the body of the message.
5.5.2
ADDRESS
Up to 9,999 devices can be uniquely addressed. In EIA-232 applications this value is set to 0. In EIA-485 applications, the permissible range of values is 1 to 9999. It is programmed into a target unit using the front panel keypad.
The controller sends a packet with the address of a target - the destination of the packet. When the target responds, the address used is the same address, to indicate to the controller the source of the packet. The controller does not have its own address.
IMPORTANT
81
5.5.3
INSTRUCTION CODE
This is a three-character alphabetic sequence which identifies the subject of the message. Wherever possible, the instruction codes have been chosen to have some significance. For example, TFQ for transmit frequency, RMD for receive modulation type, etc. This aids in the readability of the message, should it be displayed in its raw ASCII form. Only upper case alphabetic characters may be used (A-Z, ASCII codes 65 - 90).
5.5.4
INSTRUCTION CODE QUALIFIER

This is a single character which further qualifies the preceding instruction code. Code Qualifiers obey the following rules: 1) From Controller to Target, the only permitted values are: = (ASCII code 61) ? (ASCII code 63)
They have these meanings: The = code (controller to target) is used as the assignment user, and is used to indicate that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the value of the argument(s) which follow it. For example, in a message from controller to target, TFQ=070.0000, would mean set the transmit frequency to 70 MHz. The ? code (controller to target) is used as the query user, and is used to indicate that the target should return the current value of the parameter defined by the preceding byte. For example, in a message from controller to target, TFQ? would mean return the current value of the transmit frequency.
82
2)
From Target to Controller, the only permitted values are: = (ASCII code 61) ? (ASCII code 63) ! (ASCII code 33) * (ASCII code 42)
They have these meanings: The = code (target to controller) is used in two ways: First, if the controller has sent a query code to a target (for example TFQ?, meaning what is the Transmit frequency?), then the target would respond with TFQ=xxx.xxxx, where xxx.xxxx represents the frequency in question. Second, if the controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, and providing the value sent in the argument is valid, then the target will acknowledge the message by replying with TFQ= (with no message arguments). The ? code (target to controller) is only used as follows: If the controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, and if the value sent in the argument is not valid, then the target will acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with TFQ? (with no message arguments). This indicates that there was an error in the message sent by the controller. The * code (target to controller) is only used as follows: If the controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, and if the value sent in the argument is valid, BUT the modem will not permit that particular parameter to be changed at that time, then the target will acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with TFQ* (with no message arguments). The ! code (target to controller) is only used as follows: If the controller sends an instruction code which the target does not recognize, then the target will acknowledge the message by echoing the invalid instruction, followed by the ! character with. Example: XYZ!
83
5.5.5
MESSAGE ARGUMENTS
Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments are ASCII codes for the characters 0 to 9 (ASCII 48 to 57), period (ASCII 46) and comma (ASCII 44).
5.5.6
END OF PACKET
Controller to Target: This is the Carriage Return character (ASCII code 13) Target to Controller: This is the two-character sequence Carriage Return, Line Feed. (ASCII code 13, and code 10.) Both indicate the valid termination of a packet.
84
Table 2. Serial Remote Commands

Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) TFQ= (message ok) TFQ? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TFQ* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TDR? Response to Command (target to controller) Response to Query (target to controller) TFQ=xxx.xxxx (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
Tx Frequency
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) TFQ=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 8 bytes
Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) TFQ?
Tx Data Rate
TDR=
8 bytes
Command or Query. Tx Frequency, 52 MHz to 88 MHz, (70 MHz band) or 104 MHz to 176 MHz, (140 MHz band). Resolution = 100Hz. Example: TFQ=072.9876 (70 MHz option) TFQ=148.0000 (140 MHz option) Note: Querying Options Fitted (using EID?) will indicate if the unit is 70 MHz or 140 MHz IF band Command or Query. Tx Data rate, in kbps, between 2.4 kbps and 2.048 Mbps. Resolution = 1 bps. Example: TDR=2047.999 (which is 2047.999 kbps)
TDR=xxxx.xxx (same format as command arguments)
Tx FEC Type
TFT=
1 byte, value of 0 through 8
Command or Query. Tx FEC coding type, where: 0 = None (uncoded - no FEC) 1 = Viterbi 2 = Sequential 3 = Viterbi + Reed-Solomon 4 = Sequential + Reed-Solomon 5 = Rate 3/4 QPSK Turbo (S/W Version < 1.15) 6 = Rate 21/44 BPSK Turbo (S/W Version > 1.14) 7 = Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo (S/W Version > 1.14) 8 = Rate 3/4 OQPSK Turbo (S/W Version >1.18) All other codes invalid. Example: TFT=1 (which is Viterbi coding) Note: If the RS Codec option is not installed, and the argument 3 or 4 is used, the target will return TFT? If the Turbo Codec option is not installed, and the argument 5 or greater is used, the target will return TFT? Use EID? to query the options fitted. Values 5 8 may affect TCR and TMD.
TDR= (message ok) TDR? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TFQ* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TFT= (message ok) TFT? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TFT* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode)
TFT?
TFT=x (same format as command arguments)
85
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) TCR= (message ok) TCR? (received ok, but invalid argument found) TCR* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode - for example, if Turbo is selected, and either 1/2 or 7/8 is requested) TMD= (message ok) TMD? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TMD* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TMD? Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) TCR?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) TCR=x (same format as command argument)
Parameter Type
Tx FEC Code Rate
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) TCR=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 1 byte, value of 1, 3, 7, 8 or 9
Tx Modulation Type
TMD=
1 byte, value of 1 or 2 or 3
TMD=x (same format as command argument)
Tx Spectrum Invert
TSI=
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
Command or Query. Tx FEC Code rate, where: 1 = Rate 1/2 3 = Rate 3/4 (must be set for Rate 3/4 Turbo) 7 = Rate 7/8 8 = Rate 21/44 (must set for Rate 21/44 Turbo)* 9 = Rate 5/16 (must set for Rate 5/16 Turbo)* All other codes invalid. Example: TCR=1 (which is Rate 1/2) * Only valid for S/W > 1.14 and EID =5500xx As a Query, returns 0 if Uncoded is selected for FEC. Setting 8 or 9 may affect TFT and TMD. Command or Query. Tx Modulation type, where: 1 = BPSK (must be set for Rate 21/44 or 5/16 Turbo mode) 2 = QPSK (must be set for Rate 3/4 Turbo QPSK mode) 3 = OQPSK (must be set for Rate 3/4 Turbo OQPSK mode) All other codes invalid. Example: TMD=2 (which is QPSK) Command or Query. Tx Spectrum Invert selection, where: 0 = Normal, 1 = Tx Spectrum Inverted All other codes invalid. Example: TSI=0 (which is normal) TSI? Command or Query. Tx Scrambler state, where: 0 = Off 1 = On (V.35 in transparent mode, synchronous in framed mode) All other codes invalid. Example: TSC=1 (which is scrambler On) TSI= (message ok) TSI? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TSI* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TSC= (message ok) TSC? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TSQ* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TSC?
TSI=x (same format as command argument)
Tx Scrambler
TSC=
TSCS=x (same format as command argument)
86
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Command or Query. Tx Output power level between 0 and -20 dBm (minus sign assumed). Example: TPL=13.4 (which is -13.4 dBm) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) TPL?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) TPL=xx.x (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
Tx Power Level
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) TPL=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 4 bytes
Tx Clock Source
TCK=
1 byte, value of 1, 2 or 3
TCK?
TCK=x (same format as command arguments)
Tx Carrier On/Off State
TXO=
TPL= (message ok) TPL? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TPL* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TCK= (message ok) TCK? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TCK* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TXO= (message ok) TXO? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TXO* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TXO? RFQ?
TXO=x (Note that 2 is not a valid argument when used as a command)
Rx Frequency
RFQ=
8 bytes
RFQ=xxx.xxxx (same format as command arguments)
Rx Data Rate
RDR=
8 bytes
Command or Query. Tx Clock source, where: 1 = Internal 2 = External 3 = Loop timed (use Rx satellite clock) All other codes invalid. Example: TCK=2 (which is External Clock) Command or Query. Tx Carrier On/Off state, where: 0 = Off due to front panel or remote control command 1 = On 2 = Off due to ext H/W Tx Carrier Off command (not a valid argument when used as a command) All other codes invalid. Example: TXO=1 (which is Tx Carrier On) Command or Query. Rx Frequency, 52 MHz to 88 MHz, (70 MHz band) or 104 MHz to 176 MHz (140 MHz band). Resolution = 100 Hz. Example: RFQ=143.4567 (which is 143.4567 MHz) Note: Querying Options Fitted (using EID?) will indicate if the unit is 70 MHz or 140 MHz IF band Command or Query. Rx Data rate, in bps, between 2.4 kbps and 2.048 Mbps. Resolution = 1 bps. Example: RDR=002.400 (which is 2.4 kbps) RFQ= (message ok) RFQ? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RFQ* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) RDR= (message ok) RDR? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RDR* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode)
RDR?
RDR=xxxx.xxx (same format as command arguments)
87
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) RFT= (message ok) RFT? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RFT* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) Response to Command (target to controller)
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) RFT=x (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
Rx FEC Type
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) RFT=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 1 byte, value of 0 through 8
Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) RFT?
Rx FEC Code Rate
RCR=
1 byte, value of 1, 3, 7, 8 or 9
RCR= (message ok) RCR? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RCR* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode)
RCR?
RCR=x (same format as command argument)
Rx Modulation Type
RMD=
Command or Query. Rx FEC decoding type, where: 0 = None (uncoded - no FEC) 1 = Viterbi 2 = Sequential 3 = Viterbi + Reed-Solomon 4 = Sequential + Reed-Solomon 5 = Rate 3/4 QPSK Turbo (S/W Version < 1.15) 6 = Rate 21/44 BPSK Turbo (S/W Version > 1.14) 7 = Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo (S/W Version > 1.14) 8 = Rate 3/4 OQPSK Turbo (S/W Version >1.18) All other codes invalid. Example: RFT=1 (which is Viterbi coding) Note: If the RS Codec option is not installed, and the argument 3 or 4 is used, the target will return RFT? If the Turbo Codec option is not installed, and the argument 5 or greater is used, the target will return RFT? Use EID? to query the options fitted. Values 5-8 may affect RCR or RMD. Command or Query. Rx FEC Code rate, where: 1 = Rate 1/2 3 = Rate 3/4 (must be set for Rate 3/4 Turbo) 7 = Rate 7/8 8 = Rate 21/44 (must set for Rate 21/44 Turbo)* 9 = Rate 5/16 (must set for Rate 5/16 Turbo)* All other codes invalid. Example: RCR=1 (which is Rate 1/2) * Only valid for S/W Version >1.14. As a Query, returns 0 if Uncoded is selected for FEC. Setting 8 or 9 may affect RFT and RMD. Command or Query. Rx Modulation type, where: 1 = BPSK (must be set for Rate 21/44 or 5/16 Turbo) 2 = QPSK (must be set for Rate 3/4 Turbo QPSK mode) 3 = OQPSK (must be set for Rate 3/4 Turbo OQPSK mode) All other codes invalid. Example: RMD=1 (BPSK) RMD= (message ok) RMD? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RMD* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) RMD?
RMD=x (same format as command argument)
88
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Command or Query. Rx Spectrum Invert selection, where: 0 = Normal 1 = Rx Spectrum Inverted All other codes invalid. RDS? Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) RSI?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) RSI=x (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
Rx Spectrum Invert
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) RSI=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 1 byte, value of 0 or 1
Rx Descrambler
RDS=
RDS=x (same format as command arguments)
Rx Demod Acq Sweep Width
RSW=
2 bytes, numerical
Command or Query. Rx De-scrambler state, where: 0 = Off 1 = On (V.35 in unframed mode, synchronous in framed mode) All other codes invalid. Example: RDS=1 (which is de-scrambler On) Command or Query. Rx acquisition sweep range of demodulator, in kHz, ranging from 1 kHz to 30 kHz. Example: RSW=09 (which is 9 kHz)
RSW?
RSW=xx (same format as command arguments)
Rx Clock Mode
RCK=
Command or Query. Rx Clock mode, where: 0 = Buffer disabled 1 = Buffer enabled All other codes invalid. Example: RCK=0 (which is buffer disable)
RCK?
RCK=x (same format as command arguments)
Eb/No Alarm Point 1 byte, value of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
EBA=
4 bytes, numerical
EBA?
EBA=xx.x (same format as command arguments) RBS? RBS=x (same format as command arguments)
Rx Buffer Size
RBS=
Command or Query. Eb/No alarm point, with a range of Eb/No between 0 and 16 dB. Resolution 0.1 dB. Example: EBA=12.3 (which is Eb/No = 12.3 dB) Command or Query. Rx buffer size, where: 1 = +/- 256 bits 2 = +/- 512 bits 3 = +/- 1024 bits 4 = +/- 2048 bits 5 = +/- 4096 bits
RSI= (message ok) RSI? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RSI* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) RDS= (message ok) RDS? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RDS* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) RSW= (message ok) RSW? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RSW* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) RCK= (message ok) RCK? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RCK* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) EBA= (message ok) EBA? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RBS= (message ok) RBS? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) RBS* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode)
89
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Command or Query. Terrestrial interface type, where: 1 = EIA-422/EIA530 DCE, 2 = V.35 DCE 3 = EIA-232 (sync). All other codes invalid. Example: ITF=2 (V.35) Command or Query. Unit operating mode, where 0 = Unframed - transparent (distant-end M&C not possible) 1 = Framed (EDMAC distant-end M&C possible) Example: FRM=1 (which is framed) FRM? Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) ITF?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) ITF=x (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
Unit Interface Type
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) ITF=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 1 byte, value of 1, 2 or 3
Unit Framing Mode
FRM=
FRM=x (same format as command arguments)
Unit Test Mode
TST=
1 byte, value of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
ITF= (message ok) ITF? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) ITF* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) FRM= (message ok) FRM? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) FRM* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TST= (message ok) TST? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TST* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) TST? IMP= (message ok) IMP? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) MSK= (message ok) MSK? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) MSK* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) IMP?
TST=x (same format as command arguments)
Unit IF Impedance
IMP=
IMP=x (same format as command arguments) MSK? MSK=abcde (same format as command arguments)
Unit Alarm Mask
MSK=
5 bytes, each with a value of 0 or 1
0 = Normal 1 = IF loopback 2 = Digital loopback 3 = I/O loopback 4 = Tx CW 5 = Tx Alternating 1,0 pattern 6 = RF loopback All other codes invalid. Example TST=4 (which is transmit CW) Command or Query. IF interface impedance, where: 5 = 50 7 = 75 All other codes invalid. Example IMP=7 (75 ) Command or Query. Alarm mask conditions, in the form abcde, where: a = mask Tx AIS alarm, b = mask Rx AGC alarm c = mask buffer alarms, d = mask Rx AIS alarm e = mask Eb/No alarm Setting any of these bytes to 0 unmasks alarm, setting to 1 masks them. Example: MSK=01011
90
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) ESA= (message ok) ESA? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) ESA* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode - for example if ESA= is sent to a distant-end slave unit) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) ESA?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) ESA=xxxx (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
EDMAC Slave Address
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) ESA=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 4 bytes, numerical
Circuit ID string
CID=
24 bytes, ASCII
CID= (message ok) CID? (received ok, but invalid arguments found)
CID?
CID=xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (same format as command arguments) ODU? ODU=x (same format as command arguments)
Outdoor Unit Comms
ODU=
Command or Query. EDMAC Slave Address - sets the range of addresses of distant-end units (modems or transceivers) for which this unit will forward messages. Only values which are integer multiples of ten are permitted. (0010, 0020, 0030, 0040 etc.) Example: ESA=0890 Important Note: Setting the value of the EDMAC Slave Address to 0000 disables this function. Setting a valid address here will automatically define the unit as being an EDMAC Master. This command is only valid for an EDMAC master. When used as a Query, it may be sent to an EDMAC slave, which will respond with the appropriate address. Command or Query. Sets or queries the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is a fixed length of 24 characters. Valid characters include: Space ( ) * + - , . / 0-9 and A-Z. Command or Query. Enables or disables communication, via an FSK serial link, with a Comtech EF Data Transceiver (Outdoor unit). 0 = disabled 1 = enabled Example: ODU=0 Command or Query. Enables or disables AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control). 0 = disabled 1 = enabled Example: AUP=0 Note: Framing must be selected for the AUPC feature to work. If AUPC is selected when Framing is disabled, AUP* will be returned ODU= (message ok) ODU? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) ODU* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) AUP= (message ok) AUP? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) AUP* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) AUP?
AUPC Enable
AUP=
AUP=x (same format as command arguments)
91
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Arguments for Command or Response to Query 6 bytes, Command or Query. Defines AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) operating parameters. Has the form abc.cd Where: a = Define action on max power condition: 0 = do nothing 1 = generate TX alarm b = Define action on remote demod unlock: 0 = go to nominal power 1 = go to max power c.c = Target Eb/No value, in dB, for remote demod d = Maximum increase in Tx Power permitted, in dB Example: APP= 015.67 APP= (message ok) APP? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) APP* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) N/A REB? Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) APP?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) APP=abc.cd (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
AUPC Parameters
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) APP=
Remote Eb/No
N/A
4 bytes, numerical
REB=xx.x (see description for details of arguments)
Tx Power level Increase
N/A
3 bytes, numerical
Query only. (AUPC feature) Returns the value of Ebi/No of the remote demod, if Framing is enabled. Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked. Returns xx.x if Framing is not enabled. Range: between 2 and 16 dB. Resolution 0.2 dB. Example: REB=12.4 (which is Eb/No = 12.4 dB) For values > 16.0 dB, the reply will be REB=16.0 Query only. (AUPC feature) Returns the increase in Tx power level, in dB (from the nominal setting) due to the action of AUPC. Returns x.x if AUPC is not enabled. Example: PLI=2.3 N/A
PLI?
PLI=x.x (see description for details of arguments)
92
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Command or Query. Global configuration of unit, in the form: FFF.FFFFDDDD.DDDGRMVSPP.PCX fff.ffffdddd.dddgrmvswwctt.tbIOTZAAAAAUEEEEBYYY.Y YW, where: F = Tx Frequency - same as TFQ= (8 bytes) D = Tx Data Rate - same as TDR= (8 bytes) G = Tx FEC Coding type - same as TFT= (1 byte) R = Tx FEC Code Rate - same as TCR= (1 byte) M = Tx Modulation - same as TMD= (1 byte) V = Tx Spectrum Invert - same as TSI= (1 byte) S = Tx Scrambler State - same as TSC= (1 byte) P = Tx Power Level - same as TPL= (4 bytes) C = Tx Clock Source - same as TCK= (1 byte) X = Tx Carrier Status - same as TXO= (1 byte) f = Rx Frequency - same as RFQ= (8 bytes) d = Rx Data Rate - same as RDR= (8 bytes) g = Rx FEC Decoding type - same as RFT= (1 byte) r = Rx FEC Code Rate - same as RCR= (1 byte) m = Rx Modulation - same as RMD= (1 byte) v = Rx Spectrum Invert - same as RSI= (1 byte) s = Rx De-scrambler - same as RDS= (1 byte) w= Rx Sweep Width - same as RSW= (2 bytes) c = Rx Clock Mode - same as RCK= (1 byte) t = Eb/No Alarm Point - same as EBA= (4 bytes) b = Rx Buffer Size - same as RBS= (1 byte) I = Unit Interface Type - same as ITF= (1 byte) O =Unit Framing Mode - same as FRM= (1 byte) T = Unit Test Mode - same as TST= (1 byte) Z = Unit IF Impedance - same as IMP= (1 byte) A = Alarm Mask - same as MSK= (5 bytes) U= ODU Comms - same as ODU= (1 byte) E= EDMAC Slave address - same as ESA= (4 bytes) B= AUPC enable - same as AUP= (1 byte) Y = AUPC setup - same as APP= (6 bytes) W =Stats log interval- same as SSI (1 byte) Example: MGC=074.56780064.0001720112.720082.65430 128.0002320116109.81211100000102361115.659 MGC= (message ok) MGC? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) MGC?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) MGC=FFF.FFFFDDD .DDDRMVSPP.PCXff f.ffffddd.dddrmvswwct t.tbIOTZAAAAAUEEE EBYY Y.YYW (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
Global Configuration
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) MGC=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 78 bytes, with numerical entries, fixed value entries, and delimiters
93
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Forces the unit to store the current modem configuration in Configuration Memory location defined by the one byte argument (0 to 9). Example CST=4 (Store current config in location 4) WARNING: Use with caution! If the location already contains data it will be automatically overwritten. If in doubt, query the location first. CST= (message ok) CST? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) Response to Command (target to controller)
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) Return the same format as the MGC with the form: CST= for a valid config, and CST* where no valid config is found in that n
Parameter Type
Config Store
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) CST=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 1 byte, numerical, 0 to 9
Config Load
CLD=
1 byte, numerical, 0 to 9
Command only. Forces the unit to retrieve the Configuration Memory location defined by the one byte argument (0 to 9), and to re-program the unit with that stored configuration.
Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) CST?n, where n is 0 to 9 CST?0, or CST?1, or CST?2, or CST?3, or CST?4, or CST?5, or CST?6, or CST?7, or CST?8, or CST?9 N/A N/A
Re-center Buffer None
RCB=
None
CLD= (message ok) CLD? (message received ok, but an invalid argument was found) CST* (message ok, but the requested location does not contain a valid configuration) RCB= (message ok)
N/A
N/A
Force 1:1 Switch
FSW=
Command only. Forces the unit to re-center the receive plesiochronous/doppler buffer. This command takes no arguments. Command only. Forces the unit to toggle the Unit Fail relay to the fail state for approx 500ms. If the unit is a 1:1 pair, and it is currently the On Line unit, this will force a switchover, so the unit will then be in Standby mode. The command is always executed by the unit, regardless of whether it is stand-alone, in a 1:1 pair, or part of a 1:N system. This command takes no arguments.
FSW= (message ok)
N/A
N/A
94
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Arguments for Command or Response to Query 1 byte, value of 0 or 1 FACTORY USE ONLY Modulator output 10dB attenuator setting, where 0 = no attenuation 1 = 10 dB attenuation Example: ATS=0 (Used for power-level calibration) FACTORY USE ONLY Modulator power output DAC setting. An argument between 0000 and 4095 is required Example: DAC=1287 (Used for power-level calibration) DAC? Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) ATS?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) ATS=n where n is 0 or 1
Parameter Type
10dB attenuator set
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) ATS=
Power level DAC set
DAC=
4 bytes, numerical
DAC=xxxx where xxxx is a value between 0000 and 4095 N/A N/A
Write EEPROM Value
EWR=
7 bytes
ATS= (message ok) ATS? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) ATS* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) DAC= (message ok) DAC? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) DAC* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) EWR= (message ok) EWR? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) EWR* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) N/A ERD?
Read EEPROM Value
N/A
3 bytes
ERD=xxx where xxx is a value between 0 and 255
Set RTC Date
DAY=
6 bytes, numerical
Command only. FACTORY USE ONLY A command in the form ddd,aaa, where ddd is a single byte data value between 0 and 255, and aaa is a starting address (in the range 0 - 127) within the serial EEPROM, where the data is to be written. Example: EWR=127,104 means write the value 127 starting at address location 104. (Used for power-level cal, amongst other things) Query only. FACTORY USE ONLY A query in the form aaa where aaa is a starting bit address (in the range 0 - 127) within the modems serial EEPROM, requesting that the byte stored at that location be returned. Example: ERD?063 returns the value of the byte stored at location 063. (Used for power-level cal, amongst other things) Command or query A command in the form ddmmyy, where; dd = day of the month, between 01 and 31, mm = month of the year, between 01 and 12 and yy = year, between 97 and 96 (1997 to 2000, then 2000 to 2096) Example: DAY=240457 would be April 24, 2057
DAY= (message ok) DAY? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) DAY* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode)
DAY?
DAY=xxxxxx (same format as command arguments)
95
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) TIM?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) TIM=xxxxxx (same format as command arguments)
Parameter Type
Set RTC Time
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) TIM=
Clear All Stored Events 1 byte, numerical
CAE=
None
TIM= (message ok) TIM? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) TIM* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) CAE= (message ok) N/A SSI?
N/A SSI=x (see description for details of argument)
Set Statistics Sample Interval
SSI=
Command or query A command in the form hhmmss, indicating the time from midnight, where hh = hours, between 00 and 23; mm = minutes, between 00 and 59, and ss = seconds, between 00 and 59 Example: TIM=231259 would be 23 hours, 12 minutes and 59 seconds from midnight. Command only Instructs the unit to clear all Stored Events This command takes no arguments. Command or query. Used to set the sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function. SSI=x, where x = 0 to 9 in 10 minute steps. Note: setting this parameter to 0 disables the statistics logging function. Example: SSI=3 means 30 minutes Command only Instructs the unit to clear all Stored Statistics This command takes no arguments. SSI= (message ok) SSI? (received ok, but invalid arguments found) SSI* (message ok, but not permitted in current mode) CAS= (message ok) N/A
Clear All Stored Statistics
CAS=
None
N/A
96
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Arguments for Command or Response to Query 75 bytes N/A Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) RNE?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) RNE={CR}ABCddmm yyhhmmss{CR}ABCd dmmyyhhmmss{CR} ABCddmmyyhhmmss {CR}ABCddmmyyhh mmss{CR}ABCddmm yyhhmmss (see description for details of arguments)
Parameter Type
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored Events
Command (Instruction Code and qualifier) N/A
Retrieve Number of unread Stored Events
N/A
2 bytes, numerical
Query only Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Events which have not yet been read over the remote control. Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body= ABCddmmyyhhmmss, A being the fault/clear indicator. F=Fault C=Clear I=Info B being the fault type where: 1=Unit 2=Rx Traffic 3=Tx Traffic 4=Power on/off, or log cleared and C being the fault code, as defined under the FLT message table entry, except Info codes, which are: 0=power off, 1=power on, 2=log cleared, 3=global config change, and 4= redundancy config change. If there are no new events, the unit replies with RNE? If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros. Query only Unit returns the number of Stored Events which remain unread, in the form xx. Note: This means unread over the remote control - viewing the stored events from the front panel of the modem does not affect this value. Example reply: NUE=98 N/A NUE?
NUE=xx (see description for details of arguments)
97
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Arguments for Command or Response to Query 130 bytes Query only Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Statistics which have not yet been read over the remote control. Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body= AA.ABB.BC.CD.Dddmmyyhhmmss, AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period. BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period. C.C = Max. Tx Power Level Increase during sample period. D.D = Average Tx Power Level Increase during sample period. ddmmyyhhmmss = date/time stamp. If there are no new events, the unit replies with RNS? If there are less than 5 statistics to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros. N/A Query only Unit returns the number of Stored Statistics which remain unread, in the form xxx. Note: This means unread over the remote control - viewing the stored events from the front panel of the modem does not affect this value. Example reply: NUS=198 N/A NUS? Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) RNS?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) RNS={CR}AA.ABB.B C.CD.Dddmmyyhhm mss{CR}AA.ABB.BC. CD.Dddmmyyhhmms s{CR}AA.ABB.BC.CD .Dddmmyyhhmmss{C R}AA.ABB.BC.CD.Dd dmmyyhhmmss{CR} AA.ABB.BC.CD.Ddd mmyyhhmmss (see description for details of arguments)
Parameter Type
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored Statistics
Retrieve Number of unread Stored Statistics
N/A
3 bytes, numerical
NUS=xxx (see description for details of arguments)
Rx Eb/No
N/A
4 bytes, numerical
N/A
EBN?
EBN=xx.x (see description for details of arguments) N/A AGC? AGC=xx (see description for details of arguments) N/A RFO? RFO=nxx.x (see description for details of arguments)
RX Coarse AGC 5 bytes, 1st , + or -, next 4 bytes numerical
N/A
2 bytes, numerical
Rx Freq Offset
N/A
Query only Unit returns the value of Ebi/No, between 0 and 16dB. Resolution 0.1 dB. Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked. Example: EBN=12.3 (which is Eb/No = 12.3 dB) For values greater than 16.0 dB, the reply will be EBN=+016. Query only Unit returns the value of Coarse AGC setting, between 0 and 99 Example: AGC=76 Query only Unit returns the value of freq. offset of the carrier being demodulated. Values range from 0 to 30 kHz, 100 Hz resolution.Example: RFO=+02.3 (offset is +2.3 kHz) Returns 99999 if the demod is unlocked.
98
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) N/A Response to Command (target to controller)
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) BFS=xx (see description for details of arguments) BER=a.bEc (see description for details of arguments)
Parameter Type
Buffer Fill State
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 2 bytes, numerical 5 bytes N/A BER?
Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) BFS?
Rx BER
N/A
Redundancy State
N/A
N/A
RED?
RED=x (see description for details of arguments) LRS? LRS=x (see description for details of arguments)
Local/Remote Status
LRS=
LRS= (message ok)
Serial Number
SNO=
4 bytes numerical 0000 to 9999 9 bytes numerical
SNO= (message ok)
SNO?
SNO=xxxx (see description for details of arguments) ESN= (message ok) ESN? ESN=xxxxxxxxx (see description for details of arguments)
Extended Serial Number
ESN=
Query only Unit returns the value of the buffer fill state. Values range from 1 to 99%. Example: BFS=33 (buffer fill state is 33%) Returns 00 if demod unlocked. Query only Unit returns the value of the estimated corrected BER in the form a.b x 10exp-c. First and second bytes are value, 3rd and 4th bytes are the exponent. Returns 99999 if demod is unlocked. Example: BER=4.8E3 (BER is 4.8 x 10-3) Query only Returns the redundancy state of the unit, where: 0 = Off Line (forced into standby by 1:N or 1:1 Switch) 1= On Line (normal). All other codes invalid. Example: RED=1 (On Line) Command or query (Command only if S/W > 1.13) As a query, returns the local/remote status of the unit, where: 0 = local 1= remote When used as a command, uses the same codes for an argument. Example: LRS=1 (unit is in remote mode) Command portion is FACTORY USE ONLY. Used to set or Query the units 4 digit serial number. Unit returns its S/N, in the form xxxx. Example: SNO=1765 (1ST 4 DIGITS OF ESN 9 DIGIT S/N) Command portion is FACTORY USE ONLY. Used to set or Query the units 9 digit serial number. Unit returns its S/N, in the form xxxxxxxxx. Example: ESN=123451765 (S/W Version > 1.16)
99
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) N/A Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) EID?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) EID=aaaabc (see description for details of arguments)
Parameter Type
Equipment ID
Software Revision
N/A
4 bytes, numerical
Query only Unit returns the equipment identification, and the options fitted, in the form aaaabc, where: aaaa defines the Modem model number. Example: 2550 is CDM-550T, no Reed-Solomon or Turbo 3550 is CDM-550T with Reed-Solomon Codec 4550 is CDM-550T with Turbo Codec fitted (Rate 3/4 QPSK only - S/W Version less than 1.15) 5550 is CDM-550T with Turbo Codec fitted (Rate 3/4 QPSK, plus Rate 21/44 and Rate 5/16 BPSK) b defines the IF band, with 1 = 70MHz, 2 = 140MHz c defines RX only, with 1 = RX/TX, 2 = RX only. Example: EID=455011 (CDM-550T, Rate 3/4 Turbo Codec, 70 MHz band, RX/TX) Query only Unit returns the value of internal software revision installed in the unit, in the form x.xx Example: SWR=1.03 (Ver 1.03) N/A SWR?
SWR=x.xx (see description for details of arguments)
100
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands Description of arguments (note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes between 48 and 57) Query only. Unit returns the current fault and status codes for the Unit (hardware), Tx Traffic and Rx Traffic, in the form abcde, where: a = Unit fault status, b = Tx Traffic status, c = Rx Traffic Status, d = Change in Fault Status since last poll (0 = none, 1 = change), e = Change in Unit Configuration since last poll (0 = none, 1 = change) Unit faults: 0 = No faults 1 = Power supply fault, 5 volts 2 = Power supply fault , 12 volts 3 = Power supply fault, -5 volts 4 = Power supply fault, 18 volts 5 = Power supply fault, -12 volts 6 = RAM load fail 7 = Tx synthesizer lock 8 = Rx synthesizer 9 = Power cal Checksum error A = FPGA main chain load fail B = Turbo FPGA load fail Tx Traffic status: 0 = Tx traffic OK 1 = No clock from terrestrial interface 2 = Tx FIFO slip 3 = AIS detected on incoming data 4 = AUPC upper limit reached Rx Traffic status: 0 = Rx Traffic OK 1 = Demodulator unlocked 2 = AGC Alarm - signal level too high 3 = Frame sync lost (Reed-Solomon or EDMAC) 4 = Buffer Underflow 5 = Buffer Overflow 6 = AIS detected on incoming data 7 = Eb/No threshold exceeded N/A Response to Command (target to controller) Query (Instruction Code and qualifier) FLT?
Rev. 1 CD/CDMIP550.IOM Response to Query (target to controller) FLT=abcde (see description for details of arguments
Parameter Type
Faults and Status
Arguments for Command or Response to Query 5 bytes, first 3 bytes alphanumerical 4th and 5th bytes, value of 0 or 1
101
CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Serial Remote Commands
NOTES
102
CLI and Telnet Interface

Overview ............................................. Main Menu Page................................. Administration Page............................ SMTP Configuration Page .................. SNMP Configuration Page.................. Receiver HDLC Addresses Page........ QoS (Quality of Service) Configuration Page ............................. Protocol Configuration Page ............... Modem Parameters Page .................. Redundancy Configuration Page ........ Operations and Maintenance Page .... 103 105 107 117 118 125 126 136 142 153 156
6.1
OVERVIEW
This section defines the user menu system presented to a user connected to the CDM-IP via a Terminal Emulator or Telnet. In the process of configuring each parameter, an overview of the parameter and its impact on the configuration of the CDM-IP is provided. When connecting via a Terminal Emulator, the user should be physically attached to the Console Port of the CDM-IP. The terminal emulator should be configured to match the console port setting. The default console port setting is 38,400 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit and no flow control. When connecting via telnet, the user must have network connectivity to the Ethernet Port of the CDM-IP. This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link from another CDM-IP modem. The Ethernet Speed Mode is a configurable parameter of the CDM-IP and thus its exact setting can vary between specific installations. The default setting allows the Ethernet port to auto negotiate its link speed on power-up. The CDM-IP does not allow concurrent access to the menu via telnet and the console port. If a user connects via telnet, CDM-IP automatically disables the console port for the duration of the Telnet session. All menu pages allow a Telnet logout to end a Telnet session. Also, the CDM-IP will automatically end a Telnet session after a period of inactivity.
103
The CLI and Telnet Access Levels are defined as follows:

User Login Access Level Admin User Read/Write User Read Only User
User Interface CLI (direct to console port) Telnet
Full Access no Login Full Access all Menus No Access to Admin Menu Full Access all other Menus No Access
CDM-IP Default Name/Passwords are: Admin Read/Write Read Only comtech/comtech opcenter/1234 monitor/1234
104
6.2
MAIN MENU PAGE

Menu pages are followed by a table listing the Menu Options/Fields, required Entry, and Descriptions.
The Main Menu page has the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Administration Entry A Description The Administration menu provides a basic set of standard admin functions to the CDM-IP. When connected via telnet, navigation to this menu will be restricted to the admin user. Allows the user to configure the Ethernet and Satellite interfaces. Allows the user to define QoS rules for up to 32 different types of flows. Allows a user to define how the CDM-IP will route packets that it receives on its Ethernet and Satellite interfaces. The Protocol Settings option allows the user to configure various protocols used by the CDM-IP. These protocols currently include ARP and IGMP. The Modem Parameters option displays a set of menus that allow a user to configure and monitor the satellite base modem.
Interface Configuration QoS Configuration Route Table
I Q R
Protocol Configuration
Satellite Modem Configuration
105
Menu Options/Fields Redundancy Configuration
Entry E
Description The Redundancy Configuration option allows the user to configure a CDM-IP to coordinate its operation with another CDM-IP to support a redundant link. The Operations & Maintenance Menu allows a user to configure various options used to control and maintain the system. Also has diagnostic tools for troubleshooting and Statistics. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Operations and Maintenance
Save Parameters
Exit
106
6.2.1
ADMINISTRATION PAGE
The Administration page is activated from the Main Menu page.
IMPORTANT
Access to the Administration page is restricted to the Admin user when connecting via the Telnet, SNMP, or HTTP interface. The Administration page is available when connected via the Terminal Emulator (serial) connection because there is no log in.
The Administration page contains the following options/fields.

Menu Options/Fields Name/Password Configuration Entry P Description Activates Name/Password Configuration page. Allows the user to define the user name and passwords that are required in order to access the management interfaces on the CDM-IP. Activates Access Lists page. Allows the user to restrict access to the management interfaces on the CDM-IP based upon the requesters IP address. Activates Feature Configuration page.
Access Lists
Feature Configuration
107
Menu Options/Fields 3xDES Configuration
Entry D
Description The 3xDES Configuration Page allows the user to determine if 3xDES encryption is enabled on a device and if so, the 3xDES keys that are used to decrypt traffic. The keys specified for the transmit function of the CDM-IP are completely independent for the 3xDES keys specified for the receiver function. The SMTP configuration page allows the user to specify appropriate settings for SMTP email server. The SNMP configuration page allows the user to specify management parameters for SNMP. Used to set the CDM-IP Working Mode easyConnect or Router. See Section 1.3.9 for additional information. Comtech Native CEFD Proprietary Framing Comtech Native CEFD Proprietary Framing When unit is running in easyConnect mode, multicast is only forwarded across link if both units have this feature enabled. This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full header of this type of traffic when Header Compression is enabled. This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full header of this type of traffic when Header Compression is enabled. This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full header of this type of traffic when Header Compression is enabled. This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full payload when Payload Compression is enabled. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
SMTP Configuration SNMP Configuration CDM-IP Working Mode
M N C
CDM-IP WAN TX Framing Mode CDM-IP WAN RX Framing Mode easyConnect Multicast Option Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for UDP/RTP1 Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for UDP Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for all others Payload comp refresh rate (in pkts) Save Parameters
Read Only Read Only E
Exit
108
6.2.1.1 NAME/PASSWORD CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Name/Password Configuration page is activated from the Administration page. This option allows a user to define the passwords required to access the CDM-IP via HTTP, FTP, SNMP, and TELNET.
IMPORTANT
All Usernames and Passwords are case sensitive. There is a minimum of 1 and maximum of 11 characters. Any or all of the Usernames and Passwords can be removed by entering NONE NONE from the CLI or Telnet. Removing all Usernames and Passwords would only allow access to the CDM-IP functions when connected via the Terminal Emulator (serial) connection (because there is no log in). FTP access is restricted to Admin Username/Password only. FTP is only used to upgrade the CDM-IP SOFTWARE or to load or retrieve the CDM-IP Parameter file.
The Name/Password Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Admin User/Password Entry A Description Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter. Ex: <user> <passwd> Enter NONE NONE to erase Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter. Ex: <user> <passwd> Enter NONE NONE to erase Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter. Ex: <user> <passwd> Enter NONE NONE to erase This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP.
Read/Write User/Password
Read Only User/Password
Save Parameters
109
Menu Options/Fields Exit
Entry X
Description This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
6.2.1.2 ACCESS LISTS PAGE

The Access Lists page is activated from the Administration page. This page allows the user to configure the CDM-IP to limit monitor and control access to the unit from a specified list of authorized clients.
If connecting to the CDM-IP remotely, the IP address of the machine used to manage the CDM-IP should be included in the Access List.
IMPORTANT
The Access Lists page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields AccessClient1 - 4 Entry 1-4 Description The Access Client list allows a user to define which remote clients can connect to a CDM-IP when the Access List Enforcement is enabled. Each entry allows a user to specify a specific IP Address or a subnet mask to define a unique class of machines that are allowed access to the CDM-IP. For example, if a user wanted to grant access to a PC with an IP Address of 10.10.10.1 and any PC on a subnet of 192.168.10.xxx, then the Access List would be defined as: AccessClient1 [10.10.10.1/32] AccessClient2. [192.168.10.0/24]
110
Menu Options/Fields Access List Enforcement
Entry E
Description The Access List Enforcement allows a user to grant access to the CDM-IP via ping, telnet, HTTP, FTP, and SNMP to a well-defined list of client machines. Access List Enforcement toggles between [Enabled] and [Disabled]. If disabled, then any client machine will be able to connect to the CDM-IP via ping, telnet, HTTP, FTP, and SNMP. If enabled, then only those machines specified in the Access Client List will be allowed to connect to the CDM-IP via ping, telnet, HTTP, and SNMP. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Save Parameters
Exit
111
6.2.1.3 FEATURE CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Feature Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.
The Feature Configuration menu communicates to the user the current availability for each of the features. If a feature is marked Unavailable then the feature is a FAST feature. FAST features must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. The Feature Configuration menu contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Ping Reply Entry P Description Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled] Enabled tells the CDM-IP to respond to ping requests directed to the CDM-IP Ethernet Interface. Disabled tells the CDM-IP not to respond to ping requests. This is used as a security feature to prevent unauthorized parities from determining if a CDM-IP exists via the ping utility. Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled] Enabled tells the CDM-IP to provide access via telnet. Disabled tells the CDM-IP to not allow access via telnet. Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled] Enabled tells the CDM-IP to respond to SNMP requests against the CDM-IPs private and public MIB. Disabled tells the CDM-IP not to respond to SNMP requests against the CDM-IPs private and public MIB.
Telnet
SNMP
112
Menu Options/Fields IGMP
Entry I
Description Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled] The receive portion of a CDM-IP will utilize the CDM-IP as an IGMP server. The transmit portion of a CDM-IP will utilize the CDM-IP as an IGMP client. The IGMP Information Page configures the CDM-IP to report an interest to join a Multicast group on an IGMP server. The IGMP protocol is used to regulate Multicast traffic on a LAN segment to prevent information of no interest from consuming bandwidth on the LAN. Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled] Enabled tells the CDM-IP to route all Multicast packets coming from the Satellite interface to the Ethernet LAN regardless of the Route Table entries. Disabled tells the CDM-IP not to automatically forward all Multicast packets. This CDM-IP will only forward multicast traffic received from the satellite to the Ethernet port if the multicast route exists in the Route Table. Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]. This feature must be purchased. Enabled tells the CDM-IP to apply configured QoS rules on all packets going out the Satellite Interface. When Disabled the CDM-IP does not apply QoS rules for outgoing packets. Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled] This feature must be purchased. Enabled allows the CDM-IP to assign a TX key to encrypt packets for a specific route being sent over the Satellite Interface. When Disabled the CDM-IP cannot encrypt packets being sent over the Satellite interface. This feature must be purchased. Available allows the CDM-IP to decrypt packets being received from the Satellite Interface. When Unavailable the CDM-IP cannot decrypt packets received from the Satellite Interface. This option is autosensed by a bit carried in packet headers. This option is always available if the option is purchased. This option will compress headers. Headers available for compression can be referenced in Section 1.4.3 IP Header Compression. Note that in easyConnect mode all Ethernet Headers will be compressed whether or not this feature is enabled. In Router mode, this screen will show Available, and the option must be enabled per route in Route table.
Downlink Route All Available Multicast
Quality of Service (QoS)
Transmit 3xDES Encryption
Receive 3XDES Decryption
Read Only
Tx Header Compression
113
Menu Options/Fields Rx Header Compression
Entry K
Description This option tells the system to expect received streams to be Header compressed. Note a CDM-IP modem must receive all streams compressed or not compressed. The modem has no way to distinguish between compressed or not compressed. This option allows a stream of traffic to be payload compressed. Payload is considered everything inside the HDLC satellite frame. Therefore, IP headers could be compressed as well. Note that in easyConnect mode, the option is enabled/disabled for all traffic. In Router mode, Payload compression will show Available, and one must set the option Per Route in Routing table. Receive payload compression option allows a unit receiving a stream of data that has been payload compressed to be correctly uncompressed. This option is auto-sensed by a bit carried in packet headers. This option is always available if the option is purchased. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Tx Payload Compression
Rx Payload Compression
Read Only
Save Parameters
Exit
114
6.2.1.4 3XDES ENCRYPT CONFIGURATION PAGE

The 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.
Note:
This menu will only be accessible if the 3xDES FAST feature has been purchased and the license key has been entered through the modem front panel.
The 3xDES Encrypt Configuration contains the following options/fields: Menu Options/Fields 3xDES Status Entry Read Only Description Displays status, [Available] or [Unavailable]. Available is displayed when the 3xDES feature has been installed. Unavailable is displayed when the 3xDES feature has not been installed. Displays feature status. This field is updated via the Features Configuration menu. If Transmit Encrypt is disabled, then all traffic processed by the CDM-IP will be transmitted in the clear regardless of the 3xDES encryption key specified in the Route table.
Transmit Encrypt Enabled
Read Only
115
Receive Decrypt Enabled Transmit Key 1 - 8
Read Only 1 through 8 A through H S
Displays feature status. This field updates via the Features Configuration menu. These 3xDES keys are used to encrypt traffic being sent over the Satellite Interface. The key is entered in HEX (48 digits max) These 3xDES keys are used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface. The key is entered in HEX (48 digits max) This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Receive Key 1 - 8
Save Parameters
Exit
IMPORTANT
A 24 Byte [192-bit] 3xDES key is actually a combination of 3 single DES keys of 8 Bytes [64-bits]. The CLI will display the Key with a space separating the Key into 3 sections. In the screen capture above, Transmit Key 1 is displayed as: 2222222222222222 4444444444444444 6666666666666666 Consider the first section as Key1A, the second as Key1B, and the third as Key1C. Data is first encrypted with Key1A and then decrypted with Key1B and again encrypted with Key1C. So if a user specifies all the three Keys the same, (like 48 1's OR all the characters in DES key the same) the cumulative effect of 3xDES is just a single DES. When data is first encrypted with Key1A and decrypted with Key1B we get back the original data and then when encrypted with Key1C results in a total effect of single DES key. Because of this, the user is required to enter unique 64-bit keys. If any 2 sections of the Key match, the CDM-IP will respond Invalid Key - Please Re-enter Also, The Least Significant bit of each byte in a 24 Byte [192-bit] 3xDES key is reserved for the DES Algorithm for parity. Entries of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, B, D, or F will have all the corresponding bit positions masked. So a Key entry of: 1111111133333333 5555555577777777 99999999BBBBBBBB becomes 1010101032323232 5454545476767676 98989898BABABABA
116
6.2.1.5 SMTP CONFIGURATION PAGE

The SMTP Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.
The SMTP Configuration contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields SMTP Server IP Address SMTP Domain SMTP Destination Name Save Parameters Entry I D N S Description The mail server address from where you want to send the email. Set to the domain of the email server (usually found to the right of the @ symbol in an email address). Set the email recipient names (usually found to the left of the @ symbol in an email address). This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit Note:
SMTP can be used to send an email to Comtech EF Data IP Modem Support cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com using the Support Web Page by connecting to the CDM-IP with a Web Browser. The Support Web Page allows you to compose an email message for questions or problems with the CDM-IP. The user can also select to automatically attach the CDM-IP parameter file in order to facilitate troubleshooting or to resolve configuration issues.
117
6.2.1.6 SNMP CONFIGURATION PAGE

The SNMP Configuration page is activated from the Administration page.
The SNMP Configuration contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields SNMP Read Community Entry R Description GET community - allows GET operations to all portions of the CDM-IP Controller and CDM-IP MIBs. SET community string - allows SET operations to all portions of the CDM-IP Controller and CDM-IP 550 MIBs. Community String that will be set in the Community field of all outgoing traps. This field on the trap PDU may be checked by the network manager application to determine if the trap came from a trusted agent. IP address where all traps/notifications will be sent. If a network management application is running in the network, it should be configured to receive traps and its IP address should be entered here. Determines whether an SNMPv1 trap or SNMPv2 notification is sent.
SNMP Write Community
SNMP Trap Community
SNMP Trap Destination
SNMP Trap Version
118
Menu Options/Fields SNMP Enable Authentication Trap
Entry A
Description Determines whether a MIB2 authentication trap will be sent when a PDU with an invalid community string is encountered. A community string is invalid when it does not match the Admin, the Read Write, or the Read Only community strings. User defined SNMP Contact information. User defined SNMP Name information. User defined SNMP Location information. Displays statistics concerning the operation of the SNMP agent (number of IN SNMP packets, number of OUT SNMP packets, number of OUT Traps, etc.) This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
SNMP System Contact SNMP System Name SNMP System Location SNMP Stats
C N O N
Save Parameters
Exit
119
6.2.1.7 CDM-IP WORKING MODE

The CDM-IP Working Mode page is activated from the Administration page. The CDM-IP Working Mode contains the following option/field:
Menu Options/Fields CDM-IP Working Mode Entry C Description Select 1 [Easy Connect Mode] or 2 [Router Mode]. Easy Connect Mode default operating mode, and operates at 10 baseT only. In this mode the CDM-IP will forward both IP and non-IP datagrams over satellite without any defined routes. Supports QoS, Payload Compression, Header Compression on a flow basis, and 3xDES Encryption of all packets as FAST options. Router Mode - IP packets are routed based on the Route table information input by the user. Non-IP packets are discarded. Operates at 10 and 100 baseT. See Section 1.3.9 CDM-IP Working Modes and HDLC Addressing Modes for a more detailed description of the CDM-IP Working Modes.
6.2.1.8 CDM-IP WAN TX FRAMING MODE

The CDM-IP WAN TX Framing Mode is reserved for future development. It is currently fixed to Comtech Native.
6.2.1.9 CDM-IP WAN RX FRAMING MODE

The CDM-IP WAN RX Framing Mode is reserved for future development. It is currently fixed to Comtech Native.
6.2.1.10 easyConnect MULTICAST OPTION

The easyConnect Multicast Option allows multicast to be either transmitted or received through the modem. This applies to easyConnect mode only. easyConnect mode will normally filter multicast traffic.
If the CDM-IP Working Mode is easyConnect and multicast traffic is intended to pass across a pair of modems, this option must be enabled on both modems.
IMPORTANT
6.2.1.11 HEADER COMPRESSION REFRESH RATE

The Header Compression Refresh Rates are configured from the Administration page.
Menu Options/Fields Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for UDP/RTP1 Entry H Description Selects how often a single, full header UDP/RTP1 packet is transmitted with Header Compression enabled.
120
Menu Options/Fields Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for UDP Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for all others
Entry U
Description Selects how often a single, full header UDP packet is transmitted with Header Compression enabled. Selects how often a single, full header packet is transmitted with Header Compression enabled (for all other types of IP headers).
The Header Compression Refresh Rates determines how many compressed header packets will be sent before a single full header packet is sent. Some compressed header traffic could be lost during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full header packet will allow the return of the traffic stream. Refresh rates from 1 to 600 can be individually selected for UDP/RTP1, UDP and all other IP headers. The Refresh Rate can be decreased for poor satellite link conditions or increased to further reduce overhead.
6.2.1.12 PAYLOAD COMPRESSION REFRESH RATE

The Payload Compression Refresh Rates determines how many compressed payload packets will be sent before a single full payload packet is sent. Some compressed payload traffic could be lost during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full payload packet will allow the return of the traffic stream. Refresh rates from 1 to 600 can be individually selected. The Refresh Rate can be decreased for poor satellite link conditions or increased to further reduce overhead.
6.2.2
INTERFACE CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Interface Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.
121
The Interface Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Ethernet Interface (fei0) Satellite/HDLC Interface (hdl1) Save Parameters Entry E H S Description Activates Fast Ethernet page. Activates Satellite/HDLC Interface page. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
122
6.2.2.1 FAST ETHERNET INTERFACE (FEI0) PAGE

The Fast Ethernet Interface page is activated from the Interface Configuration page.
The Fast Ethernet Interface page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields MAC Address Entry Read Only Description The MAC Address defines the hardware destination MAC Address that is used when an Ethernet packet is destined for the CDM-IP Ethernet Interface. This address is unique and has been assigned permanently at the factory. The Ethernet Speed Mode is a configurable parameter of the CDM-IP and thus its exact setting can vary between specific installations. The default setting allows the Ethernet port to auto negotiate its link speed on power-up. Selections are: 1 -- Auto 2 -- 10 MB/sec Half Duplex 3 -- 100 MB/sec Half Duplex 4 -- 10 MB/sec Full Duplex 5 -- 100 MB/sec Full Duplex This is the IP Address assigned the CDM-IP Ethernet Interface. Enter the IP address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format Specifies the Subnet Mask assigned to the Ethernet Interface of the CDM-IP. Enter the subnet mask prefix length (8...30) This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Speed/Mode
IP Address
Subnet Prefix Length
Save Parameters
Exit
123
6.2.2.2 SATELLITE/HDLC INTERFACE (HDL0) PAGE

The Satellite/HDLC Interface (HDL0) page is activated from the Interface Configuration page.
The Satellite/HDLC Interface page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields HDLC Addr Mode Entry M Description Toggles [Point-To-Point Mode], [Small Network Mode], and [Large Network Mode] Point-To-Point Mode In this mode of operation, no HDLC address is transmitted over the satellite link. The restrictions on using this mode are that it can only be used for pure Point-to-Point configurations. Small Network Mode (up to 254 addresses) - In this mode of operation a single byte HDLC address will be transmitted over the satellite link (0x1 0xFE). Large Network Mode (up to to 32766 addresses) - In this mode of operation a two byte HDLC address will be transmitted over the satellite link (0x1 0xFFFE). See Section 1.3.9 for a more detailed description of the CDM-IP Working Modes. Activates Receiver HDLC Addresses page. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Receive HDLC Channel Addresses Save Parameters
H S
Exit
124
6.2.2.3 RECEIVER HDLC ADDRESSES PAGE

The Receiver HDLC Addresses page is activated from the Satellite/HDLC Interface page. This page allows the user to define up to four HDLC addresses that can carry user information on the Satellite Interface.
The Satellite/HDLC Interface page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields HDLC Addr 1 - 4 Entry 1-4 Description HDLC address in hex <1 - FFFE, enter = 0001> Note: HDLC addresses are not used in Point-ToPoint Mode. Small Network Mode (up to 254 addresses) - The user is limited to valid addresses between the values of 0x01 and 0xFE. Large Network Mode (up to 32766 addresses) - The user is limited to valid addresses between the values of 0x0001 and 0x7FFF. Enter the HDLC entry to delete <1...4> This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Delete HDLC Addr Save Parameters
D S
Exit
125
6.2.3
QOS (QUALITY OF SERVICE) CONFIGURATION PAGE

The QoS Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.
The QoS Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields QoS Mode Entry M Description Select; Rule-Max/Pri Mode Rule-Min/Max Mode DiffServ Mode Select to define QoS rules for Max/Pri Mode or Min/Max Mode Select to define QoS rules for DiffServ Mode This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
QoS Rules Configuration DiffServ Rules Configuration Save Parameters
Q D S
Exit
126
6.2.3.1 QOS CONFIGURATION PAGE MAX/PRIORITY MODE

The QoS Rules Configuration page is activated from the QoS Configuration page.
The QoS Rules Configuration page contains the following options/fields when in Max/Pri Mode:
Menu Options/Fields Rule 01 08 (32) (The 8 currently displayed QoS Rules, up to 32 can be defined). Entry 1 - 08 Description Max/Pri QoS can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.), Source/Destination IP (specific or range), and/or Layer 3 Source/Destination Port. See Section 1.4.4.1 Maximum Bandwidth/Priority Mode for a more detailed description of this QoS option.
By selecting a QoS Rule, the user will be asked to define the following:
127
Specify Protocol for the rule
1 2 3
UDP - User Datagram Protocol TCP - Transmission Control Protocol RTP - Real Time Protocol (includes all RTP VOCE, VDEO, and RTPS) VOCE Voice RTP VDEO - Video RTP RTPS RTP Signaling pFTP - Passive File Transfer Protocol only HTTP - Hypertext Transfer Protocol TELN - Telnet SMTP - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol SAP Service Announcement Protocol ORCL - Oracle application traffic CTRX - Citrix application traffic SQL Structured Query Language IP Internet Protocol (all inclusive) N-IP - Non-Internet Protocol (all inclusive)
Priority 1 - Highest Priority 8 - Lowest 1 for QoS Priority-1 2 for QoS Priority-2 3 for QoS Priority-3 4 for QoS Priority-4 5 for QoS Priority-5 6 for QoS Priority-6 7 for QoS Priority-7 8 for QoS Priority-8
128
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 Specify priority for the rule 1-8
Maximum bandwidth in kbps <0 99999, enter = 99999 Source IP address <enter = 0.0.0.0>:
099999 x.x.x.x
Enter desired Maximum Bandwidth in kbps. If no Maximum is desired, select enter, Bandwidth will be displayed as 99999. Enter desired Source IP Address or subnet. If no Source IP is desired, select enter, Source IP will be displayed as ***. Enter desired Source subnet bits. If no Source subnet is desired, select enter, Source subnet will be displayed as /*. Enter desired Destination IP Address or subnet. If no Destination IP is desired, select enter, Destination IP will be displayed as ***. Enter desired Destination subnet bits. If no Destination subnet is desired, select enter, Destination subnet will be displayed as /*. Enter desired TCP/UDP source port (or Min port of a range). If no TCP/UDP source port is desired, select enter, Source port will be displayed as ***. Enter desired TCP/UDP source port (or Max port of a range). Will not display if no MIN TCP/UDP source port was selected. Enter desired TCP/UDP destination port (or Min port of a range). If no TCP/UDP destination port is desired, select enter, Destination port will be displayed as ***.
Enter desired TCP/UDP destination port (or Max port of a range). Will not display if no MIN TCP/UDP destination port was selected. Select to enable Weighted Random Early Detect. Select to prevent traffic defined in rule to be forwarded. Default N = not filtered Enter the QoS Rule to delete <1..32> Select Base to view, edit, or display a different set of 8 QoS Rules. For example, if 8 QoS Rules have been defined, add a new rule by selecting B 9. The QoS Configuration page will refresh and now display QoS Rules 9 16. Displays state of QoS option Unavailable, Enabled Disabled. If available, QoS is Enabled or Disabled from the Administrator Features Page. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu. 129
Number of source subnet bits <0,832, enter = 0>: Destination IP address <enter = 0.0.0.0>: Number of Destination subnet bits <0,8-32, enter = 0>: Specify TCP/UDP source port [MIN] (1 - 65535)<Enter: ***> Specify TCP/UDP source port [MAX] (1 - 65535)<Enter: ***>
0,8-32
x.x.x.x
0,8-32
165535 165535
Specify TCP/UDP destination port [MIN] (1 - 65535)<Enter: ***>
165535
Specify TCP/UDP destination port [MAX] (1 - 65535)<Enter: ***> Set WRED (Weighted Random Early Discard) <Y or N><Enter : Y> Specify Filtering for the rule <Y or N><Enter : N> Delete Base [1]
165535 Y or N Y or N D B
QoS [
Read Only S
Save Parameters
Exit
6.2.3.2 QOS CONFIGURATION PAGE MIN/MAX MODE

In Minimum/Maximum Mode,The QoS Rules Configuration page contains the same options/fields as in Max/Pri Mode with the following exceptions: Priority is not assigned. A Minimum Bandwidth can be assigned, or select enter to assign no Min Bandwidth (displayed as 0.) See Section 1.4.4.2 Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth QoS Mode for a more detailed description of this QoS option.
130
6.2.3.3 QOS CONFIGURATION PAGE DIFFSERV MODE

In DiffServ Mode, the CDM-IP will prioritize all traffic by the DSCP value contained within the IP header of each packet. All packets that do not have a DSCP value will be placed in the Default Queue and have a Priority of 9. Configuration of DiffServe Rules is only allowed for Assured Forwarding Classes 1-4 (Rule 9-12), where a Minimum and Maximum Bandwidth can be assigned. See Section 1.4.4.3 DiffServ QoS Mode for a more detailed description of this QoS option.
131
6.2.4
ROUTE TABLE CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Route Table Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.
IMPORTANT
Do not operate a CDM-IP satellite link where both CDM-IP modems have a Default Route to the satellite. For example, if both CDM-IP modems had this Route Table entry: IP Dest Next Hop Type 0.0.0.0/0 Point-to-Point ToSat In this setup, any traffic forwarded by a CDM-IP that did not have a valid IP host at the remote LAN would then be resent by the remote CDM-IP. This traffic would continue to be forwarded until the TTL expired. This routing loop will limit the performance of the CDM-IP by wasting satellite bandwidth.
The Route Table Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Route001-Route008 (256) (The 8 currently displayed routes, up to 256 can be defined) Entry 1-8 Description The Route Table allows a user to define how the packets that the CDM-IP receives are routed. Defining an entry in this table is similar to using the 'route add' command of machines that support that command. For each route, the user must define: 1. A name assigned by the user to reference the route. The assigned name cannot contain any whitespace and must be unique. 2. The destination address of an IP packet of interest. The number of network addresses that are governed by the selected destination entry, i.e., subnet mask. The Next Hop IP address. This is the IP where the packet
132
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Description will be routed for further processing. The Next Hop IP Address for traffic to be sent over the satellite will be the desired HDLC address. Point-to-Point no HDLC address Small Network - 0x1 0xFE Large Network 0x1 0xFFFE Also, a route can be defined to have the CDM-IP send traffic to another IP address that is on the same subnet as the Ethernet interface. Optionally: If the user enters a multicast address (224.0.0.0-239.255.255.255) as the destination IP address, then the following parameters will be requested: Route MultiCast packets from Ethernet to Satellite? [y/n] The option allows the user to specify if multicast packets that match the provided IP address will be routed from the Ethernet to Satellite. No means that the packets will be discarded. Route MultiCast packets from Satellite to Ethernet? [y/n] The option allows the user to specify if multicast packets that match the provided IP address will be routed from the Satellite to Ethernet. No means that the packets will be discarded. Multicast Routes always have a subnet length of 32 and the next hop is 0.0.0.0 because it is not applicable. Note: The CDM-IP does allow the specification of one and only one default route. Destination IP = 0.0.0.0 Subnet Length = 0. The default route can be defined to send traffic to either the Satellite or Ethernet interface. This will cause all packets that do not match any other route to be sent to the destination you have defined for further processing. The Route Table menu allows the user to view up to 8 different routes per screen. To allow editing on any of the 256 entries that can be defined, the user can select a base address to control which 8 routes are displayed. For example, if the user wants to edit Routes 32-40, then a Base value of 32 should be defined. Route Name to delete. Displays all of the routes that are currently defined in the system. This will include automatically generated routes that are provided to simplify provisioning of the system. The information displayed is: Route Name, DestIP/SnetBits, Next Hop, HDLC, and Flags. Enter to enable Header Compression, Payload Compression or 3xDES Encryption on a Per Route basis. Read only status of Downlink Multicast (Enabled or Disabled). This feature is enabled or disabled on the Administrator Feature page.
133
Base
Delete Route Display
D P
PerRoute Downlink Mcast
E Read Only
Menu Options/Fields Save Parameters
Entry S
Description This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
Selecting Per Route will display the following menu:
Header Compression, Payload Compression or 3xDES Encryption can be configured on a per Route basis by selecting the route number. DES key select <Choose [1-8] for [key1-key8] 0=Clear 9=Random Enter= Clear>: The value of 0 [CLEAR] will force the CDM-IP to not encrypt any traffic destined for the route. The value of Key[1-8] will use the key specified in the 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration Page to encrypt the traffic destined for the route. The value of Random will cause the CDM-IP to randomly use any of the 8 TX Keys to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
134
3xDES Encryption:
IMPORTANT
easyConnect Mode By definition, there are no routes in easyConnect operation, so there is no way to assign different keys to traffic. When TX 3xDES encryption is enabled in easyConnect, all traffic (IP and non-IP) is encrypted and TX Key1 is always used. Router Mode Different TX keys can be assigned to different routes and some routes can be sent unencrypted [Clear]. If Random is selected, all TX Keys must be configured with different keys and the receiving CDM-IP must have identical corresponding RX Keys. The CDM-IP will randomly utilize all 8 Keys for encryption.
135
6.2.5
PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Protocol Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.
The Protocol Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields IGMP ARP Save Parameters Entry I A S Description Activates IGMP page. Activates ARP Table Utilities page. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
136
6.2.5.1 IGMP INFORMATION PAGE

The IGMP information page is activated from the Protocol Configuration page. The IGMP Information page allows a user to view the IGMP clients that are actively listening to content being provided by the CDM-IP. It also allows the user to determine how the Ethernet Interface is configured either to receive requests to join IGMP groups or announce groups for others to join.
The IGMP Information page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields IGMP View IGMP Table Entry Read Only V Description Read only showing IGMP status (Enabled or Disabled). This table reports the content that clients have subscribed to the CDM-IP using the IGMP protocol. This allows a user to determine which services are being used and the minimum time before a service will be terminated. The IGMP protocol requests that a server periodically publish to users on the LAN the Multicast IP Addresses that it can service. The IGMP query period defines the time interval (in seconds) between each of these queries for membership. The IGMP max response time defines the time interval (in seconds) that the CDM-IP should wait before it assumes that no parties are interested in the content published via an IGMP query. This option is expressed in seconds, and the max response time that is accepted by the CDM-IP is 25 seconds.
137
CDM-IP as Server: IGMP query period
CDM-IP as Server: IGMP max. response time
Menu Options/Fields CDM-IP as Server: Number of missed responses before leaving IGMP group
Entry M
Description Defines the number of membership queries that go unanswered from LAN clients before the Ethernet Interface will no longer forward data for that IGMP group. Consider a CDM-IP that has the IGMP query period set to 60 seconds and the number of missed responses set to 3. If a client joins an IGMP group, then the service to that group will not be discontinued until no clients respond to a query from the CDM-IP for a period of 60*3 = 180 seconds. The Recognize IGMP Queries parameters determines if the CDM-IP should respond to periodic queries from an IGMP server that publishes a request to join a specified multicast group. This parameter can assume one of (2) values: 1. Yes 2. No If set to YES, the CDM-IP will respond to an IGMP query by requesting to join a Multicast Group published by the server that is defined in the CDM-IPs route table. If set to NO, the CDM-IP will not respond to IGMP queries from a server. In this type of configuration, the CDM-IP may be configured to unconditionally request to join an IGMP group at an interval specified by the Unsolicited Report Interval option in the Transmitter IGMP Client Configuration Page. This parameter defines which version of the IGMP protocol should be followed when attempting to join a group on a Multicast Server via an unsolicited report. When the CDM-IP is configured to Recognize IGMP Queries, the CDM-IP will respond to a query in the same version that the server used to initiate the query. This parameter will assume one of (2) values: 1. V1 2. V2 The value of V1 will configure the CDM-IP to use the IGMP Version 1 protocol to join a Multicast Group available on an IGMP Server in response to an IGMP Query. The value of V2 will configure the CDM-IP to use the IGMP Version 2 protocol to join a Multicast Group available on an IGMP Server in response to an IGMP Query. The user can toggle the value of the IGMP Version used for Unsolicited Reports from V1 and V2 with each selection.
CDM-IP as Client: Recognized IGMP queries
CDM-IP as Client: IGMP Version used for Unsolicited Reports
138
Menu Options/Fields CDM-IP as Client: Force Cisco Router Alert Option sending V1 reports
Entry A
Description Some Cisco Routers may require the definition of a Router Alert Option to recognize a report from a Client to join a Multicast group. The IP Router Alert Option is defined in RFC2113 and was introduced by Cisco. While this option is not part of the IGMP standard, most IGMP V2 implementations contain this option. However, most implementations of IGMP V1 do not contain this option. This parameter is defined to prevent possible conflicts in networks in which a Cisco Router is configured as an IGMP V1 server. This parameter can assume one of the following (2) values: 1. YES 2. NO If set to YES, the CDM-IP will generate IGMP reports to join Multicast groups as specifically required by some Cisco Router configurations. If set to NO, the CDM-IP will generate IGMP reports to join Multicast groups as defined and implemented by most IGMP servers. The Unsolicited Report Interval configures the CDM-IP to generate unsolicited reports to join a Multicast Group at specified time intervals. Each unsolicited report to join a Multicast group will use the version of the IGMP protocol as specified by the IGMP Version used for Unsolicited Reports option. The value of the Unsolicited Report Interval specifies the number of seconds between unsolicited reports. A value of zero implies that no unsolicited reports to join a Multicast group should be generated by the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
CDM-IP as Client: Unsolicited Report Interval, sec
Save Parameters
Exit
139
6.2.5.2 ARP TABLE UTILITIES PAGE

The ARP Table Utilities page is activated from the Protocol page. The ARP Table Utilities page allows the user to view and edit the ARP table defined by the CDM-IP. It allows up to 256 static IP->MAC ARP entries.
The ARP Table Utilities page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Entry001 - 008 Entry 1-8 Description The user can define up to 256 static ARP definitions on the CDM-IP. This table allows the user to operate/view up to 8 of these definitions. An ARP definition is defined as: 1. Unicast IP Address This IP Address is used as a lookup into the ARP table when the CDM-IP needs to resolve a MAC or HDLC Address. Restrictions: IP Address must be on the same subnet as the Ethernet Interface. IP Address must be a valid Unicast address (Not Multicast, broadcast, etc.) 2. MAC Address The MAC Address defines the hardware destination MAC Address that is used when an Ethernet packet is destined for an IP machine from the CDM-IP.
140
Menu Options/Fields Add IP to MAC ARP entry Delete ARP Entry Display ARP Tbl
Entry M D A
Description Adds an IP to MAC ARP entry. Allows the user to delete a Static ARP entry. Queries the user for the IP address of the ARP entry to delete. Displays the entire IP to MAC ARP table. Includes the Static as well as dynamic ARP entries. Displays blocks of 10 ARP entries. Hit Enter key to display next 10 entries or Escape to return to ARP Table Utilities page. This option allows the entire ARP table to be removed. This is equivalent to performing the standard UNIX command arp d on each address reported in an arp a command. The command only flushes the dynamic ARP entries. The static ARP entries will not be removed. The ARP Table menu allows the user to view up to 8 different ARP definitions per screen. To allow editing on any of the 256 entries that can be defined, the user can select a base address to control which 8 ARP entries are displayed. For example, if the user wants to edit static ARP Entries 32-40, then a Base value of 32 should be defined. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Flush ARP Table
Base
Save Parameters
Exit
141
6.2.6
MODEM PARAMETERS PAGE

The Modem Parameters page is activated by selecting Satellite Modem Configuration from the Main Menu page.
The Modem Parameters page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Modem Type Modem Summary Transmit Modem Configuration Receive Modem Configuration AUPC Miscellaneous Alarm Masks Utilities Events and Statistics Save Parameters Entry Read Only I T R P M A U E S Description Modem type CDM-IP. Displays current information of the base modem Activates Transmit Modem Configuration page. Activates Receive Modem Configuration page. Activates AUPC page. Activates Miscellaneous Settings page. Activates Alarm Masks Modem Configuration page. Activates Utilities page. Activates Modem Events and Statistics page. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
142
6.2.7
MODEM SUMMARY PAGE

The Modem Summary page is activated by selecting Modem Summary from the Modem Parameters page.
The Modem Parameters page contains the following read only status information:
Entry Read Only Description Unit Serial Number, Base modem M&C SOFTWARE revision, Unit Type information, Circuit ID, Events and Statistics Log, Redundancy State, TX Carrier, RX Coarse AGC, RX Frequency Offset, RX Eb/No, RX BER, Buffer Fill State, AUPC Status Eb/No of Remote Demodulator and TX Power Level Increase
143
6.2.7.1 TRANSMIT MODEM CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Transmit Modem Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page.
The Transmit Modem Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Transmit Frequency Transmit Data Rate Entry Q D Description Valid ranges are from 52.0000 to 88.0000 MHz The rate at which the Modem will send traffic over the Satellite Interface. Valid ranges are from 2.4000 to 2048.0000 1 - NONE 2 - VIT 3 - TURBO_3/4_Q 4 - TURBO_B21/44 5 - TURBO_B5/16 6 - TURBO_3/4_OQ 1 - 1/2 2 - 3/4 3 - 7/8 4 - 21/44 5 - 5/16 1 - BPSK 2 - QPSK 3 - OQPSK 1 - NRM 2 - INV
Encoder Type
Encoder Rate
Modulation Type
Spectrum
144
Menu Options/Fields Scrambler Tx Output Power (minus sign assumed) Carrier
Entry B P C
Description 1 - OFF 2 - ON Valid ranges are from 0.0 to 20.0 dBm 1 - OFF 2 - ON 3 - RTI This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Save Parameters
Exit
145
6.2.7.2 RECEIVE MODEM CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Receive Modem Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page.
The Receive Modem Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Receiver Frequency Receive Data Rate Decoder Type Entry Q D T Description Valid ranges are from 52.0000 to 88.0000 MHz. Valid ranges are from 2.4000 to 2048.0000 kbps. 1 - NONE 2 - VIT 3 - TURBO_3/4_Q 4 - TURBO_B21/44 5 - TURBO_B5/16 6 - TURBO_3/4_OQ 1 - 1/2 2 - 3/4 3 - 7/8 4 - 21/44 5 - 5/16 1 - BPSK 2 - QPSK 3 - OQPSK 1 - NRM 2 - INV 1 - OFF 2 - ON Valid ranges are from 1 to 30 kHz.
146
Decoder Rate
Modulation Type
Spectrum De-scrambler Sweep Width
U B W
Menu Options/Fields Eb/No Alarm Point Save Parameters
Entry P S
Description Valid ranges are from 0.1 to 16.0 This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
147
6.2.7.3 AUPC MODEM CONFIGURATION PAGE

The AUPC Modem Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page.
The AUPC Modem Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Framing AUPC EDMAC Master Address Target Eb/No of Remote Demod(db) Tx Max Increase (dB) Max Power Reached Action Remote Demod Unlock Action Save Parameters Entry F A C E D M U S Description 1 - Disabled 2 - Enabled 1 - OFF 2 - ON Use this to specify the address of the AUPC Controller. Valid ranges are from 0 to 9900 in multiples of 10. Valid ranges are from 0.1 to16.0 dB Valid ranges are from 0 to 9 dB. 1 - No_Action 2 - Generate_TX_Alarm 1 - Nominal_Power 2 - Maximum_Power This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
148
6.2.7.4 MODEM MISCELLANEOUS CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Modem Miscellaneous Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page.
The Modem Miscellaneous Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields IF Impedance (Ohms) ODU Communication Test Mode Entry I O T Description 1 - 50 2 - 75 1 - OFF 2 - ON 1 - Normal 2 - IF_loopback 3 - Digital_loopback 4 - I/O_Loopback 5 - Tx_CW 6 - TX_alt_101010 7 - RF Loopback This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Save Parameters
Exit
IMPORTANT
Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or satellite) on a CDM-IP operating in easyConnect when connected to a LAN. In this configuration, easyConnect will resend all layer 2 broadcast packets and cause a broadcast storm on the LAN. To perform a loop test to verify the modem or satellite link, do one of the following: 1. Reconfigure the CDM-IP to CDM 550 Emulation Mode by selecting Configuration/Interface and then selecting EIA-422/530, V.35, or EIA-232. 2. Set the CDM-IP to Router Mode.
149
6.2.7.5 ALARM MASKS MODEM CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Alarm Masks Modem Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page.
The Alarm Masks Modem Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Tx AIS Mask Rx AIS Mask Buffer Mask Rx AGC Mask Eb/No Mask Save Parameters Entry T D B A E S Description 1 - Active 2 - Masked 1 - Active 2 - Masked 1 - Active 2 - Masked 1 - Active 2 - Masked 1 - Active 2 - Masked This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
150
6.2.7.6 MODEM UTILITIES PAGE

The Modem Utilities page is activated from the Modem Parameters page.
The Modem Utilities page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Modem Time Modem Date Circuit ID Local/Remote State Re-center the Buffer Load Configuration Store Configuration Save Parameters Entry T D I R C G O S Description Enter the Time HH:MM:SS Enter the Date as: DD/MM/YY Enter the Enter ID (Must be exactly 24 characters) 1 -- Local 2 -- Remote Forced immediately, no additional message. Enter the Configuration (0 = None) Valid ranges are from 0 to 9 Enter the Configuration (0 = None) Valid ranges are from 0 to 9 This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
151
6.2.7.7 MODEM EVENTS PAGE

The Modem Events page is activated from the Modem Parameters page.
The Modem Events page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Statistics Sample Interval (min) Entry I Description 1 - 10 2 - 20 3 - 30 4 - 40 5 - 50 6 - 60 7 - 70 8 - 80 9 - 90 10 - OFF Number of Unread Events is listed Number of Unread Statistics is listed Immediately displays next 5 Events and decrements Unread Events Counter. Immediately displays next 5 Statistics and decrements Unread Statistics Counter. Clears all Events in log. Clears all Statistics in log This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Unread Events Unread Statistics Read Next 5 Events Read Next 5 stats Clear Events Log Clear Statistics Log Save Parameters
Read Only Read Only E R V C S
Exit
152
6.2.8
REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Redundancy Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page.
Note: This page is not accessible unless the modem is properly connected to a Comtech EF Data qualified Redundancy Switch.
Figure 13. CRS-100/CDM-IP Cabling Details
Redundancy implies the coordination of two CDM-IPs to provide a redundant link. Each of the CDM-IPs will be defined as either an Online or Offline. The Online is the unit that will process user traffic. The Offline modem monitors the health of the Online Modem. If the Offline detects a failure on the Online, it will assume the role of the Online. To allow a user to verify connectivity with the Offline, the Offline is assigned a unique IP Address. To support this need, a secondary unit will perform the following actions after the detection of a failure on the Controller:
153
1 2 3
Assume the Traffic IP Address. Assume the Traffic MAC Address. Assume the role of Online (i.e. The state changes from Offline to Online).
To enable redundancy, a user must:

1 2 Define a unique IP Address for each Modem via the Controllers Interface Configuration Page. Define a unique Traffic IP Address on the Online modem (will be the same for each modem) via the Onlines Redundancy Configuration Page.
If Redundancy is enabled on both the Online and Offline, their respective roles will be displayed on the Current State field on the Redundancy Configuration menu.
easyConnect Mode If the Redundant CDM-IP modems are operating in easyConnect Mode, it is required that the ethernet ports are connected to a 10BaseT hub (not a Layer 2 switch). TCP sessions when Header Compression is enabled If the Online unit has a failure, forcing a switchover, any active TCP sessions will timeout. This would include any HTTP Web session or FTP file transfer. All other traffic will be virtually uninterrupted. Gratuitous ARPS - A Gratuitous ARP is used to redirect the new MAC assignment when a switchover is performed. Ensure external equipment accepts and responds to Gratuitous ARPs.
IMPORTANT
154
The Redundancy Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Current State Management IP Address, Local Unit Entry Read Only Read Only Description Defines the online/offline status of the CDM-IP. IP Address for the Ethernet Interface for the Local Unit. The value is set through the Ethernet Interface (fei0) page. The Management IP Address must be on the same subnet as the other management IP and traffic IP. Subnet Prefix for the Ethernet Interface for the Local Unit. The value is set through the Ethernet Interface (fei0) page. The Management Subnet Prefix Length must be the same as the other management prefix length and traffic prefix length. Enter the subnet mask prefix length (range is 8..30). IP Address for the Ethernet Interface for the Remote Unit. The value is set through the Ethernet Interface (fei0) page on the other modem in the redundant pair. The Management IP Address must be on the same subnet as the other management IP and traffic IP. Subnet Prefix for the Ethernet Interface for the Local Unit. The value is set through the Ethernet Interface (fei0) page on the other modem in the redundant pair. The Management Subnet Prefix Length must be the same as the other management prefix length and traffic prefix length. Enter the subnet mask prefix length (range is 8..30). The Traffic IP will float between the two redundant modems and will always be active on the Online Modem. The Redundant IP Traffic Address must be on the same subnet as the other traffic IP. Enter the ip address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format The Traffic IP will float between the two redundant modems and will always be active on the Online Modem. The Redundant Subnet Prefix Length must be the same as the other traffic prefix length. Enter the subnet mask prefix length (range is 8..30). If the modem is currently Online, this command will force a switchover so that the redundant pair becomes the Online modem and processes the incoming traffic. This modem will transition from Online to Offline. If the modem is already Offline, then this command will be ignored. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Management Subnet Prefix Length, Local Unit
Read Only
Management IP address, Redundant Unit
Read Only
Management Subnet Prefix Length, Redundant Unit
Read Only
Redundant Traffic IP Address
Redundant Traffic Subnet Prefix Length
Force Unit Offline
Save Parameters
Exit
155
6.2.9
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PAGE

The Operations and Maintenance page is activated from the Main Menu page.
The Operations and Maintenance page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Unit Information All Unit Information Boot From Entry I A B Description Displays unit current operational Software information. Displays all loaded Software unit information. Determines which version of the CDM-IP software package (includes Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) will be loaded upon boot-up. The possible options are: 0. Latest - boot the newest software package based upon date. 1. Image1 - boot the software package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage. 2. Image2 - boot the software package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage. Determines which installed software package (includes Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) that the CDM-IP will overwrite when upgrading with a new software package. The possible options are: 0. Oldest overwrite the oldest software package based upon date. 1. Image1 overwrite the software package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage. 2. Image2 overwrite the software package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage.
Upgrade To
156
Menu Options/Fields PARAM Image
Entry C
Description Identifies the PARAM file that will be loaded on bootup. The options are: 1. Last saved Parameter file 2. Factory uses the internal, hard-coded factory default parameters. Activates Statistics Menu page. Activates Event Log page. Activates Administrative Database Operations page. Allows user to reboot the modem. It has the same logical effect of power-cycling the unit. Activates Diagnostics page. Activates Remote Port B Configuration page. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Statistics Event Log Database Operations Reset Diagnostics Remote Port B Save Parameters
T E D R G P S
Exit
157
6.2.9.1 STATISTICS PAGE

The Statistics Menu page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.
The Statistics Menu page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields IP Statistics QoS Statistics Ethernet Statistics WAN Statistics Compression Statistics Clear all stats Save Parameters Entry R Q E W H C S Description Displays Statistics for IP Routing and allows counters to be reset. Displays Statistics for QoS and allows counters to be reset. Displays Statistics for the Ethernet Port and allows counters to be reset. Displays Statistics for the WAN (HDLC) Port and allows counters to be reset. Displays Statistics for Header & Payload Compression and allows counters to be reset. Globally resets all statistics counters. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
All updates for Statistics information will occur once every 6 seconds.
IMPORTANT
158
6.2.9.1.1
IP Statistics Page
The IP Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The IP Statistics page displays counts of the number of packets routed or dropped in the CDM-IP.
The IP Statistics page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Total IP Packets From Satellite Total IP Packets Routed To Sat Total IP Packets From Ethernet Total IP Packets Routed To Ethernet IGMP Packets Received IP Options Packets Received Dropped - Total Dropped - TTL Expired Entry Description WAN Statistics Page, Rx HDLC Packet Count WAN Statistics Page, Tx HDLC Packet Count Ethernet Statistics Page, Rx Good Frames Ethernet Statistics Page, Tx Good Frames Internet Group Management Packets received (used for management of multicast traffic). Number of IP Options packets received. Total Dropped Packets Total Dropped Packets due to Time To Live counter expired (TTL limits the number of hops, or seconds, before a packet reaches its destination). Total Dropped Packets due to incorrect IP Header Checksum.
Dropped - Bad IP Header Checksum
159
Menu Options/Fields Dropped - No Route
Entry
Description Total Dropped Packets due to no Route for the destination in the CDM-IP Route Table. These are packets that are directed to the CDM-IPs MAC address and the CDM-IP will reply to the sender with a ICMP Destination net unreachable message. Total Dropped Multicast Packets received from the satellite due to no SATLAN Route or the Downlink all available multicast feature not being enabled. Total Dropped Packets due to a defined QoS filter rule. Indicates certain types of traffic that should not leak to Satellite. For example, broadcasts destined for Satellite LAN. Multicast packet was dropped because, although route existed, IGMP is being used, and there is no client requesting forwarding of this traffic or due to a IGMP leave group message. Total Dropped Packets due to no ARP entry in CDM-IP ARP Table. For example, if a CDM-IP receives packets from the satellite for a host that is not in the ARP table, the CDM-IP will send an ARP request. If there is no response, the packets will be dropped. IP length (as specified in packet header) was greater than payload received in the Ethernet packet. This would indicate the packet was truncated before arriving. Total Dropped IP Version 6 Packets (CDM-IP only supports IP Version 4).
Dropped - Filtered Multicast Sat To Ethernet Dropped - QoS Filter Rule Dropped - Filtered
Dropped - Multicast Disable Group
Dropped - No ARP Entry
Dropped - Bad Buffer Length
Dropped - Bad IP Version Reset Packet Counters (Clears WAN, Ether, IP stats) Save Parameters R
Executing this menu option resets all WAN, Ethernet and IP Routing statistics gathered to zero. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
160
6.2.9.1.2
QoS Statistics Page
The QoS Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The QoS Statistics page displays the statistics for the number of IP packets routed, based upon the defined QoS Rules, by the CDM-IP.
NOTE: In DiffServ QoS Mode, statistics for the various DiffServe DSCP Classes will be in the following Queues: Queue01 Expedited Forwarding Queue02 Class 1 Precedence Queue03 Class 2 Precedence Queue04 Class 3 Precedence Queue05 Class 4 Precedence Queue06 Class 5 Precedence Queue07 Class 6 Precedence Queue08 Class 7 Precedence Queue09 Assured Forwarding Class 1
161
Queue10 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Queue11 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Queue12 Assured Forwarding Class 4
6.2.9.1.3
Ethernet Statistics Page
The Ethernet Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page The Ethernet Statistics page displays the statistics for the number of IP packets received from and sent to the Ethernet interface.
The Ethernet Statistics page contains the following options/fields

Menu Options/Fields Entry Read Only Tx Good Frames Tx Maximum Collision Count Description The Ethernet Statistics presents the total packets transmitted and received for the Ethernet Port of the CDM-IP. Number of good frames transmitted by this Ethernet interface. Number of frames that are not transmitted because they encountered configured max collisions.
162
Menu Options/Fields Tx DMA Underrun Error Count Tx Lost Carrier Sense Count Tx Deferred Count Tx Single Collision Count Tx Multiple Collision Count Tx Total Collision Count Rx Good Frames Rx CRC Error Frame Count Rx Alignment Error Count Rx Resource Error Count Rx FIFO Overrun Error Count Rx Collision Detect Error Count (CDT) Rx Runt Frames Count Tx Flow Control Pause Frames Transmitted Rx Flow Control Pause Frames Received CLEAR Save Parameters
Entry
Description Number of frames not transmitted or re-transmitted due to transmit DMA underrun. Number of frames transmitted by device despite the fact that it detected a deassertion of carrier sense. Number of frames deferred before transmission due to activity on link. Number of transmitted frames that encountered only one collision. Number of transmitted frames that encountered more than one collision. Total number of collisions encountered while attempting to transmit. Count of good frames received by the Ethernet device. Number of aligned frames discarded due to a CRC error. Number of frames that are both misaligned and contain a CRC error. Count of good frames discarded due to unavailable resources. Number of good frames discarded due to overflow of internal receive FIFO. Number of frames encountered collisions during frame reception. Count of undersize frames received by the Ethernet device. Number of Flow Control frames transmitted by the device. Number of Flow Control frames received by the device.
C S
Resets all Ethernet Statistics This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
163
6.2.9.1.4
WAN Statistics
The WAN Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The WAN Statistics page displays counts of the number of packets routed or dropped in the CDM-IP Satellite interface.
The WAN Statistics page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields WAN Rx Bad Addr Count WAN Rx Pkt Proc CRC Error Count WAN Rx Abort/Octet Error Count WAN Rx Overrun Count Entry Read Only Description The count of received frames that did not match any of the 4 HDLC addresses or the broadcast address. Count of received frames that failed packet processor CRC check. Count of aborted frames and octet error frames. Count of received frames that exceeded max frame length of 2K bytes in length (Or) overflowed the HDLC buffer. Number of received frames that failed HDLC CRC check.
WAN HDLC CRC Error Count
164
Menu Options/Fields WAN Rx HDLC Payload Count WAN Rx HDLC Header Count WAN Rx HDLC Packet Count WAN Rx Err Invalid Flow Id WAN Rx Err SAR Reassemble WAN Rx Err Hdr Decomp WAN Rx Err Mem Alignment WAN Rx Err bad CRC WAN Tx HDLC Header Count WAN Tx HDLC Payload Count WAN Tx HDLC Packet Count Ethernet traffic destined to go over WAN (kbps) Actual Satellite traffic (kbps) Percentage of WAN Bandwidth saved Clear Save Parameters
Entry
Description The count of payload bytes that were received over satellite link excluding any frame overhead. The count of HDLC header bytes received over satellite link including control, HDLC address, Flow ID, and CRC. Number of packets received over satellite link. Number of packets which the flow identifier has been corrupted, does not fall into the range of acceptable values. Number of packets unable to correctly reassemble a segmented packet. Number of packets unable to correctly decompress the header information. Number of packets discarded (caused by memory corruption). Number of corrupted packets indicated by CRC check. This counter keeps track of number of HDLC header bytes transmitted over satellite link. Number of payload bytes transmitted over satellite link. Count of packets transmitted over satellite link. Bandwidth required to forward Ethernet traffic before compression. Current satellite bandwidth being used. Displays percent of bandwidth being saved as a result of Header and/or Payload Compression, and optimized satellite framing.
C S
Resets all WAN statistics. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Exit
165
6.2.9.1.5
Compression Statistics
The Compression Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The Compression Statistics page displays counts of the number of bytes before and after for both Header and Payload Compression. For Header Compression, the percentage of bandwidth savings is displayed. For Payload Compression, the effective compression ratio is displayed.
The Compression Statistics page contains the following options/fields: Note: Although the QoS option is not required to use Header or Payload Compression, the Compression Statistics are displayed by QoS Rule flow Queues. If QoS is not enabled, all the Compression Statistics will fall within the Global Queue.
166
Menu Options/Fields Queue0108
Entry Read Only
Description Statistics are displayed in a table format showing: Pre-Header Comp Bytes Post-Header Comp Bytes Header Comp % Savings Pre-Payload Comp Bytes Post-Payload Comp Bytes Payload Compression Ratio All traffic that does not fall within a defined QoS Rule will be indicated in the Global (Default Rule Queue). Allows a reset of the Statistics of a specific Queue. Resets all Compression Statistics. Allows the user to view up to 8 different Queues per screen. To allow editing on any of the 32 entries that can be defined, the user can select a base address to control which 8 QoS Queues are displayed. For example, if the user wants to view QoS Queues 16-24, then a Base value of 16 should be defined. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Global CLEAR ClrAll Base [1]
Read Only C A B
Save Parameters
Exit
167
6.2.9.2 EVENT LOG PAGE

The Event Log page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.
The Event Log page allows the user to capture all IP Module events to a log. The Event Log Page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Logging Feature Logging Level Entry F E Description Select to Enable/Disable Logging Select 1 Errors Only 2 Errors and Warnings 3 All Information Select to view log. Will display most recent events. Press any key to scroll through events or Escape to exit. All events will display Type Error, Warning, or Information Date/Time NOTE: During Bootup, multiple Boot Events will be created, but a Date/Time will only be seen when the Bootup has completed. Category Boot, Database, FTP logins, upgrade file transfers, Ethernet Link status change. Description Event details Select to clear log contents. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
View log
Clear log Save Parameters
C S
Exit
NOTE: The full Event log file can be retrieved by FTP. Use Admin login and type command get eventlog. The entire Event log can then be viewed with a text viewer.
168
6.2.9.3 ADMINISTRATIVE DATABASE OPERATIONS PAGE

The Administrative Database Operations Page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance Page.
The Database Operations option allows the user to view, save, or erase an existing user configuration of the CDM-IP. A CDM-IP uses these types of configuration files to initialize itself on power-up. The User Configuration File allows a User to over-write the values defined in the Factory Configuration file. This allows full customization of a CDM-IP without erasing a set of parameters defined from the factory. The User configuration file can also be retrieved or overwritten via FTP by specifying the filename param1. The Administrative Database Operations Page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Save Parameters to permanent storage Entry P Description This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. Restores the CDM-IP settings to safe values as defined by the factory. This option overwrites the current configuration of the CDM-IP with the configuration last saved to permanent storage. It allows the user to perform an Undo type operation if the CDM-IP is put into an undesirable state by the user. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Restore Factory Default Load Parameters from permanent storage
R F
Save Parameters
Exit
169
6.2.9.4 DIAGNOSTICS PAGE

The Diagnostics Page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance Page.
IMPORTANT
Using Dump Packets Diagnostics Utilities 1. Great care should be taken when using this option. If the unit is processing high data rates, then the terminal screen will scroll data for very long periods of time. 2. Selecting the menu option a second time terminates the dump operation. Each selection toggles the value of the dump engine.
The Diagnostics Page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite Interface Entry T Description Toggles [Yes] and [No] Executing this menu option forces the CDM-IP to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that it transmits over the Satellite Interface. Toggles [Yes] and [No] Executing this menu option forces the CDM-IP to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that it receives from the Satellite Interface.
Dump Packets received from Satellite Interface
170
Menu Options/Fields Dump Packets transmitted to Ethernet Interface
Entry U
Description Toggles [Yes] and [No] Executing this menu option forces the CDM-IP to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that is transmitted to the Ethernet Interface. Toggles [Yes] and [No] Executing this menu option forces the CDM-IP to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that it receives from the Ethernet Interface. Toggle [Yes] and [No] Executing this menu option forces the CDM-IP to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that is received by the routing engine. (Note: Does not apply when in easyConnect mode.) Toggle [Yes] and [No] Executing this menu option forces the CDM-IP to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that is received by and destined for this modem. This traffic would include Pings, SNMP, Telnet, HTTP, and FTP types of traffic. Toggle [Yes] and [No] Executing this menu option forces the CDM-IP to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that is sourced from this modem and destined for some other device. This allows a user to see what type of packets this modem is generating internally. Enter the ip address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format Enter the ip address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format Enter the password to access the debug command line. Note: This is reserved for Customer Service and engineering use. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Dump Packets received from Ethernet Interface
Dump Packets received by Router
Dump Packets sent to CDM-IP EndStation
Dump Packets received from CDM-IP EndStation
Ping Traceroute Command Line Debug Prompt Save Parameters
P A D
Exit
171
6.2.9.5 REMOTE PORT B CONFIGURATION PAGE

The Remote Port B Configuration page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.
The Remote Port B Configuration page contains the following options/fields:

Menu Options/Fields Device Address Baud Rate Entry A B Description Valid ranges are from 0 to 9999 The baud rate defines the speed of the serial interface. The user can iterate through the possible rates by successively selecting the menu option. This parameter will assume one of the following bits per second rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 The Remote Port B interface supports three formats. Each format describes the Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits that the serial interfaces will use to communicate. The user can iterate through the list of possible values by successively selecting the menu option. This parameter will assume one of the following values: [8-N-1], [7-E-2], [7-0-2] The Interface setting configures the UART to operate in one of three types of physical EIA-xxx interfaces (EIA232, EIA-485, EIA-485-4W). The user can iterate through the list of possible values by successively selecting the menu option. This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle of the CDM-IP. This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Format
Interface
Save Parameters
Exit
172
6.2.10 TELNET - LOGOUT OPTION
When connecting to the CDM-IP through a Telnet session, the menus present another option to logout of the Telnet session. This logout option is in all the menus and when selected, logs the user out of the Telnet session, returning control of the CLI to the serial interface. When a Telnet session is active, there is no access via the CLI serial console port. If there is no activity during the Telnet session for 5 minutes (600 sec), the Telnet session will automatically be dropped, returning access via the CLI serial console port.
IMPORTANT
173
NOTES
174
Web Server Pages

Web Server Usage ..................... Web Server Menu Tree Home Pages.............................. 175 177 178
7.1
WEB SERVER USAGE

The embedded Web Server application provides the user with an easy to use interface to configure and monitor all aspects of the CDM-IP modem. These web pages have been designed for optimal performance when using Microsofts Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. By typing http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx =CDM-IP IP address) on your browser, the Login prompt will appear.
175
HTTP Login Access Levels are defined as follows:

User Login Access Level Read/Write User No Access to Admin or Encryption Web pages Web Full Access to all Web Pages Full Access for all other Web Pages
User Interface
Admin User
Read Only User No Access to Admin or Encryption Web pages View Only Access for all other Web Pages, able to reset Statistics
CDM-IP Default Name/Passwords are: Admin Read/Write Read Only comtech/comtech opcenter/1234 monitor/1234
IMPORTANT
See the CLI section for a more detailed explanation of CDM-IP communication options.
176
7.2
WEB SERVER MENU TREE

Table 3. CDM-IP Web Server Menu Tree Level 1 Home
Level 2 Home Contact Support Logoff Chapter 6 Reference Section N/A N/A N/A N/A 6.2.1.1 & 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.6 6.2.2 & 6.2.1.3 6.2.8 6.2.7.1 & 6.2.7.2 6.2.7.6 N/A N/A 6.2.4 6.2.4 6.2.5.2 6.2.3 6.2.5.1 6.2.4 6.2.2 6.2.9.1.3 6.2.9.1.1 6.2.9.1.2 6.2.9.1.4 6.2.9.1.5 6.2.7 6.2.7.7 N/A 6.2.9 6.2.9 N/A
ADMIN
Access Features Remote
CONFIG MDM
Summary Redundancy Modem Modem Utilities ODU Configuration ODU Utilities
CONFIG IP
Routes Multicast Routes ARP QoS IGMP Encrypt Interface
STATS
Ethernet Routing QoS WAN Compression Modem Status Modem Logs ODU Status
MAINTENANCE
Unit Info IP Dbase Reset
177
7.3
HOME PAGES
7.3.1 HOME PAGE
Welcome to the CDM-IP Web Interface. The following sections will describe the functionality that is unique to the Web Interface.
178
7.3.2 CONTACT INFORMATION
This page provides basic contact information to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and Customer Service via phone or automated e-mail links.
7.3.3 SUPPORT
179
Notes on SMTP SMTP can be used to send an email to Comtech EF Data IP Modem Support cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com from the Support Web Page. The Support Web Page allows you to compose an email message for questions or problems with the CDM-IP. The user can also select to automatically attach the CDM-IP parameter file (which will contain the modems serial number and configuration information) in order to facilitate troubleshooting or to resolve configuration issues. The problem report area of the display allows up to 2,000 characters maximum. The CDM-IP uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) to send email and will require the modems administrator to specify the SMTP server, domain name and destination name on the Administration Screen for SMTP to operate correctly (see Administration/System Account Access Information/SNMP).
7.3.4 LOGOFF
Currently the CDM-IP only allows one connection to the CLI or the Web Interface. Use this option to formally disconnect from the Web Interface.
Upon disconnection, you will be required to close the Web Browser so as to delete the security cookie to the CDM-IP.
IMPORTANT
180
7.3.5 ODU CONFIGURATION
See associated ODU/LNA manual for setting options.
181
7.3.6 ODU UTILITIES
See associated ODU manual for setting options.
182
7.3.7 QOS CONFIGURATION MAX/PRIORITY MODE QOS CONFIGURATION
Field Rule
Description Enter a valid Rule number (1-32)
183
7.3.8 ODU STATUS
This page provides a read-only summary of various ODU status parameters.
184
1.4.9 RESET UNIT
The last item on the left-hand menu is Reset. This option will force the internal CDMIP module to reboot.
Notes: 1. 2. The main modem will NOT reboot. There is no verification of the reboot, other than the web-interface timing out due to the reboot time of the CDM-IP module.
185
NOTES:
186
SNMP Interface
SNMP Interface................................. 187 MIB-II................................................. 188 Private MIB Implementations............ 202 CDM-IP IP Controller Private MIB .... 202 CDM-IP 550 Private MIB................... 223 CDM-IP Controller MIB Tree............. 238 CDM-IP 550 MIB Tree ...................... 247
8.1
SNMP INTERFACE
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices. The CDM-IP 550 SNMP agent supports both SNMPv1 and v2c.
8.2
SNMP COMMUNITY STRING ACCESS LEVELS

The user defines three Community Strings for SNMP access: Read Community Write Community Trap Community Note that the Community String is case sensitive.
187
8.3
MIB-II
The CDM-IP 550 agent implements RFC 1213, Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based Internets. This is known as MIB-II or Public MIB support. The agent implements the following Groups:
Table 4. MIB-II Support Group System Group Interface IP ICMP TCP UDP SNMP Address Translation Group EGP Comments Mandatory for RFC1213 Mandatory for RFC1213 Mandatory for RFC1213 Mandatory for RFC1213 Mandatory for RFC1213 Mandatory for RFC1213 Mandatory for RFC1213 Implemented but depreciated in MIB-II Not applicable
188
8.3.1
SYSTEM GROUP
This System Group provides information about the following items:
Table 5. System Group OID sysDescr sysObjectID sysContact sysName sysLocation sysServices Defaults Value CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Modem 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5 Comtech EFData Support, cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com - User Setable CDM-IP 550 - User Setable Empty 79
The system services provided by the CDM-IP 550 in the OSI network model are: 2L-1 where L is the network layer support by the CDM-IP 550. In the CDM-IP 550, this is calculated by 21-1 (layer 1) + 22-1 (layer 2) + 23-1 (layer 3) + 241 (layer 4) + 27-1 (layer 7) = 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 + 64 = 79.
Table 6. System Services Network Layer Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 7 Description Physical Datalink Internet End-to-end Applications
189
8.3.2
INTERFACE GROUP
This group provides the number of interfaces on a managed device and a table describing all interfaces. The ifNumber OID is the number of network interfaces present on this system. On a CDM-IP 550 the ifNumber should be 3 corresponding to the Ethernet, Satellite, and Loopback interfaces.
8.3.2.1 THE INTERFACES TABLE

Table 7. Interfaces Table OIDs OID ifIndex Description Unique value for each interface. The CDM-IP 550 gives the Satellite (hdl0), Loopback (lo0), and Ethernet (fei0) interfaces values of 1, 2, or 3 respectively. Textual string containing information about the interface. The Ethernet interface is fei0. The Loopback interface is lo0. The Satellite interface is hdl0. Link protocol for the interface. The Ethernet interface is set to ethernetCsmacd(6). The Loopback interface is set to softwareLoopback(24). The Satellite Interface is propPointToPointSerial(22). Size of the largest datagram which can be sent/received on the interface, specified in octets. For the Ethernet and Satellite Interfaces, the MTU is 1500. Estimate of the interface's current bandwidth in bits per second. The Ethernet Interface can be set to either 100000000 (100 Mbps) or 10000000 (10 Mbps). If the Ethernet driver is set to Auto then 100000000 will be returned. The Satellite Interfaces ifSpeed corresponds to the data rate of the transmitter only. The transmitters ifSpeed can range from 2400 (2.4 Kbps) to 2048000 (2.048 Mbps). If the CDM-IP 550 is a Demod-Only then ifSpeed will be zero. Interface's address at the datalink layer. For the Ethernet Interface this corresponds to the MAC address (6 bytes). For the Satellite and Loopback Interface this value is undefined. Desired state of the interface. For the CDM-IP 550, the interfaces cannot be changed from an up(1) status. Current operational state of the interface. For the CDM-IP 550, the interfaces will remain in an up(1) status. Value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational state. For the CDM-IP 550, this will remain zero, corresponding to boot time. Total number of octets received on the interface. This statistic is counted for Satellite interface only.
ifDescr
ifType
ifMtu
ifSpeed
ifPhyAddress
ifAdminState ifOperState ifLastChange
ifInOctets
190
OID ifInUcastPkts
Description Number of subnetwork-unicast packets received on the interface. This statistic is counted for both the Ethernet and Satellite interfaces. Number of non-unicast (i.e., broadcast or multicast) packets received on the interface. This statistic is counted for both the Ethernet and Satellite interfaces. Number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected. This statistic is not counted. Number of inbound packets that contained errors. This statistic is not counted. Number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This statistic is not counted. Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. This statistic is counted for both the Ethernet and Satellite interfaces. Total number of packets transmitted to a unicast address. This statistic is counted for both the Ethernet and Satellite interfaces. Total number of packets that were transmitted to a non-unicast (i.e., a broadcast or multicast) address. This statistic is counted for both the Ethernet and Satellite interfaces. Number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected. This statistic is not counted. Number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. This statistic is not counted. Length of the output packet queue (in packets). This statistic is not reported. This OID is not used.
ifInNUcastPkts
ifInDiscards
ifInErrors ifInUnknownProtos
ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts
ifOutDiscards
ifOutErrors ifOutQLen ifSpecific
191
8.3.2.2 AT GROUP
This group contains a table that permits mappings from network addresses (i.e., IP addresses) to physical addresses (i.e., MAC addresses). This group is depreciated.
8.3.2.3 THE ADDRESS TRANSLATION TABLE

Table 8. Address Translation Table OIDs OID AtIfIndex atPhysAddress atNetAddress Description Interface on which this entry's translation is effective. Media-dependent physical address. Network address (i.e., the IP address) corresponding to the mediadependent physical address.
8.3.2.4 IP GROUP
This group contains information regarding managing of the IP protocol. It contains three tables.
1. 2. 3. IP Address Table IP Routing Table IP Net To Media Table Contains the CDM-IPs IP addressing information. Contains an entry for each route presently known to the CDM-IP 550. Address translation table for the IP group (providing identical functionality to the now depreciated atTable in the Address Translation group).
Table 9. IPGroup OIDs OID ipForwarding Description Indicates whether this entity is acting as an IP gateway in respect to the forwarding of datagrams. For the CDM-IP 550, forwarding(1) is always turned on. Default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the CDM-IP 550. The value TTL is set to 64. Total number of input datagrams received from CDM-IP s Ethernet and Satellite interfaces, including those received in error. Number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers. Number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity.
IpDefaultTTL
ipInReceives ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors
192
OID ipForwDatagrams
Description Number of input datagrams for which the CDM-IP 550 was not their final IP destination, because of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. Number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. Number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded. Total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols. Total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. Number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded. Number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. Maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity. Number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity. Number of IP datagrams successfully re-assembled. Number of failures detected by the IP re-assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc.). Number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity. Number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, (e.g., because their Don't Fragment flag was set). Number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity.
ipInUnknownProtos ipInDiscards
ipInDelivers ipOutRequests
ipOutDiscards
ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmTimeout ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails
ipFragCreates
193
8.3.2.5 THE IP ADDRESS TABLE

The IP address table contains the CDM-IP 550s IP addressing information.
Table 10. IPAddress Table OIDs OID ipAdEntIfIndex ipAdEntNetMask Description CDM-IP 550s Interface index value (ifIndex) uniquely identifies the interface to which the IP address is applicable. Subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry. The value of the mask is an IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the hosts bits set to 0. Value of the least-significant bit in the IP broadcast address used for sending datagrams on the interface associated with the IP address of this entry. For example, when the Internet standard allones broadcast address is used, the value will be 1. This value applies to both the subnet and network broadcasts addresses used by the entity on this interface. Size of the largest IP datagram which this entity can re-assemble from incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on this interface.
ipAdEntBcastAddr
ipAdEntReasmMaxSize
194
8.3.2.6 THE ADDRESS TRANSLATION TABLE

The ipNetToMediaTable is the IP Address Translation table used for mapping from IP addresses to physical addresses. Each entry contains one IP address to physical address equivalence.
Table 11. Address Translation Table OIDs OID ipNetToMediaIfIndex ipNetToMediaPhysAddress ipNetToMediaNetAddress ipNetToMediaType Description Interface on which this entry's equivalence is effective. Physical address. IP address corresponding to the physical address. Type of mapping. A value of dynamic(3) means that the entry was added by the ARP protocol. A value of static(4) means the entry was added by a user. A value of invalid(2) is used for an invalidated mapping and a value of other(1) is used when none of the previous values apply.
8.3.2.7 ADDITIONAL IP OBJECTS

The ipRoutingDiscards OID is the number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid.
195
8.3.3
ICMP GROUP
This group contains the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) input and output statistics. ICMP messages are used for out-of-band messages related to network operation.
Table 12. IP Routing Table OIDs OID icmpInMsgs icmpInErrors Description Total number of ICMP messages which the entity received. Number of ICMP messages which the entity received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc). Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. Number of ICMP Source Quench messages received. Number of ICMP Redirect messages received. Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. Number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. Number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. Number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. Number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. Total number of ICMP messages which this entity attempted to send. Number of ICMP messages which this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. Number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent. Number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. Number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. Number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. Number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. Number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.
icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps
196
8.3.4
TCP GROUP
This group contains statistics and control parameters for the TCP protocol. This group contains a table describing the current TCP connections.
Note: The instances of object types that represent information about a particular TCP connection are transient; they persist only as long as the connection in question. Table 13. TCP Group OIDs OID tcpRtoAlgorithm Description Algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. The CDM-IP 550 uses Van Jacobson's algorithm. Minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The CDM-IP 550 uses a minimum timeout of 1000 milliseconds. Maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The CDM-IP 550 uses a maximum timeout of 64000 milliseconds. Limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity can support. In the CDM-IP 550, the maximum number of connections is dynamic so a value of 1 is returned. Number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. Number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state. Number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYNRCVD state, plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. Number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT state. Number of TCP connections for which the current state is either ESTABLISHED or CLOSE-WAIT. Total number of segments received. Total number of segments sent. Total number of segments retransmitted that is, the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets.
tcpRtoMin
tcpRtoMax
tcpMaxConn
tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens tcpAttemptFails
tcpEstabResets
tcpCurrEstab tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs
197
8.3.4.1 THE TCP CONNECTION TABLE

The tcpConnTable is a table containing TCP connection-specific information. Each row contains information about a particular current TCP connection. A row is transient, in that it ceases to exist when the connection makes the transition to the CLOSED state.
Table 14. TCP Connection Table OIDs OID tcpConnLocalAddress Description Local IP address for this TCP connection. In the case of a connection in the listen state which is willing to accept connections for any IP interface associated with the node, the value 0.0.0.0 is used. Local port number for this TCP connection. Remote IP address for this TCP connection. Remote port number for this TCP connection. Total number of segments received in error. Number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag.
tcpConnLocalPort tcpConnRemAddress tcpConnRemPort tcpInErrs tcpOutRsts
8.3.5
UDP GROUP
This group contains control parameters and statistics for the UDP protocol. This group contains a UDP table describing the UDP ports in use.
Table 15. UDP Group OIDs OID udpInDatagrams udpNoPorts udpInErrors Description Total number of UDP datagrams delivered. Total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port. Number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port. Total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity.
udpOutDatagrams
198
8.3.5.1 THE UDP LISTENER TABLE

The UDP listener table contains information about this entity's UDP end-points on which a local application is currently accepting datagrams. A row contains information about a particular current UDP listener.
Table 16. UDP Listener Table OIDs OID udpLocalAddress Description Local IP address for this UDP listener. In the case of a UDP listener which is willing to accept datagrams for any IP interface associated with the node, the value 0.0.0.0 is used. Local port number for this UDP listener.
udpLocalPort
8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8
EGP GROUP
This group is not implemented in the agent.
TRANSMISSION GROUP
This group is not implemented in the agent.
SNMP GROUP
This group provides statistical information regarding the SNMP Protocol.
Table 17. SNMP Group OIDs OID snmpInPkts snmpOutPkts snmpInBadVersions Description Total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service. Total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP agent to the transport service. Total number of SNMP Messages which were delivered to the SNMP agent and were for an unsupported SNMP version. Total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP agent which used a SNMP community name not known to the agent. Total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP agent which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. Total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP agent when decoding received SNMP Messages.
snmpInBadCommunityNames
snmpInBadCommunityUses
snmpInASNParseErrs
199
OID snmpInTooBigs
Description Total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is tooBig. Total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName. Total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue". Total number valid SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is readOnly. Total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr". Total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP agent as the result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and Get-Next PDUs. Total number of MIB objects which have been altered successfully by the SNMP agent as the result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request PDUs. Total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is tooBig". Total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status is noSuchName. Total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue". Total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP agent and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr".
snmpInNoSuchNames
snmpInBadValues
snmpInReadOnlys
snmpInGenErrs
snmpInTotalReqVars
snmpInTotalSetVars
snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs
snmpOutNoSuchNames
snmpOutBadValues
snmpOutGenErrs
200
OID snmpOutGetRequests snmpOutGetNexts snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGetResponses snmpOutTrap snmpEnableAuthenTraps
Description Total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP agent. Total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP agent. Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is permitted to generate authentication-failure traps.
201
8.4
PRIVATE MIB IMPLEMENTATIONS

The agent also implements two private MIBs for the CDM-IP 550. The CDM-IP IP Controller MIB (CDM-IP Controller) holds all the security, feature selection, and IP related parameters and the CDM-IP 550 modem MIB (CDM-IP 550) which contains all the modem specific parameters.
8.5
8.5.1
CDM-IP IP CONTROLLER PRIVATE MIB

CDM-IP ADMINISTRATION GROUP
This group contains system security, administration, and feature configuration parameters. The CDM-IP MibVersion OID contains the current version of the CDM-IP Controller MIB. The current version number is 5.
8.5.1.1 CDM-IP NAME PASSWORD CONFIG SUBGROUP

The Password subgroup contains the user names and passwords for three user types: Admin User, Read/Write User, and Read Only User. Only the Admin User can do GETS or SETS to the Security part of the MIB. Setting the username and password to none would remove the user access completely. A change in username/password may also result in a change in SNMP community string.
Table 18. CDM-IP Name Password Config Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipAdminName cdmipAdminPassword cdmipReadWriteName cdmipReadWritePassword cdmipReadOnlyName cdmipReadOnlyPassword Description Administrators user name and must be between 1 and 11 characters. Administrators password and must be between 1 and 11 characters. Read/Write users user name and must be between 1 and 11 characters. Read/Write users password and must be between 1 and 11 characters. Read-Only users user name and must be between 1 and 11 characters. Read-Only users password and must be between 1 and 11 characters.
202
8.5.1.2 CDM-IP ACCESS LISTS SUBGROUP

The Access Client List allows a user to define which remote clients can connect to a CDM-IP 550 when the Access List Enforcement is enabled. Each entry allows a user to specify an IP address and a subnet mask to define a unique class of clients that are allowed access to the CDM-IP 550.
Table 19. CDM-IP Access Lists Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipAccessIpAddress1 cdmipAccessSubnetMaskLen1 cdmipAccessIpAddress2 cdmipAccessSubnetMaskLen2 cdmipAccessIpAddress3 cdmipAccessSubnetMaskLen3 cdmipAccessIpAddress4 cdmipAccessSubnetMask4 cdmipAccessListEnforcement Description Defines an access IP address. Defines the subnet mask length of the corresponding IP address. Defines an access IP address. Defines the subnet mask length of the corresponding IP address. Defines an access IP address. Defines the subnet mask length of the corresponding IP address. Defines an access IP address. Defines the subnet mask length of the corresponding IP address. Enables/disables the access list by setting it to 1 (yes) or 0 (no).
CAUTION
Be sure that you have added the SNMP browser's/manager's IP Address to the access list before enabling access list filtering. Otherwise, the SNMP browser/manager will no longer be able to gain access to the CDM-IP.
203
8.5.1.3 FEATURES AVAILABILITY SUBGROUP

This subgroup tells if a feature is available or unavailable in the CDM-IP 550. The currently supported FAST features are QoS, IGMP, 3xDES Encryption and Header Compression. These features must be purchased as additional options.
Table 20. FAST Features FAST Feature QoS Option IGMP Option 3xDES Encryption Option Header Compression Option Status Supported Supported Supported Supported
8.5.1.4 FEATURES SUBGROUP

This subgroup allows a user to enable/disable a feature. Standard features that are supported (telnet, ping response, and multicast routing) can be enabled or disabled by sending a 1 (enable) or 0 (disable). The Midas Operations Feature is always enabled and cannot be disabled. FAST Features that have been purchased and are available in the Feature Availability Group can be enabled or disabled by a user. Not yet purchased or not yet supported FAST Features will remain disabled.
Table 21. Features Subgroup Feature Telnet Feature Ping Response Feature Multicast Routing Feature Midas Feature QoS Option IGMP Option Transmit 3xDES Encryption Option Receive 3xDES Encryption Option Header Compression Option Payload Compression Option Type Standard Standard Standard Standard FAST Standard FAST FAST FAST FAST Status Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
204
8.5.1.5 ENCRYPTION SUBGROUP

Note: This subgroup will only be accessible in the MIB tree if the Encryption FAST feature has been purchased and the license key has been entered through the modems front panel. Otherwise, both GETS and SETS on these OIDs will return errors. This subgroup controls the parameters for the Triple DES (3xDES) feature. Each Transmit/Receive key is of 192-bit length. Table 22. Encryption Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipTransmitEncryptEnabled cdmipReceiveDecryptEnabled cdmipTransmitKey1 cdmipTransmitKey2 cdmipTransmitKey3 cdmipTransmitKey4 cdmipTransmitKey5 cdmipTransmitKey6 cdmipTransmitKey7 cdmipTransmitKey8 cdmipReceiveKey1 Description Enables/disables encryption on the transmit side. Enables/disables decryption on the receive side. Allows the user to specify the value of Key1 used to encrypt packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key2 used to encrypt transmitted packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key3 used to encrypt packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key4 used to encrypt transmitted packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key5 used to encrypt packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key6 used to encrypt transmitted packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key7 used to encrypt packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key8 used to encrypt transmitted packets transmitted to the satellite. Allows the user to specify the value of Key1 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface. Allows the user to specify the value of Key2 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface. Allows the user to specify the value of Key3 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface. Allows the user to specify the value of Key4 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface. Allows the user to specify the value of Key5 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface.
cdmipReceiveKey2
cdmipReceiveKey3
cdmipReceiveKey4
cdmipReceiveKey5
205
OID cdmipReceiveKey6
Description Allows the user to specify the value of Key6 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface. Allows the user to specify the value of Key7 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface. Allows the user to specify the value of Key8 used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface.
cdmipReceiveKey7
cdmipReceiveKey8
8.5.1.6 CDM-IP SMTP

The cdmipSmtp subsection sets up the CDM-IP 550 to use a SMTP mail server to send a problem report back to CDM-IP Modem Support. Along with the problem report, the CDM-IP 550 sends the equipment serial number and configuration, which is attached to the email message. By default, the problem report is sent to cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com. In order for this to work, the user is required to enter the IP address of their outgoing SMTP mail server and the domain name for that server.
Table 23. CDM-IP SMTP OIDs OID cdmipSmtpServerIpAddress cdmipSmtpDomain cdmipSmtpDestinationName Description Specifies users outgoing SMTP servers IP address. Specifies the SMTP Domain of the mail server. Specifies the SMTP destination user name.
206
8.5.1.7 CDM-IP SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES

The CDM-IP 550 uses community strings as a password scheme that provides authentication before gaining access to the CDM-IP 550 agents MIBs. In SNMP v1/v2c, the community string is sent unencrypted in the SNMP packets. Caution must be taken by the network administrator to ensure that SNMP packets travel only over a secure and private network if security is a concern. A packet sniffer can easily obtain the community string by viewing the SNMP traffic on the network. The community string is entered into the MIB Browser or Network Node Management software and is used to authenticate users and determine access privileges to the SNMP agent.
8.5.1.8 CDM-IP SNMP TRAPS

The CDM-IP 550 has the ability to send out SNMP traps when certain events occur in the modem. For example, when the CDM-IP 550 boots it sends out a coldstart trap and 3 linkup traps, one for each interface that is brought up. The CDM-IP 550 also sends out traps when an alarm or a fault occurs in the modem. These include unit faults, TX faults, and RX faults. A trap is sent both when a fault occurs and is cleared. The CDM-IP 550 supports both SNMPv1 traps and SNMPv2 notifications. Which style of traps the CDM-IP 550 sends can be configured by the user using the cdmipSnmpTrapVersion OID. The following are the MIB2 v1traps/v2 notifications that the CDM-IP 550 supports. CDM-IP 550 MIB2 SNMPv1 traps:
Cold Start Warm Start Link Down Link Up Authentication Failure 1 2 3 4 5
CDM-IP 550 MIB2 SNMPv2 notifications:

Cold Start Warm Start Link Down Link Up Authentication Failure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
207
The following tables are the Alarms and Faults v1 traps / v2 notifications that the CDMIP 550 supports. CDM-IP 550 Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps:
cdmip550ModemUnitFaultsTrap cdmip550ModemTxTrafficFaultsTrap cdmip550ModemRxTrafficFaultsTrap 624751 624752 624753
CDM-IP 550 Alarms and Faults SNMPv2 notifications:

cdmip550ModemUnitFaultsTrap cdmip550ModemTxTrafficFaultsTrap cdmip550ModemRxTrafficFaultsTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9.0.624751 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9.0.624752 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9.0.624753
8.5.1.9 CDM-IP SNMP TRAP CONFIGURATION

Table 24. CDM-IP SNMP Trap Configuration OIDs OID cdmipSnmpTrapDestinationIpAddress Description Specifies where the trap should be sent. This is usually the IP address of a network management application (such as HP Openview or Castlerock SNMPc). It could also be the IP address of a trap ringer console (such as MGSOFT MIB Browser). Community name that is sent with the trap. This community name is checked by the network management application or MIB browser to determine if it should accept or discard the trap being sent to it. Tells the agent if it should send out version 1 or version 2 traps. The trap format differs depending on which version is used but contains the same type of information. The choice of which trap version to use should depend on which SNMP version the managing application is expecting. The OID can be sent to the following values: 1 2 SNMPv1 SNMPv2
cdmipSnmpTrapCommunity
cdmipSnmpTrapVersion
208
8.5.2
INTERFACE GROUP
This Group controls the parameters of the modems Ethernet and HDLC interfaces.
8.5.2.1 ETHERNET INTERFACE SUBGROUP

The subgroup defines the modems Ethernet interface. These include parameters for setting the Ethernet speed, IP address, and IP address subnet prefix length.
Table 25. Ethernet Interface Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipEthernetMacAddress cdmipEthernetSpeed Description Defines the hardware MAC Address. This address is assigned permanently at the factory. Defines the Ethernet interfaces mode and speed. It defaults to auto negotiate. The cdmipEthernetSpeed OID can be set using the following options: 1 2 3 4 5 cdmipEthernetIpAddress cdmipEthernetSubnetPrefixLen Auto 10 MB/sec Half Duplex 100 MB/sec Half Duplex 10 MB/sec Full Duplex 100 MB/sec Full Duplex
IP address assigned to the Ethernet Interface. Specifies the subnet mask assigned to the Ethernet Interface. Valid subnet mask prefix length are between 8 and 30.
209
8.5.2.2 SATELLITE INTERFACE SUBGROUP

This subgroup defines the modems Satellite interface.
Table 26. Satellite Interface Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipSatelliteSubnetPrefixLen Description Specifies the Subnet Mask length assigned to the Satellite Interface. Valid subnet mask prefix lengths are between 8 and 30.
8.5.2.3 ROUTE TABLE GROUP

Note: In order for the CDM-IP 550 to properly pass packets over the satellite interface, the user MUST provide the appropriate IP to HDLC address mapping in the Route table. This Route table is Comtech EF Datas proprietary implementation, where the user specifies a HDLC address as a next-hop for a route destined to satellite interface.
The cdmipIpRouteTable allows a user to define how the packets that the CDM-IP 550 receives are routed. By this table, a user can define which DES key to use for a route.
Table 27. Route Table OIDs OID cdmipIpRouteIndex Description Sequential number that corresponds to the row index in the Route table. The route index starts at 1. Name assigned by the user to reference the route. The assigned name cannot contain any white space and must be unique. Destination IP address for the route. Length of the network portion of the subnet mask. IP address where the packet will be routed for further processing. The Next Hop IP Address must be on the same subnet as the Ethernet. This OID can be set to: 1 2 3 4 cdmipRouteState No Routing Eth To Sat Routing Sat To Eth Routing Sat To Eth And Eth To Sat Routing
cdmipIpRouteName
cdmipIpRouteDestAddress cdmipIpRouteDestMaskLen cdmipIpRouteNextHopAddress
cdmipIpRouteMulticastOptions
Defines destination interface of the route toSatellite(1) toEthernet(2) Set this member to toSatellite before setting cdmipRouteHdlcAddress.
210
OID cdmipRouteHdlcAddress
Description To send packets over satellite interface, the user needs to configure the route entry with a valid HDLC address. This parameter is similar to next-hop IP address. The user has to set the member cdmipRouteState to toSatellite before setting this member.
Note: The cdmipIpRouteHdrComp, cdmipIpRoutePayloadComp or cdmipIpRouteDesKey OID will only be accessible if the FAST feature has been purchased and activated. Otherwise, a GET will return 1 (clear) and a SET will return an error.
cdmipRouteHdrComp cdmipRoutePayloadComp cdmipIpRouteDesKey Allows the user to specify Header Compression for a Route. Allows the user to specify Payload Compression for a Route. Allows the user to specify which Encryption Key should be used to encrypt traffic for a route. This parameter can be one of three values: clear, key1-8, or random. Clear will force the CDM-IP 550 to not encrypt any traffic processed for the route. Keyx will use the key specified in the keyx to encrypt traffic for the route. Can be set to: 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Clear Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Random
211
OID cdmipIpRouteRowStatus
Description Used in GET operations to tell if the route table entry is active. Used in SET operations to tell if a new route table entry is to be created or an existing route table entry is to be deleted. It returns 1 (active) to indicate that the route entry is available for use by the managed device. The values of 2 (notInService) and 3 (notReady) are not supported. When a new route entry is created, this OID must be set to 4 (createAndGo). The value of 5 (createAndWait) is not supported. If an existing row is to be deleted this OID must be set to 6 (destroy), which indicates that the user wishes to delete the route from the route table. The cdmipIpRouteRowStatus can return: 1 Active The cdmipIpRouteRowStatus can be set to the following for row create/delete: 4 6 Create And Go Destroy
8.5.2.4 PROTOCOLS GROUP 8.5.2.4.1

Note:
IGMP Configuration Subgroup

This subgroup will only be accessible in the MIB tree if the IGMP FAST feature has been purchased and activated. Otherwise, both GETs and SETs on these OIDs will return errors. Table 28. IGMP Configuration Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipIgmpTable Description Reports the host groups being routed by the modem. This table shows the minimum time before a host group will be put out of service. Allows a user to enable or disable the IGMP feature. When enabled, multicast packets received from the Satellite Interface are forwarded to the Ethernet Interface if a host on the Ethernet LAN has joined the host group via an IGMP report. Defines the time interval (in seconds) in which the modem sends out its host membership Query messages.
cdmipIgmpEnable
cdmipIgmpQueryPeriod
212
OID cdmipIgmpMaxRespTime
Description Defines the time interval (in seconds) that the modem waits before it assumes that no hosts are interested in the membership query. The max response time is 25 seconds. Number of unanswered queries that must occur before the modem assumes that group has no local members and that it need not forward remotely-originated multicasts for that group onto the local network. Allows the modem to respond to a Query by generating Host Membership Reports, telling each host group to which it belongs on the network interface from which the Query was received. Defines which version of the IGMP protocol should be followed when attempting to join a host group via an unsolicited report. Provides a mechanism whereby routers can intercept packets not addressed to them directly, without incurring any significant performance penalty. Some Cisco routers may require the definition of a Router Alert Option to recognize a report from a host to join a host group. Configures the modem to generate an unsolicited report within specified time intervals (in seconds) after joining a host group.
cdmipIgmpMaxMissBeforeDrop
cdmipIgmpRecognizeQueries
cdmipIgmpVersionUnsolicitedReports
cdmipIgmpForceAlertOption
cdmipIgmpUnsolicitedReportInterval
8.5.2.5 REDUNDANCY GROUP

Table 29. Redundancy OIDs OID cdmipCurrentRedundantState Description Displays if the modem is Online and Offline. The Online modem is the one that will process traffic. The Offline modem monitors the health of the online unit and will take over if it detects a failure. IP Address for the Ethernet Interface for the Local Unit. IP Address for the Ethernet Interface of the Remote Unit. Traffic IP address will always be active on the Online Modem. When a fault occurs the traffic IP address will float between the two redundant modems.
cdmipLocalUnitManagementIpAddress cdmipRedundantUnitManagementIpAddress cdmipRedundantTrafficIpAddress
213
OID cdmipRedundantTrafficSubnetMaskLen
Description This is the length of the traffic IP address and can float between the two redundant modems if a failure occurs. Forces a redundant switchover so that if the modem is online it will transition to offline and stop processing traffic. If the modem is already offline, then this command will be ignored.
cdmipForceUnitOffline
8.5.2.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE GROUP

Table 30. Operation and Maintenance Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipAppVersion cdmipSaveConfiguration cdmipReset cdmipRestoreFactoryDefaults cdmipLoadParamsFromStorage cdmipBootImage Description Displays the CDM-IP Softwares name, version, and date. Allows a user to save the current configuration of the CDM-IP 550 to permanent storage. Allows a user to reboot the modem. It has the same logical effect of power-cycling the unit. Restore factory defaults configuration. Load the system configuration from the param file stored on the flash. Determines which version of the CDM-IP software package (includes Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) will be loaded upon boot-up. The possible options are: Latest boot the newest software package based upon date. Image 1 boot the software package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage. Image2 boot the software package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage. Determines which installed software package (includes Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) that the CDM-IP will overwrite when upgrading with a new software package. The possible options are: Oldest overwrite the oldest software package based upon date. Image1 overwrite the software package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage. Image 2 overwrite the software package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage.
cdmipUpgradeSlot
214
OID cdmipParamconfig
Description Identifies the PARAM file that will be loaded on bootup. The options are: Last saved Parameter file Factory uses the internal, hard-coded factory default parameters. Displays unit current operational software information. Displays unit current Boot Image software information. Displays Application Image 1 software information. Displays Application Image 2 software information. Displays Framer module version information.
cdmipUnitInformation cdmipBootImageInfo cdmipAppImage1Info cdmipAppImage2Info cdmipFramerVersion
8.5.2.6.1
Remote Port B Configuration Subgroup

Table 31. Remote Port B Configuration Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipRemotePortBDeviceAddress cdmipRemotePortBBaudRate Description Defines the device address. Valid addresses are in the range from 0 to 9999. Defines the speed of the serial interface. Can be set to: 1 2 3 4 5 6 cdmipRemotePortBFormat 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400
This subgroup defines the Remote Port B configuration.
Supports three configurations for the Remote Port B interface. Each format defines a triple that describes the data bits, parity, and stop bits. Can be set to: 1 2 3 8-N-1 (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit) 7-E-2 (7 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits) 7-O-2 (7 data bits, odd parity, 2 stop bits)
215
OID cdmipRemotePortBInterface
Description Configures the UART to operate in one of three types of physical EIA-xxx interfaces (EIA-232, EIA485, EIA-485-4W). The OID can be set to: 1 2 3 EIA-232 EIA-485 2W EIA-485 4W
216
8.5.2.6.2
IP Routing Statistics Subgroup

Table 32. IP Routing Statistics Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipTotalIpPacketsFromSatellite Description Total Number of IP packets that were received from the Satellite Interface.
8.5.2.6.3
Ethernet Statistics
Table 33. Ethernet Statistics Subgroup OIDs OID CdmipEtherTransmitGoodFrames Description Number of good frames transmitted by this Ethernet interface. Number of frames that are not transmitted because they encountered configured max collisions. Number of frames not transmitted because they had collision outside normal collision window. Number of frames not transmitted or re-transmitted due to transmit DMA underrun. Number of frames transmitted by device despite the fact that it detected a deassertion of carrier sense. Number of frames deferred before transmission due to activity on link. Number of transmitted frames that encountered only one collision. Number of transmitted frames that encountered more than one collision. Total number of collisions encountered while attempting to transmit. Count of good frames received by the Ethernet device.
cdmipEtherTransmitMaxCollisionCount
cdmipEtherTransmitLateCollisionCount
cdmipEtherTransmitDMAUnderrunCount
cdmipEtherTransmitLostCarrierSenseCount
cdmipEtherTransmitDeferredCount
cdmipEtherTransmitSingleCollisionCount cdmipEtherTransmitMultipleCollisionCount
cdmipEtherTransmitTotalCollisionCount
cdmipEtherReceiveGoodFrames
217
OID cdmipEtherReceiveCRCErrorFrameCount cdmipEtherReceiveAlignErrorCount
Description Number of aligned frames discarded due to a CRC error. Number of frames that are both misaligned and contain a CRC error. Count of good frames discarded due to unavailable resources. Number of good frames discarded due to overflow of internal receive FIFO. Number of frames encountered collisions during frame reception. Count of good frames received by the Ethernet device. Number of Flow Control frames transmitted by the device. Number of Flow Control frames received by the device.
cdmipEtherReceiveResourceErrorCount cdmipEtherReceiveFifoOverrunErrorCount
cdmipEtherReceiveCollisionDetectErrCount cdmipEtherReceiveShortFrameCount cdmipEtherTransmitFlowCtrlPauseFrames cdmipEtherReceiveFlowCtrlPauseFrames
8.5.2.6.4
Note:
QoS Statistics
This subgroup will only be accessible in the MIB tree if the QoS FAST feature has been purchased and activated. Otherwise, both GETs and SETs on these OIDs will return errors.
This subgroup contains the Quality of Service (QoS) statistics elements. This is implemented as a table with maximum number of configured QoS rules, as the rows.
Table 34. QoS Statistics Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipQoSStatsQueueIndex cdmipQoSStatsSentPackets cdmipQoSStatsSentPacketsPerSecond cdmipQoSStatsSentBytes cdmipQoSStatsDroppedPackets cdmipQoSStatsCurrentTxRate cdmipQoSStatsAverageTxRate Description Queue index of this particular row in the QoS stats table. Count of packets sent through this QoS queue. Number of packets sent per second through this QoS queue. Count of bytes sent through this QoS queue. Number of packets dropped from this QoS queue. Current transmission data rate associated with this QoS queue. Average rate of transmission associated with this QoS queue.
218
OID cdmipQoSStatsMaxTxRate cdmipQoSStatsActiveFlows cdmipQoSStatsResetCounters
Description Maximum Tx rate reached on this QoS queue. Number of Active flows associated with this QoS queue. Reset all the QoS counters associated with specified QoS queue.
8.5.2.6.5
WAN Statistics
Table 35. WAN Statistics Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipWanFpgaRxBadAddrCount Description The count of received frames that did not match any of the 8 HDLC addresses or the broadcast address. Count of received frames that failed packet processor CRC check. Count of aborted frames and octet error frames. Count of received frames that exceeded max frame length of 2K bytes in length (Or) overflowed the HDLC buffer. Number of received frames that failed HDLC CRC check. Count of payload bytes that were received over satellite link excluding any frame overhead. Count of HDLC header bytes received over satellite link including control, HDLC address, Flow ID, and CRC. Number of packets received over satellite link. This counter keeps track of number of HDLC header bytes transmitted over satellite link. Number of payload bytes transmitted over satellite link. Count of packets transmitted over satellite link. Reset all Rx and Tx FPGA counters.
cdmipWanFpgaRxPktProcErrorCount cdmipWanFpgaRxAbortOctetErrorCount cdmipWanFpgaRxOverrunErrorCount
cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcCrcErrorCount cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcPayloadCount
cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcHeaderCount
cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcPacketCount cdmipWANFpgaTxHdlcHeaderCount
cdmipWanFpgaTxHdlcPayloadCount cdmipWANFpgaTxHdlcPacketCount cdmipWANFpgaResetAllCounters
219
8.5.2.6.6
Note:
Compression Statistics
This subgroup will only be accessible in the MIB tree if the Header and/or Compression FAST feature has been purchased and activated. Otherwise, both GETs and SETs on these OIDs will return errors.
This subgroup contains the Compression statistics elements. This is implemented as a table with maximum number of configured QoS rules, as the rows.
Table 36. Compression Statistics Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipCompressionStatisticsEntry cdmipHdrcompStatsQueueIndex cdmipHdrcompStatsPreHdrCompBytes Description Queue index of this particular row in the compression stats table. Queue index of this particular row in the header compression stats table. This counter keeps track of bytes in full packet before header compression. This counter keeps track of size in bytes of the packet after doing header compression on the packet. Displays effective header compression ratio. This counter keeps track of bytes in full packet before payload compression. This counter keeps track of size in bytes of the packet after doing payload compression on the packet. Displays effective payload compression ratio. Resets all header compression counters associated with specified QoS rule/queue.
cdmipHdrcomStatsPostHdrCompBytes
cdmipHdrcompRatio cdmipPayloadCompStatsPrePayloadCompBytes
cdmipPayloadCompStatsPostPayloadCompBytes
cdmipPayloadCRatio cdmipHdrcompStatsResetCounters
8.5.2.6.7
QoS Rules Subgroup

Table 37. QoS Rules Subgroup OIDs OID cdmipQoSFeature cdmipQoSRulesTable cdmipQoSRulesEntry Description QoS feature status
220
OID cdmipQoSRulesIndex
Description Sequential number that corresponds to the row index in the QoS Rules table. The QoS Rules Index starts at 1. QoS Rule Source IP QoS Rule Source IP Mask Length QoS Rule Protocol Selection QoS Rule Source Minimum Port number QoS Rule Source Maximum Port number QoS Rule Destination Minimum Port number QoS Rule Destination Maximum Port number QoS Rule Minimum Bandwidth QoS Rule Maximum Bandwidth QoS Rule priority QoS Rule WRED enable QoS Rule Filter enable
cdmipQoSRulesSrclpaddr cdmipQoSRulesSrclpMaskLen cdmipQoSRulesProtocol cdmipQoSRulesSrcPortMin cdmipQoSRulesSrcPortMax cdmipQoSRulesDstPortMin cdmipQoSRulesDstPortMax cdmipQoSRulesMinBw cdmipQoSRulesMaxBw cdmipQoSRulesPriority cdmipQoSRulesWred cdmipQoSRulesFilter
221
OID cdmipQoSRulesRowStatus
Description Used in GET operations to tell if the Route table entry is active. It is used in SET operations to tell if a new QoS Rule table entry is to be created or an existing QoS Rule table entry is to be deleted. It returns 1 (active) to indicate that the QoS Rule entry is available for use by the managed device. The values of 2 (notInService) and 3 (notReady) are not supported. When a new route is created, this OID must be set to 4 (createAndGo). The value of 5 (createAndWait) is not supported. If an existing row is to be deleted this OID must be set to 6 (destroy), which indicates that the user wishes to delete the QoS Rule from the QoS Rule table. The cdmipIPRouteRowStatus can return 1 Active The cdmipQoSRulesRowStatus can be set to the following for row create/delete: 4 6 Create And Go Destroy
cdmipQoSDiffServeRulesEntry cdmipQoSDiffServeRulesMinBw cdmipQoSDiffServeRulesMaxBw cdmipQoSDiffServRulesPriority cdmipQoSMode
QoS Rule Name QoS DiffServ Rule Minimum Bandwidth QoS DiffServ Rule Maximum Bandwidth QoS DiffServ Rule QoS Mode Max/Priority Min/Max DiffServ
222
8.6
CDM-IP 550 PRIVATE MIB
IMPORTANT
Whenever modifying the Modulator or Demodulator parameters by SNMP, the user must be aware that the following variables must be executed in this order: FEC (Forward Error Correction) Modulation or Demodulation Code Rate Data Rate
8.6.1
CDM-IP 550 OBJECTS GROUP
8.6.1.1 SYSTEM INFORMATION:

Table 38. ARP Configuration Subgroup OIDs OID cdmip550EquipmentID cdmip550UnitSerialNumber cdmip550SoftwareRevision cdmip550DeviceTime cdmip550DeviceDate cdmip550CircuitID cdmip550LocalRemoteState Description Units equipment ID. Units serial number. Units software revision. Device time. Current time is in hh:mm:ss format. Device date. Current date is in mm/dd/yy format. Circuit ID. User defined string that will be displayed on the front panel. Local/Remote state. Can be set to: 0 1 Local Remote
8.6.1.2 TX PARAMETERS
Table 39. Tx Parameters OIDs OID cdmip550TxFrequency cdmip550TxDataRate Description Transmit frequency in Hz. Valid ranges are from 52,000,000 Hz to 88,000,000 Hz and 104,000,000 Hz to 188,000,000 Hz. Transmit data rate in bps. Valid range is from 2,400 bps to 2,048,000 bps.
223
OID cdmip550TxModType
Description Transmit modulation type. Valid values are: 1 2 3 BPSK QPSK OQPSK
cdmip550TxFECType
Transmit forward error correction coding type. Valid values are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 None Vit Turbo Q 3/4 Turbo B 21/44 Turbo B 5/16 Turbo OQ3/4 Turbo Q 1/2
cdmip550TxFECCodeRate
Transmit forward error correction code rate. Can be set to: 1 3 7 8 9 Rate 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate 21/44 Rate 5/16
cdmip550TxSpecInv
Transmit spectral inversion selection. Can be set to: 0 1 Normal Inverted
cdmip550TxScrambler
Transmit scrambler state. Can be set to: 0 1 Off On
cdmip550TxClockSource
Transmit clock source. Can be set to: 1 2 3 Internal External LoopTmed
cdmip550TxPowerLevel
Transmit output power level. Can be set from 0 to 200. The units are 0.1 dBm (0 = 00.0 dBm to -200 = -20.0 dBm).
224
OID cdmip550TxCarrierState
Description Transmit carrier on/off state. Can be set to: 0 1 2 3 Off On Ext Off Rti
8.6.1.3 RX PARAMETERS
Table 40. Rx Parameters OIDs OID cdmip550RxFrequency cdmip550RxDataRate cdmip550RxDemodType Description Receive frequency in Hz. Can be set from 52,000,000 Hz to 88,000,000 Hz and 104,000,000 Hz to 188,000,000 Hz. Receive data rate in bps. Can be set between 2,400 bps and 2,048,000 bps. Receive demodulation type. Can be set to: 1 2 3 cdmip550RxFECType BPSK QPSK OQPSK
Receive forward error correction decoding type. Can be set to: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 None Vit Turbo Q 3/4 Turbo B 21/44 Turbo B 5/16 Turbo OQ 3/4 Turbo Q 1/2
cdmip550RxFECCodeRate
Receive forward error correction code rate. Can be set to: 1 3 7 8 9 Rate 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate 21/44 Rate 5/16
225
OID cdmip550RxSpecInv
Description Receive spectrum inversion state. Can be set to: 0 1 Normal Inverted
cdmip550RxDescrambler
Receive descrambler state. Can be set to: 0 1 Off On
cdmip550RxClockMode
Receive clock mode. Can be set to: 0 1 Disabled Enabled
cdmip550RxBufferSize
Receive buffer size in bits. Can be set to: 1 2 3 4 5 256 bits 512 bits 1024 bits 2048 bits 4096 bits
cdmip550RxAcqSweepRange cdmip550RxEbnoAlarmPoint
Receive +/- acquisition sweep range of demodulation in KHz. Can be set between 1 and 30. Receive Eb/N0 alarm point in dB. Can be set between 0 and 160 in 0.1 dB where (0=0.0 dB to 160=16.0 dB).
8.6.1.4 INTERFACE PARAMETERS

Table 41. Interface Parameters OIDs OID cdmip550IfImpedance Description IF interface impedance. Can be set to: 5 7 cdmip550InterfaceType 50 75
Unit interface type. Can only be set to IP. 4 IP
226
8.6.1.5 UTILITY PARAMETERS

Table 42. Utility Parameters OIDs OID cdmip550UnitFramingMode Description Unit framing mode. Can be set to: 0 1 cdmip550EdmacAddress Unframed Framed
The EDMAC slave address will set the range of addresses of distant-end units (modems and transceivers) for which this unit will forward messages. Only values that are integer multiples of ten are permitted. Setting the EDMAC slave address to 0 disables this function. Valid slave addresses are between 0 and 9999. Unit test mode. Can be set to: 0 1 2 3 4 5 Normal IF Loop Back Digital Loop Back IO Loop Back Tx CW Tx Alternating Pattern
cdmip550UnitTestMode
cdmip550RecenterBuffer
Command to force the modem to re-center the receive buffer. A value of 1 (yes) is used to issue the operation. Command to force the modem into STANDBY mode if it is in a redundant pair. A value of 1 (yes) is used to issue the operation. Alarm mask conditions, in the form abcde, where: a = mask Tx AIS alarm, b = mask Rx AGC alarm c = mask buffer alarms, d = mask Rx AIS alarm e = mask Eb/N0 alarm. Setting any of these bytes to 0 unmasks alarm, setting to 1 masks them. Valid values are between 0 and 11111. Forces the unit to store the current modem configuration in a configuration memory location defined by values 0 to 9. Forces the unit to retrieve the configuration memory location defined by values 0 to 9 and to re-program the unit with that stored configuration.
cdmip550ForceRedundantSwitch
cdmip550UnitAlarmMask
cdmip550UnitConfigStore
cdmip550UnitConfigLoad
227
OID cdmip550OduCommEnable
Description Enables or disables communication, via an FSK serial link, with a Comtech EF Data Transceiver (Outdoor unit). Can be set to: 0 1 Disable Enable
8.6.1.6 THE AUPC PARAMETERS

Table 43. AUPC Parameter OIDs OID cdmip550AupcEnable Description Enables or disables AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control). Can be set to: 0 1 cdmip550AupcControlParameters Disable Enable
Defines AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) operating parameters. Has the form abc.cd Where: a = Define action on max power condition; 0 = do nothing; 1 = generate TX alarm; b = Define action on remote demod unlock; 0 = go to nominal power; 1 = go to max power; c = Target Eb/No value, in dB, for remote demod; d = Maximum increase in Tx Power permitted, in dB. Returns the value of Ebi/No of the remote demod, if Framing is enabled. Returns 999 if demod is unlocked. Returns -1 if Framing is not enabled. Ebi/No values can be between 20 and 60 in 0.1 dBs where 20=2.0 dB to 160=16.0 dB. Returns the increase in Tx power level, in dB (from the nominal setting) due to the action of AUPC. Returns 1 if AUPC is not enabled. Values can be between 0 and 90 in 0.1 dBm where 0 = 0.0 dBm to 90 = 9.0 dBm
cdmip550RemoteEbno
cdmip550TxPowerLevelIncrease
228
8.6.1.7 STATUS PARAMETERS

Table 44. Status Parameter OIDs OID cdmip550RxEbno Description Value of Ebi/No, can be between 0 and 160 in 0.1 dB where 0 = 0.0 dB to 160 = 16.0 dB and 999 = Demod Unlocked Value of Coarse AGC setting, can be between 0 and 99. Value of frequency offset of the carrier being demodulated. Can be between -30 KHz and 30 KHz where -30 = -30 KHz to 30=+30 KHz and 999 = Demod Unlock. Value of the buffer fill state. Can be between 0 and 99 in percentage filled. Value of the estimated corrected bit error rate. Value -10 has been multiplied by 10E . Returns the redundancy state of the unit, where: 0 = Off Line (forced into standby by 1:N or 1:1 Switch); 1= On Line (normal). Valid values are: 0 1 cdmip550ModemUnitFaults Offline Online
cdmip550RxCoarseAGC cdmip550RxFrequencyOffset
cdmip550BufferFillState cdmip550RxBER cdmip550RedundancyState
Returns the current fault and status codes for the Unit (hardware). The value will be a integer between 0 and 8191 where the bit that is set indicates which fault has occurred: bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 bit 11 bit 12 not used, always 0 volt power supply 12 volt power supply 5 volt power supply 18 volt power supply 12 volt power supply RAM load fail Tx synthesizer unlocked Rx synthesizer unlocked Power cal checksum fail FPGA main chain load fail Turbo FPGA load fail IP Module fail
229
OID cdmip550ModemTxTrafficFaults
Description Returns the current fault and status codes for the Tx Traffic. The value will be an integer between 0 and 31 where the bit that is set indicates the fault that has occurred: bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 Not used, always 0 No clock from terrestrial interface Tx FIFO slip AIS Detected on incoming data AUPC upper limit reached
cdmip550ModemRxTrafficFaults
Returns the current fault and status codes for the Rx Traffic. The value will be an integer between 0 and 255 where the bit that is set indicates the fault that has occurred: bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 Not used, always 0 Demod Unlock AGC alarm Frame Sync lost Buffer underflow Buffer overflow AIS detected on incoming data Eb/No Threshold exceeded
230
8.6.1.8 LOGS
Table 45. Logs OIDs OID cdmip550ClearEventsLog cdmip550NumberUnreadEvents cdmip550RetrieveNext5Events Description Instructs the unit to clear all Stored Events. A value of 1 (yes) is used to clear the event log. Returns the number of Stored Events which remain unread. The value can be between 0 and 99. Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Events which have not yet been read over the remote control. Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body= ABCddmmyyhhmmss, A being the fault/clear indicator: F=Fault, C=Clear, I=Info. B being the fault type where: 1=Unit, 2=Rx Traffic, 3=Tx Traffic, 4=Power on/off, or log cleared. C being the fault code, where the Info codes are: 0=power off, 1=power on, 2=log cleared, 3=global config change, and 4=redundancy config change. ddmmyyhhmmss = date/time stamp. If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros. Used to set the sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function. Can be set to: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 cdmip550ClearStatisticsLog cdmip550NumberUnreadStatistics None 10 Mins 20 Mins 30 Mins 40 Mins 50 Mins 60 Mins 70 Mins 80 Mins 90 Mins
cdmip550SetStatisticInterval
Instructs the unit to clear all Stored Statistics. Can be set to 1 (yes) to clear the log. Returns the number of Stored Statistics which remain unread. Can be between 0 and 250.
231
OID cdmip550RetrieveNext5Statistics
Description Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Statistics which have not yet been read over the remote control. Reply format: {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body= AA.ABB.BC.CD.Dddmmyyhhmmss, AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period. BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period. C.C = Max. Tx Power Level Increase during sample period. D.D = Average Tx Power Level Increase during sample period. ddmmyyhhmmss = date/time stamp. If there are less than 5 statistics to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros.
8.6.1.9 ODU OBJECTS

The oduSelect determines with which transceiver to communicate. It can be set to:
1 2 Odu 1 Odu 2
8.6.1.10ODU SYSTEM INFORMATION

Table 46. ODU System Information OIDs OID oduModelNumberSoftwareVer oduUnitSerialNumber oduDeviceTime oduDeviceDate oduCircuitID Description Read-only string describing the ODU model number and software version. Read-only string containing the ODU serial number. Time in hh:mm:ss format. Date in dd/mm/yy format. User defined string for display purposes.
232
8.6.1.11ODU UNIT PARAMETERS

Table 47. ODU Unit OIDs OID oduUnitMuteMode Description Unit mute. Can be set to: 0 1 oduUnitColdStart 0 1 oduUnitAutoFaultRecovery 0 1 oduUnitExtRefFaultLogic 0 1 oduUnitRefOscAdjust oduUnitLNACurrentSource Unmute Mute Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Unit cold start. Can be set to:
Auto fault recovery. Can be set to:
External reference fault logic. Can be set to:
Reference oscillator adjust. Can be between 0 and 255. LNA current source. Can be set to: 0 1 Disabled Enabled 20 Percent 25 Percent 30 Percent 35 Percent 40 Percent 45 Percent 50 Percent Disabled Disabled Enabled Manual Auto
oduUnitLNACurrentWindow
LNA current windows. Can be set to: 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 99
OduUnitLNAFaultLogic
LNA fault logic. Can be set to: 0 1
oduUnitRedundancyMode
Redundancy mode. Can be set to: 0 1
oduUnitRedForceSwitch
Force redundant switch. Can be set to 1 (yes) to issue command.
233
8.6.1.12ODU TX PARAMETERS
Table 48. ODU Tx Parameters OIDs OID OduTxFrequency OduTxAttenuation OduTxAmplifier Description Transmit frequency in KHz. Can be set between 5,845,000 KHz and 181,00,000 KHz. Transmit attenuation. Can be between 0 and 2000 in 0.01 dB, where 0 = 0.00dB to 2000 = 20.00dB. Transmit amplifier. Can be set to: 0 1 OduTxMute Off On
Transmit mute. Can be set to: 0 1 Disabled Enabled
OduTxSlopeMode
Transmit slope mode. Can be set to: 0 1 Manual Calibrated
OduTxSlopeValue OduTxGainOffset
Transmit slope value. Can be between 0 and 10 in 0.1 units, where 0 = 0.0 to 10 = 1.0. Transmit gain offset. Can be between 400 and 0 in 0.01dB, where 0 = 0.00 dB to 400 = -4.00dB.
234
8.6.1.13ODU RX PARAMETERS
Table 49. ODU Rx Parameters OIDs OID OduRxFrequency oduRxAttenuation oduRxMute Description Receive frequency in KHz. Can be between 3,625,000 KHz and 14,100,000 KHz. Receive attenuation. Can be between 0..2500 in 0.01dB where 0=0.00dB to 2500=25.00dB. Receive mute. Can be set to: 0 1 oduRxSlopeMode Disabled Enabled
Receive slope mode. Can be set to: 0 1 Manual Calibrated
oduRxSlopeValue oduRxGainOffset
Receive slope value. Can be between 0..10 in 0.1, where 0=0.0 to 10=1.0. Receive gain offset. Can be between -400 and 0 in 0.01 dB, where 0=0.00 dB to -400 = -4.00dB
235
8.6.1.14ODU UNIT STATUS

Table 50. ODU Unit Status OIDs OID OduOnlineState Description Online state. Can be set to: 0 1 oduMaintenanceParameters Offline Online
Used to Query the maintenance status of the CSAT. Example: 24VT=023.9cr 20VT=020.3cr 12VT=012.0cr 10VT=010.2cr P5VT=005.0cr N5VT=-05.0cr USYN=008.2cr UIFL=003.9cr DSYN=006.3cr DIFL=003.8cr REFV=002.9cr LNAC=081.9cr FANC=541.0cr UTMP= 37.0cr POWR=25.0-cr DTMP= 34.0crlf
236
OID OduUnitFaults
Description Used to Query the Alarm status of the CSAT. An integer value will be returned between 0..262143 where the bits that are set indicate the faults which have occurred: bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 bit 11 bit 12 bit 13 bit 14 bit 15 bit 16 bit 17 24 volt power supply 20 volt power supply 12 volt power supply 10 volt power supply +5 volt power supply -5 volt power supply Tx Synthesizer Unlocked Tx IFLO Unlocked Rx Synthesizer Unlocked Rx IFLO Unlocked Reference lock detect LNA Current Alarm Fan Current Alarm Temperature Alarm HPA Thermal Shutdown Alarm Internal IIC Bus Alarm EEPROM Checksum NVRAM/RTC Low Battery Alarm
8.6.1.15ODU LOGS
Table 51. ODU Logs OIDs OID oduClearEventsLog oduNumberUnreadEvents oduRetrieveNext5Events Description Can be set to 1 (yes) to issue command. CSAT returns the number of Stored Events which remain unread. Value can be between 0 and 99. CSAT returns the oldest 5 Stored Events that have not yet been read over the remote control. Reply format: Subbody{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody, where Sub-body=YYYYYYYYYY ZZ mmddyyhhmmss, YYYYYYYYYY being the fault description. ZZ being the alarm type: FT = Fault, OK = Clear, IF = Information. mmddyyhhmmss = date/time stamp.
237
8.7
CDM-IP CONTROLLER MIB TREE

1 --- iso 1.3 --- org 1.3.6 --- dod 1.3.6.1 --- internet 1.3.6.1.4 --- private 1.3.6.1.4.1 --- enterprises 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247 --- comtech 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4 --- cdmipController 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.1 --- cdmipControllerIdentity 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2 --- cdmipAdministration 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.1 --- cdmipMibVersion (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.3 --- cdmipNamePasswordConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.3.1 --- cdmipAdminName (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.3.2 --- cdmipAdminPassword (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.3.3 --- cdmipReadWriteName (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.3.4 --- cdmipReadWritePassword (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.3.5 --- cdmipReadOnlyName (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.3.6 --- cdmipReadOnlyPassword (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4 --- cdmipAccessLists 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.1 --- cdmipAccessIpAddress1 (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.2 --- cdmipAccessSubnetMaskLen1 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.3 --- cdmipAccessIpAddress2 (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.4 --- cdmipAccessSubnetMaskLen2 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.5 --- cdmipAccessIpAddress3 (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.6 --- cdmipAccessSubnetMaskLen3 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.7 --- cdmipAccessIpAddress4 (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.8 --- cdmipAccessSubnetMask4 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.4.9 --- cdmipAccessListEnforcement (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.5 --- cdmipFeaturesAvailability 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.5.3 --- cdmipQoSOption (Availability)
238
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.5.6 --- cdmipEncryptionOption (Availability) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.5.7 --- cdmipIgmpOption (Availability) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.5.8 --- cdmipHeaderCompressionOption (Availability) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.5.9 ---cdmipPayloadCompressionOption (Availability) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6 --- cdmipFeaturesConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.1 --- cdmipMidasFeature (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.2 --- cdmipTelnetFeature (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.3 --- cdmipPingReplyFeature (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.4 --- cdmipDownlinkMulticastRoutingFeature (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.7 --- cdmipQoSOpt (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.10 --- cdmipTransmit3xDesEncryptionOpt (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.11 --- cdmipReceive3xDesEncryptionOpt (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.12 --- cdmipIgmpOpt (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.13 --- cdmipHeaderCompressionOpt (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.16247.4.2.6.14 ---cdmipRxHeaderCompressionOpt (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.6.15 ---cdmipTxPayloadCompressionOpt (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7 --- cdmip3xDesConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.1 --- cdmipTransmitEncryptEnabled (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.2 --- cdmipReceiveDecryptEnabled (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.3 --- cdmipTransmitKey1 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.4 --- cdmipTransmitKey2 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.5 --- cdmipReceiveKey1 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.6 --- cdmipReceiveKey2 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.7 --- cdmipTransmitKey3 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.8 --- cdmipTransmitKey4 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.9 --- cdmipTransmitKey5 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.10 --- cdmipTransmitKey6 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.11 --- cdmipTransmitKey7 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.12 --- cdmipTransmitKey8 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.13 --- cdmipReceiveKey3 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.14 --- cdmipReceiveKey4 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.15 --- cdmipReceiveKey5 (DisplayString)
239
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.16 --- cdmipReceiveKey6 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.17 --- cdmipReceiveKey7 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.7.18 --- cdmipReceiveKey8 (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.8 --- cdmipSmtp 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.8.1 --- cdmipSmtpServerIpAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.8.2 --- cdmipSmtpDomain (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.8.3 --- cdmipSmtpDestinationName (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.9 --- cdmipSnmp 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.9.1 --- cdmipSnmpTrapDestinationIpAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.9.2 --- cdmipSnmpTrapCommunity (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.9.3 --- cdmipSnmpTrapVersion (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.9.4 --- cdmipSnmpAuthenticationFailureCommunity (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.9.5 --- cdmipSnmpAuthenticationFailureAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.10 --- cdmipModemPacketConfiguration (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.11 --- cdmipEasyconnectMulticastOption (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.12 --- cdmipHdrcompRefreshRateUdpRtp1 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.13 --- cdmipHdrcompRefreshRateUdp (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.14 --- cdmipHdrcompRefreshRateAllOther (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.2.15 --- cdmipPayloadCompRefreshRate (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3 --- cdmipInterfaces 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.1 --- cdmipEthernetInterface 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.1.1 --- cdmipEthernetMacAddress (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.1.2 --- cdmipEthernetSpeed (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.1.3 --- cdmipEthernetIpAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.1.4 --- cdmipEthernetSubnetPrefixLen (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.2 --- cdmipSatelliteInterface 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.2.5 --- cdmipSatelliteHdlcAddress1 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.2.6 --- cdmipSatelliteHdlcAddress2 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.2.7 --- cdmipSatelliteHdlcAddress3 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.2.8 --- cdmipSatelliteHdlcAddress4 (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.2.9 --- cdmipSatelliteHdlcAddressDelete (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.3.2.10 --- cdmipSatelliteHdlcAddressModeConfig (INTEGER)
240
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4 --- cdmipRouteTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.1 --- cdmipTransmitEncryptEnable (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3 --- cdmipIpRouteTable (SEQUENCE OF CdmIpRouteEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1 --- cdmipIpRouteEntry (CdmIpRouteEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.1 --- cdmipIpRouteIndex (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.2 --- cdmipIpRouteName (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.3 --- cdmipIpRouteDestAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.4 --- cdmipIpRouteDestMaskLen (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.5 --- cdmipIpRouteNextHopAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.6 --- cdmipIpRouteMulticastOptions (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.7 --- cdmipIpRouteState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.8 --- cdmipIPRouteHdlcAddress (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.9 --- cdmipIpRouteHdrComp (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.10 --- cdmipIpRoutePayloadComp (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.11 --- cdmipIpRoute3xDES (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.12 --- cdmipIPRouteDesKey (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.4.3.1.13 --- cdmipIPRouteRowStatus (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5 --- cdmipProtocols 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1 --- cdmipIgmpConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.1 --- cdmipIgmpTable (SEQUENCE OF CdmIpIgmpEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.1.1 --- cdmipIgmpEntry (CdmIpIgmpEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.1.1.1 --- cdmipIgmpIndex (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.1.1.2 --- cdmipIgmpTTL (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.1.1.3 --- cdmipIgmpClientState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.1.1.4 --- cdmipIgmpSrc (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.1.1.5 --- cdmipIgmpGroupIpAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.2 --- cdmipIgmpReceiver 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.2.1 --- cdmipIgmpEnable (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.2.2 --- cdmipIgmpQueryPeriod (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.2.3 --- cdmipIgmpMaxRespTime (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.2.4 --- cdmipIgmpMaxMissBeforeDrop (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.3 --- cdmipIgmpTransmiter
241
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.3.1 --- cdmipIgmpRecognizeQueries (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.3.2 --- cdmipIgmpVersionUnsolicitedReports (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.3.3 --- cdmipIgmpForceAlertOption (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.5.1.3.4 --- cdmipIgmpUnsolicitedReportInterval (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.6 --- cdmipRedundancy 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.6.1 --- cdmipCurrentRedundantState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.6.2 --- cdmipLocalUnitManagementIpAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.6.3 --- cdmipRedundantUnitManagementIpAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.6.4 --- cdmipRedundantTrafficIpAddress (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.6.5 --- cdmipRedundantTrafficSubnetMaskLen (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.6.6 --- cdmipForceUnitOffline (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7 --- cdmipOperMaint 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.1 --- cdmipAppVersion (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.2 --- cdmipSaveConfiguration (TrueFalse) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.3 --- cdmipReset (TrueFalse) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.4 --- cdmipRemotePortBConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.4.1 --- cdmipRemotePortBDeviceAddress (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.4.2 --- cdmipRemotePortBBaudRate (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.4.3 --- cdmipRemotePortBFormat (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.4.4 --- cdmipRemotePortBInterface (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.5 --- cdmipRestoreFactoryDefaults (TrueFalse) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.6 --- cdmipLoadParamsFromStorage (TrueFalse) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.7 --- cdmipBootImage (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.8 --- cdmipUpgradeSlot (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.9 --- cdmipParamConfig (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.10 --- cdmipUnitInformation 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.10.1 --- cdmipBootImageInfo (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.10.2 --- cdmipAppImage1Info (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.10.3 --- cdmipAppImage2Info (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.7.10.4 --- cdmipFramerVersion (Integer32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8 --- cdmipStatistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1 --- cdmipEthernetStatistics
242
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.1 --- cdmipEtherTransmitGoodFrames (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.2 --- cdmipEtherTransmitMaxCollisionCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.3 --- cdmipEtherTransmitLateCollisionCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.4 --- cdmipEtherTransmitDMAUnderrunCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.5 --- cdmipEtherTransmitLostCarrierSenseCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.6 --- cdmipEtherTransmitDeferredCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.7 --- cdmipEtherTransmitSingleCollisionCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.8 --- cdmipEtherTransmitMultipleCollisionCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.9 --- cdmipEtherTransmitTotalCollisionCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.10 --- cdmipEtherReceiveGoodFrames (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.11 --- cdmipEtherReceiveCRCErrorFrameCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.12 --- cdmipEtherReceiveAllignErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.13 --- cdmipEtherReceiveResourceErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.14 --- cdmipEtherReceiveFifoOverrunErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.15 --- cdmipEtherReceiveCollisionDetectErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.16 --- cdmipEtherReceiveShortFrameCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.17 --- cdmipEtherTransmitFlowControlPauseFrames (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.18 --- cdmipEtherReceiveFlowControlPauseFrames (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.1.19 --- cdmipEtherResetCounters (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3 --- cdmipIpRoutingStatistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.1 --- cdmipTotalIpPacketsFromSatellite (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.2 --- cdmipTotalIpPacketsRoutedToSatellite (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.3 --- cdmipTotalIpPacketsFromEthernet (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.4 --- cdmipTotalIpPacketsRoutedToEthernet (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.10 --- cdmipIgmpPacketsReceived (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.11 --- cdmipIpOptionPacketsReceived (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.12 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsTotal (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.13 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsTTLExpired (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.14 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsBadIpHeader (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.15 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsNoRoute (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.16 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsMulticastNoStoe (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.17 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsFiltered (Counter32)
243
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.18 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsMulticastDisableGroup (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.19 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsNoArpEntry (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.20 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsBadBufferLength (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.21 --- cdmipDroppedPacketsBadIpVersion (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.22 --- cdmipDroppedQoSFilterRule (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.3.26 --- cdmipResetCounters (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4 --- cdmipQoSStatistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1 --- cdmipQoSStatisticsTable (SEQUENCE OF CdmIpQoSStatisticsEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1 --- cdmipQoSStatisticsEntry (CdmIpQoSStatisticsEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.1 --- cdmipQoSStatsQueueIndex (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.2 --- cdmipQoSStatsSentPackets (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.3 --- cdmipQoSStatsSentPacketsPerSecond (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.4 --- cdmipQoSStatsSentBytes (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.5 --- cdmipQoSStatsDroppedPackets (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.6 --- cdmipQoSStatsDroppedBytes (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.7 --- cdmipQoSStatsCurrentTxRate (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.8 --- cdmipQoSStatsAverageTxRate (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.9 --- cdmipQoSStatsMaxTxRate (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.10 --- cdmipQoSStatsActiveFlows (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.4.1.1.11 --- cdmipQoSStatsResetCounters (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5 --- cdmipWanFpgaStatistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.1 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxBadAddrCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.2 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxPktProcessorCrcErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.3 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxAbortOctetErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.4 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxOverrunErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.5 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcCrcErrorCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.6 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcPayLoadCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.7 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcHeaderCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.8 --- cdmipWanFpgaRxHdlcPacketCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.9 --- cdmipWanFpgaTxHdlcHeaderCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.10 --- cdmipWanFpgaTxHdlcPayLoadCount (Counter32)
244
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.11 --- cdmipWanFpgaTxHdlcPacketCount (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.5.12 --- cdmipWanFpgaResetAllCounters (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6 --- cdmipCompressionStatistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1 --- cdmipCompressionStatisticsTable (SEQUENCE OF CdmipCompressionStatisticsEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1 --- cdmipCompressionStatisticsEntry (CdmipCompressionStatisticsEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.1 --- cdmipHdrcompStatsQueueIndex (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.2 --- cdmipHdrcompStatsPreHdrcompBytes (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.3 --- cdmipHdrcompStatsPostHdrcompBytes (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.4 --- cdmipHdrCompRatio (OCTET STRING) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.5 --- cdmipPayloadCompPrePayloadCompBytes (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.6 --- cdmipPayloadCompPostPayloadCompBytes (Counter32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.7 --- cdmipPayloadCompRatio (OCTET STRING) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.8.6.1.1.8 --- cdmipCompStatsResetCounters (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9 --- cdmipQoSRules 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.1 --- cdmipQoSFeature (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2 --- cdmipQoSRulesTable (SEQUENCE OF CdmIpQoSRulesEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1 --- cdmipQoSRulesEntry (CdmIpQoSRulesEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.1 --- cdmipQoSRulesIndex (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.2 --- cdmipQoSRulesSrcIpAddr (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.3 --- cdmipQoSRulesSrcIpMaskLen (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.4 --- cdmipQoSRulesDstIpAddr (IpAddress) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.5 --- cdmipQoSRulesDstIpMaskLen (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.6 --- cdmipQoSRulesProtocol (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.7 --- cdmipQoSRulesSrcPort (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.8 --- cdmipQoSRulesSrcPortMax (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.9 --- cdmipQoSRulesDstPortMin (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.10 --- cdmipQoSRulesDstPortMax (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.11 --- cdmipQoSRulesMinBw (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.12 --- cdmipQoSRulesMaxBw (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.13 --- cdmipQoSRulesPriority (INTEGER)
245
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.14 --- cdmipQoSRulesWred (EnableDisable) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.15 --- cdmipQoSRulesFilter (YesNo) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.2.1.16 --- cdmipQoSRulesRowStatus (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3 --- cdmipDiffServRulesTable (SEQUENCE OF cdmipDiffServRulesEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3.1 --- cdmipDiffServRulesEntry (cdmipDiffServRulesEntry) 1.3.6.1.4.4.6247.4.9.3.1.1 --- cdmipDiffServRulesIndex (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3.1.2 --- cdmipDiffServRulesClass (OCTET STRING) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3.1.3 --- cdmipDiffServRulesDscp (Integer32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3.1.4 --- cdmipDiffServRulesMinBw (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3.1.5 --- cdmipDiffServRulesMaxBw (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3.1.6 --- cdmipDiffServRulesPriority (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.3.1.9 --- cdmipDiffServRulesRowStatus (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.9.4 --- cdmipQosMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10 --- cdmipControllerConformance 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1 --- cdmipControllerGroups 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.1 --- cdmipAdministrationGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.2 --- cdmipInterfacesGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.3 --- cdmipRouteTableGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.4 --- cdmipProtocolsGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.5 --- cdmipRedundancyGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.6 --- cdmipOperMaintGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.7 --- cdmipStatisticsGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.1.8 --- cdmipQosRulesGroup 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.2 --- cdmipControllerCompliances 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.4.10.2.1 --- cdmipControllerCompliance
246
8.8
CDM-IP 550 MIB TREE
1 --- iso 1.3 --- org 1.3.6 --- dod 1.3.6.1 --- internet 1.3.6.1.4 --- private 1.3.6.1.4.1 --- enterprises 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247 --- comtech 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5 --- cdmip550 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1 --- cdmip550Objects 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1 --- cdmip550SystemInfo 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1.1 --- cdmip550EquipmentID (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1.2 --- cdmip550UnitSerialNumber (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1.3 --- cdmip550SoftwareRevision (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1.4 --- cdmip550DeviceTime (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1.5 --- cdmip550DeviceDate (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1.6 --- cdmip550CircuitID (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.1.7 --- cdmip550LocalRemoteState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2 --- cdmip550TxParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.1 --- cdmip550TxFrequency (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.2 --- cdmip550TxDataRate (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.3 --- cdmip550TxModType (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.4 --- cdmip550TxFECType (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.5 --- cdmip550TxFECCodeRate (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.6 --- cdmip550TxSpecInv (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.7 --- cdmip550TxScrambler (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.8 --- cdmip550TxClockSource (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.9 --- cdmip550TxPowerLevel (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.2.10 --- cdmip550TxCarrierState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3 --- cdmip550RxParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.1 --- cdmip550RxFrequency (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.2 --- cdmip550RxDataRate (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.3 --- cdmip550RxDemodType (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.4 --- cdmip550RxFECType (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.5 --- cdmip550RxFECCodeRate (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.6 --- cdmip550RxSpecInv (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.7 --- cdmip550RxDescrambler (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.8 --- cdmip550RxClockMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.9 --- cdmip550RxBufferSize (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.10 --- cdmip550RxAcqSweepRange (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.3.11 --- cdmip550RxEbnoAlarmPoint (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.4 --- cdmip550InterfaceParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.4.1 --- cdmip550IfImpedance (INTEGER)
247
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.4.2 --- cdmip550InterfaceType (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5 --- cdmip550UtilityParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.1 --- cdmip550UnitFramingMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.2 --- cdmip550EdmacAddress (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.3 --- cdmip550UnitTestMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.4 --- cdmip550RecenterBuffer (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.5 --- cdmip550ForceRedundantSwitch (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.6 --- cdmip550UnitAlarmMask (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.7 --- cdmip550UnitConfigStore (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.8 --- cdmip550UnitConfigLoad (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.5.9 --- cdmip550OduCommEnable (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.6 --- cdmip550AupcParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.6.1 --- cdmip550AupcEnable (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.6.2 --- cdmip550AupcControlParameters (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.6.3 --- cdmip550RemoteEbno (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.6.4 --- cdmip550TxPowerLevelIncrease (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7 --- cdmip550StatusParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.1 --- cdmip550RxEbno (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.2 --- cdmip550RxCoarseAGC (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.3 --- cdmip550RxFrequencyOffset (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.4 --- cdmip550BufferFillState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.5 --- cdmip550RxBER (Unsigned32) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.6 --- cdmip550RedundancyState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.7 --- cdmip550ModemUnitFaults (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.8 --- cdmip550ModemTxTrafficFaults (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.7.9 --- cdmip550ModemRxTrafficFaults (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8 --- cdmip550Logs 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8.1 --- cdmip550ClearEventsLog (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8.2 --- cdmip550NumberUnreadEvents (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8.3 --- cdmip550RetrieveNext5Events (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8.4 --- cdmip550SetStatisticInterval (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8.5 --- cdmip550ClearStatisticsLog (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8.6 --- cdmip550NumberUnreadStatistics (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.8.7 --- cdmip550RetrieveNext5Statistics (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9 --- cdmip550Notifications 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9.0 --- cdmip550NotificationsPrefix 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9.0.624751 --- cdmip550ModemUnitFaultsNotification 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9.0.624752 --- cdmip550ModemTxTrafficFaultsNotification 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.1.9.0.624753 --- cdmip550ModemRxTrafficFaultsNotification 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2 --- oduObjects 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.1 --- oduSelect (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.2 --- oduSystemInfo 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.2.1 --- oduModelNumberSoftwareVer (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.2.2 --- oduUnitSerialNumber (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.2.3 --- oduDeviceTime (DisplayString)
248
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.2.4 --- oduDeviceDate (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.2.5 --- oduCircuitID (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3 --- oduUnitParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.1 --- oduUnitMuteMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.2 --- oduUnitColdStart (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.3 --- oduUnitAutoFaultRecovery (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.4 --- oduUnitExtRefFaultLogic (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.5 --- oduUnitRefOscAdjust (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.6 --- oduUnitLNACurrentSource (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.7 --- oduUnitLNACurrentWindow (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.8 --- oduUnitLNAFaultLogic (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.9 --- oduUnitRedundancyMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.3.10 --- oduUnitRedForceSwitch (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4 --- oduTxParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4.1 --- oduTxFrequency (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4.2 --- oduTxAttenuation (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4.3 --- oduTxAmplifier (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4.4 --- oduTxMute (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4.5 --- oduTxSlopeMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4.6 --- oduTxSlopeValue (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.4.7 --- oduTxGainOffset (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.5 --- oduRxParameters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.5.1 --- oduRxFrequency (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.5.2 --- oduRxAttenuation (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.5.3 --- oduRxMute (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.5.4 --- oduRxSlopeMode (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.5.5 --- oduRxSlopeValue (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.5.6 --- oduRxGainOffset (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.6 --- oduUnitStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.6.1 --- oduOnlineState (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.6.2 --- oduMaintenanceParameters (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.6.3 --- oduUnitFaults (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.7 --- oduLogs 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.7.1 --- oduClearEventsLog (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.7.2 --- oduNumberUnreadEvents (INTEGER) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.7.3 --- oduRetrieveNext5Events (DisplayString) 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.8 --- oduNotifications 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.8.0 --- oduNotificationsPrefix 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.5.2.8.0.624754 --- oduUnitFaultsNotification
249
NOTES:
250
Forward Error Correction Options

Viterbi.................................. Sequential........................... TURBO Product Codec ...... Uncoded Operation............. 251 252 253 256
9.1
INTRODUCTION
As standard, the CDM-IP Modem is equipped with two Forward Error Correction Decoders, Viterbi and Sequential. The constraint lengths and encoding polynomials are compatible with the vast majority of existing modems from other manufacturers, and Comtech EF Data has performed compatibility testing to ensure inter-operability. As an option, the CDM-IP may be fitted with Comtech EF Datas Turbo Product Codec, which is an entirely stand-alone method of FEC. This option is a small daughter card, and may be fitted at the factory at the time of order, or may be added by the user at a later date.
9.2
VITERBI
The combination of convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding has become an almost universal standard for satellite communications. The CDM-IP complies with the Intelsat IESS 308/309 standards for Viterbi decoding with a constraint length of seven. This is a de facto standard, even in a closed network environment, which means almost guaranteed inter-operability with other manufacturers equipment. It provides very useful levels of coding gain, and its short decoding delay and error-burst characteristics make it particularly suitable for low data rate coded voice applications. It has a short constraint length, fixed at 7, for all code rates. (The constraint length is defined as the number of output symbols from the encoder which are affected by a single input bit.)
251
A choice of coding rates (Rate 1/2, 3/4 or 7/8) allows the user to trade off coding gain for bandwidth expansion. Rate 1/2 coding gives the best improvement in error rate, but doubles the transmitted data rate, and hence doubles the occupied bandwidth of the signal. Rate 7/8 coding, at the other extreme, provides the most modest improvement in performance, but only expands the transmitted bandwidth by 14%. A major advantage of the Viterbi decoding method is that the performance is independent of data rate, and does not display a pronounced threshold effect (i.e., does not fail rapidly below a certain value of Eb/No). This is not true of the Sequential decoding method, as explained in the section below. Note that in BPSK mode, the CDM-IP only permits a coding rate of 1/2. Because of the method of convolutional coding used with Viterbi, the encoder does not preserve the original data intact, and is called non-systematic.
Table 52. Viterbi Decoding Summary For
Good BER performance - very useful coding gain. Almost universally used, with de facto standards for constraint length and coding polynomials. Shortest decoding delay (~100 bits) of any FEC scheme - good for coded voice. Short constraint length produces small error bursts good for coded voice. No pronounced threshold effect - fails gracefully. Coding gain independent of data rate.
Against
Higher coding gain possible with Sequential.
9.3
SEQUENTIAL
Although the method of convolutional coding and Sequential decoding appear to be very similar to the Viterbi method, there are some fundamental differences. The convolutional encoder is said to be systematic, it does not alter the input data, and the FEC overhead bits are simply appended to the data. The constraint length, k, is much longer (Rate 1/2, k=36; Rate 3/4, k= 63; Rate 7/8, k=87). This means that when the decoding process fails (that is, when its capacity to correct errors is exceeded) it produces a burst of errors in multiples of half the constraint length. An error distribution is produced which is markedly different from a Viterbi decoder. This gives rise to a pronounced threshold effect. A reduction in Eb/No of just a few tenths of a dB can make the difference between acceptable BER and a complete loss of synchronization. The decoding algorithm itself (called the Fano algorithm) uses significantly more path memory (4 kbits in this case) than the equivalent Viterbi decoder, giving rise to increased latency.
252
A fixed computational clock is used to process input symbols, and to search backwards and forwards in time to determine the correct decoding path. At lower data rates there are sufficient numbers of computational cycles per input symbol to permit the decoding process to perform optimally. However, as the data rate increases, there are fewer cycles available, leading to a reduction in coding gain. This is clearly illustrated in the following performance curves. For data rates above ~1 Mbps, Viterbi should be considered the better alternative.
Table 53. Sequential Decoding Summary FOR Higher coding gain (1 -2 dB) at lower data rates, compared to Viterbi. AGAINST Pronounced threshold effect - does not fail gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions. Higher processing delay than Viterbi (~4 k bits) - not good for low-rate coded voice. Coding gain varies with data rate - favors lower data rates.
9.4
TURBO PRODUCT CODEC (OPTION)

Turbo coding is an FEC technique developed within the last few years, which delivers significant performance improvements compared to more traditional techniques. Unlike the popular method of concatenating a Reed-Solomon codec with a primary FEC codec, Turbo Coding is an entirely stand-alone method. It does not require the complex interleaving/de-interleaving of the R-S approach, and consequently, decoding delays are significantly reduced. Two general classes of Turbo Codes have been developed, Turbo Convolutional Codes (TCC), and Turbo Product Codes (TPC, a block coding technique). TCC suffers from an irreducible BER of approximately 1 x 10-7, and consequently, a Reed-Solomon codec has to be added in order to achieve an acceptably low BER. For delay-sensitive applications this may be unacceptable, and the implementation complexity of the TCC approach is high. For these reasons Comtech EF Data has chosen to implement an FEC codec based on TPC. A Turbo Product Code is a 2 or 3 dimensional array of block codes. Encoding is relatively straightforward, but decoding is a very complex process requiring multiple iterations of processing for maximum performance to be achieved.
253
When Comtech EF Data first introduced the Turbo Coding option in the CDM-IP, only Rate 3/4 QPSK was offered. This is an excellent choice for applications where maximum bandwidth efficiency is desired, in combination with high coding gain. However, with Firmware Version 1.15 (and later) Comtech EF Data has introduced two further code rates - Rate 21/44 BPSK (very close to Rate 1/2) and Rate 5/16 BPSK (very close to Rate 1/3). These two rates were developed to address an entirely different case, namely that of transmission from very small antennas, with limited transmitter power. For a dish antenna, the gain is directly proportional to its area, and the lower the gain, the less directional the antenna becomes. Thus, in satellite transmission, even though the dish may be perfectly pointed at the desired satellite, if the beamwidth is wide enough, adjacent satellites in the orbital arc will also be illuminated. This is a potential source of interference, and for this reason the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) places strict limits on the power spectral density (also referred to as flux density) of signals arriving at adjacent satellites. One obvious method to reduce the level is to spread the transmitted signal over as wide a bandwidth as possible. In the past, this has sometimes been achieved using a Spread Spectrum modulation format, but this has severe penalties as far as demodulator complexity is concerned. However, by using BPSK modulation, and high FEC code rates (up to Rate 1/3, for example) the power spectral density may be reduced. Taking Rate 1/2 QPSK as a baseline, moving to Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo Product Coding gives an immediate reduction in power spectral density of 5.0 dB. The increased coding gain of this FEC method allows a further reduction in transmitter power. Using Rate 1/2 Viterbi with concatenated Reed-Solomon as a baseline example, Rate 5/16 provides 1.5 - 2.0 dB improvement in coding gain. Putting these two factors together yields an overall reduction in power spectral density of approximately 7.0 dB. This simultaneously permits a smaller antenna, and reduced transmitter power. The disadvantage is the increased spectral occupancy of the carrier, and it will depend on the particular satellite user to determine if this poses a severe economic problem. When operating at these higher code rates (21/44 and 5/16), the demodulator is forced to operate in a region where the Ebt/No (also referred to as Es/No) is negative; in other words, there is more noise than signal. For this reason it is more difficult for the demodulator to accurately measure the Eb/No, and so users may see more variation than normal when viewing the Eb/No on the RX PARAMETERS screen, and when operating near threshold. This is most pronounced in the case of Rate 5/16. One unexpected advantage of the Turbo Product Coding method is that, unlike concatenated Reed-Solomon methods, there is no pronounced threshold effect. The demodulator and FEC codec can stay locked down to very low values of Eb/No, but at this level the output BER becomes unusable (around 1 x 10-2). In many cases, FEC methods which provide increased coding gain do so at the expense of increased processing delay. However, with TPC, this increase in delay is very modest. The table below shows, for the CDM-IP, the processing delays for the major FEC types, including the three TPC modes:
254
FEC Mode (64 kbps data rate) Viterbi, Rate 1/2 Sequential, Rate 1/2 Turbo Product Coding, Rate 3/4, QPSK Turbo Product Coding, Rate 21/44, BPSK Turbo Product Coding, Rate 5/16, BPSK
End-to-end delay, ms 12 74 79 64 48
Note:
In all cases, the delay is inversely proportional to data rate, so for 128 kbps, the delay values would be half of those shown above.
It can be clearly seen that the concatenated Reed-Solomon cases increase the delay very significantly (due mainly to interleaving/de-interleaving), while the TPC cases yield delays which are less than or equal to Sequential decoding.
FOR Exceptionally good BER performance - significant improvement compared with every other FEC method in use today No pronounced threshold effect - fails gracefully Exceptional bandwidth efficiency for Rate 3/4 QPSK - 40% less than Viterbi and concatenated ReedSolomon Coding gain independent of data rate (in this implementation) Low decoding delay Easy field upgrade in CDM-IP AGAINST Nothing!
255
9.5
UNCODED OPERATION (NO FEC)

COMTECH EF DATA CANNOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR INCORRECT OPERATION IF THE USER DOES NOT ADHERE TO THESE GUIDELINES WHEN USING UNCODED OPERATION.
IMPORTANT
There are occasions where a user may wish to operate a satellite link with no forward error correction of any kind. For this reason, the CDM-IP offers this uncoded mode for all three modulation types - BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK. However, the user should be aware of some of the implications of using this approach. PSK demodulators have two inherent undesirable features. The first of these is known as phase ambiguity, and is due to the fact the demodulator does not have any absolute phase reference, and in the process of carrier recovery, the demodulator can lock up in any of K phase states, where K = 2 for BPSK, K = 4 for QPSK/OQPSK. Without the ability to resolve these ambiguous states there would be a 1-in-2 chance that the data at the output of the demodulator would be wrong, in the case of BPSK. For QPSK, the probability would be 3-in-4. The problem is solved in the case of BPSK by differentially encoding the data prior to transmission, and then performing the inverse decoding process. This is a very simple process, but has the disadvantage that it doubles the receive BER. For every bit error the demodulator produces, the differential decoder produces two. The problem for QPSK is more complex, as there are 4 possible lock states, leading to 4 ambiguities. When FEC is employed, the lock state of the FEC decoder can be used to resolve two of the four ambiguities, and the remaining two can be resolved using serial differential encoding/decoding. However, when no FEC is being used, another scheme entirely must be used. Therefore, in QPSK, a parallel differential encoding/decoding technique is used, but has the disadvantage that it again doubles the receive BER. OQPSK is a different situation again, where the ambiguities result not only from not having an absolute phase reference, but also not knowing which of the two parallel paths in the demod, I or Q, contains the half-symbol delay. Another type of differential encoding is used, but yet again the error rate is doubled, compared to ideal.
Note: Whenever uncoded operation is selected, the modem automatically uses the differential encoder/decoder appropriate for the modulation type. It cannot be disabled.
The second problem inherent in PSK demodulators is that of data false locking.
256
In order to accomplish the task of carrier recovery, the demodulator must use a non-linear process. A second-order non-linearity is used for BPSK, and a fourth-order non-linearity is used for QPSK. When data at a certain symbol rate is used to modulate the carrier, the demodulator can lock at incorrect frequencies, spaced at intervals of one-quarter of the symbol rate away from the carrier. Fortunately, when FEC decoding is used, the decoder synchronization state can be used to verify the correct lock point has been achieved, and to reject the false locks. If uncoded operation is used, there is no way to recognize a data false lock. The demodulator will indicate that it is correctly locked, but the data out will not be correct. Comtech EF Data strongly cautions users when using uncoded operation. If the acquisition sweep width exceeds one quarter of the symbol rate, there is a very high probability that the demodulator will false lock.
CAUTION
As an example, if 64 kbps QPSK, uncoded is used, the symbol rate will be half of this rate, or 32 ksps. One quarter of this equals 8 kHz. Therefore, the absolute maximum acquisition sweep range which should be considered is +/- 8 kHz. If there is any frequency uncertainty on the incoming carrier, this should be subtracted from the sweep width. The problem becomes progressively better with increasing symbol rate.
257
Eb/No in dB 1 1E-1 Uncoded BPSK/QPSK 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-2
Typical Performance 1E-3
Viterbi Decoding
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
Specification limit, Rate 7/8 Coding
1E-8 Specification limit Rate 1/2 Coding 1E-9 BER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Specification limit, Rate 3/4 Coding 10 11 12
Figure 14. Viterbi Decoding

258
1E-2
Sequential Decoding 64 kbps

Typical Performance
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8 Specification limit Rate 1/2 Coding 1E-9 BER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Specification limit, Rate 3/4 Coding 9 10 11 12
Figure 15. Sequential Decoding 64 kbps
259
1E-2

Typical Performance
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8 Specification limit Rate 1/2 Coding 1E-9 BER Specification limit, Rate 3/4 Coding 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
260
1E-2
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6 Typical performance, Rate 7/8 Coding 1E-7
1E-8 Typical performance, Rate 1/2 Coding 1E-9 BER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Typical performance, Rate 3/4 Coding 9 10 11 12
261
Eb/No in dB
1 1E-1
10
11
12
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
1E-2 Specification limit - Rate 21/44 BPSK 1E-3 Specification limit - Rate 5/16 BPSK 1E-4
Specification limit - Rate 3/4 QPSK
CEFD Turbo Product Codec Rate 3/4 QPSK Rate 21/44 BPSK Rate 5/16 BPSK
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7 Typical performance is approximately 0.3 dB better than shown 1E-8
1E-9 BER
10
11
12
Figure 18. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec

262
Eb/No in dB
1 1E-1
10
11
12
1E-2
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
Differential Encoding No FEC
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9 BER
10
11
12
Figure 19. Differential Encoding No FEC

263
NOTES:
264
10
EDMAC CHANNEL
Theory Of Operation ......... M&C Connection ............... Setup Summary ................ 265 267 268
10.1
THEORY OF OPERATION
As explained earlier, EDMAC is an acronym for Embedded Distant-end Monitor And Control. This is a feature which permits the user to access the M&C features of modems which are at the distant-end of a satellite link. This is accomplished by adding extra information to the users data, but in a manner which is completely transparent to the user.
10.1.1 ON THE TRANSMIT SIDE

The data is split into frames - each frame containing 1008 bits (except Rate 21/44 BPSK Turbo, where the frame length is 2928 bits, and Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo where the frame length is 3072 bits). Forty-eight bits in each frame are overhead, and the rest of these bits are the users data. This increases the rate of transmission by 5% (approximately 1.6% for the Turbo BPSK cases). For example, if the users data rate is 64 kbps, the actual transmission rate will now be at 67.2 kbps. At the start of each frame a 12 bit synchronization word is added. This allows the demodulator to find and lock to the start of frame. At regular intervals throughout the frame, additional data bytes and flag bits are added (a further 36 bits in total). It is these additional bytes which convey the M&C data. When framing is used, the normal V.35 scrambler is no longer used. This V.35 approach is called self synchronizing, because in the receiver, no external information is required in order for the de-scrambling process to recover the original data. The disadvantage of this method is that it multiplies errors. On average, if one bit error is present at the input of the descrambler, 3 output errors are generated. There is an alternative when the data is in a framed format. In this case, a different class of scrambler may be used - one which uses the start of frame information to start the scrambling process at an exact known state. In the receiver, having synchronized to the frame, the de-scrambler can begin its processing at exactly the right time. This method does not multiply errors, and therefore has a clear advantage over V.35 scrambling.
265
Adding the extra 5% to the transmitted data rate, the effective Eb/No seen by the user will degrade by a factor of 10log(1.05), or 0.21 dB (0.07dB in the case of the two BPSK Turbo rates). The use of an externally synchronized scrambler and descrambler almost exactly compensates for this degradation. The net effect is that the user will see effectively identical BER performance whether framing is used or not.
10.1.2 ON THE RECEIVE SIDE

When the demodulator locks to the incoming carrier, it must go through the additional step of searching for, and locking to the synchronization word. This uniquely identifies the start of frame, and permits the extraction of the overhead bytes and flag bits at the correct position within the frame. In addition, the start of frame permits the de-scrambler to correctly recover the data. The users data is extracted, and sent through additional processing, in the normal manner. The extracted overhead bytes are examined to determine if they contain valid M&C bytes.
266
10.2
M&C CONNECTION
Data to be transmitted to the distant-end is sent to a local unit via the remote control port. A message for the distant-end is indistinguishable from a local message - it has the same structure and content, only the address will identify it as being for a distant-end unit. Before the M&C data can be successfully transmitted and received, pairs of units must be split into EDMAC Masters and EDMAC Slaves. Masters are local to the M&C Computer, and Slaves are distant-end. Now, a unit which has been designated an EDMAC master not only responds to its own unique bus address, but it will also be configured to listen for the address which corresponds to its EDMAC Slave. When a complete message packet has been received by the EDMAC Master, it will begin to transmit this packet over the satellite channel, using the overhead bytes which become available.
Note: The normal protocol for the message packet is not used over the satellite path, as it is subject to errors. For this reason, a much more robust protocol is used which incorporates extensive error checking.
At the distant-end, the EDMAC slave, configured for the correct address, receives these bytes, and when a complete packet has been received, it will take the action requested, and then send the appropriate response to the EDMAC Master, using the return overhead path on the satellite link. The EDMAC Master assembles the complete packet, and transmits the response back to the M&C Computer. Apart from the round-trip satellite delay, the M&C Computer does not see any difference between local and distant-end units. It sends out a packet, addressed to a particular unit, and gets back a response. It can be seen that the EDMAC Master simply acts as forwarding service, in a manner which is completely transparent. This approach does not require any additional cabling. Connection is made using the normal M&C remote port. Furthermore, the user does not have to worry about configuring the baud rate of the M&C connection to match the lowest data rate modem in the system. The M&C system can have mixed data-rate modems, from 2.4 kbps to 2.048 Mbps, and still run at speeds in excess of 19,200 baud. It should be pointed out that at 2.4 kbps, the effective throughput of the overhead channel is only 11 async characters/second. For a message of 24 bytes, the time between sending a poll request and receiving a response will be around 5 seconds.
Note: When either of the BPSK Turbo rates are in use, the overhead rate is reduced by a factor of three, and therefore the response time will be around 15 seconds.
267
10.3
SETUP SUMMARY
To access a distant-end unit: Designate a Master/Slave pair - Master at the local-end, Slave at the distant-end. On the local-end unit, enable framing, and EDMAC, define the unit as MASTER, then enter the bus address of the SLAVE. This is constrained to be base 10' meaning that only addresses such as 10, 20, 30, 40, etc., are allowed. Choose a unique bus address for the distant-end. This should normally be set to the base 10' address + 1. For example, if the MASTER unit is set to 30, choose 31 for the distantend unit. On the distant-end unit, enable framing, and EDMAC, define the unit as SLAVE, then enter the bus address. The orange EDMAC Mode LED should be illuminated. Set the local-end unit to RS485 remote control, and set the bus address of this local unit. The orange Remote Mode LED should be illuminated. Once the satellite link has been established, connect the M&C Computer, and begin communications, with both the local and distant end units.
NOTE: EDMAC modes are fully compatible with AUPC modes.
268
NOTES:
269
11
11.1
Eb/No Measurement
MEASURING Eb/No
Although the CDM-IP calculates and displays the value of receive Eb/No on the front panel of the unit, it is sometimes useful to measure the value using a spectrum analyzer, if one is available.
Figure 20. Eb/No Measurement
The idea is to accurately measure the value of (C+N)/N, (Carrier + Noise/Noise) and this is accomplished by tuning the center frequency of the Spectrum analyzer to the signal of interest, and measuring the difference between the peak spectral density of the signal (the flat part of the spectrum shown) and the noise density. To make this measurement, use a vertical scale of 1 or 2 dB/division, and use video filtering and/or video averaging to reduce the variance in the displayed sweep to a low enough level that the difference can be measured to within 0.2dB. Use this value of (C+N)/N in the table on the following page to determine the Eb/No. You will need to know the operating mode to read from the appropriate column. In the diagram above, the (C+N)/N measured is 4.6 dB. If Rate 1/2 QPSK is being used, this would correspond to an Eb/No of approximately 2.6 dB.
271
(C+N)/N 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0
Eb/No Uncoded BPSK 0.0 0.9 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.3 7.8 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.1 10.6 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9
Eb/No Rate 1/2 BPSK 3.0 3.9 4.8 5.6 6.3 7.1 7.7 8.4 9.0 9.6 10.3 10.8 11.4 12.0 12.5 13.1 13.6 14.2 14.7 15.2 15.8 16.3 16.8 17.3 17.9 18.4 18.9 19.4 19.9 20.4 20.9
Eb/No Uncoded QPSK 0.3 1.1 1.7 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.3 4.8 5.4 6.0 6.5 7.1 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.2 9.8 10.3 10.8 11.3 11.9 12.4 12.9 13.4 13.9 14.4 14.9
Eb/No Rate 1/2 QPSK 0.0 0.9 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.4 6.0 6.6 7.3 7.8 8.4 9.0 9.5 10.1 10.6 11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8 13.3 13.8 14.3 14.9 15.4 15.9 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.9
Eb/No Rate 3/4 QPSK 0.0 0.8 1.5 2.3 2.9 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.5 6.0 6.6 7.2 7.7 8.3 8.8 9.4 9.9 10.4 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.1 13.6 14.1 14.6 15.1 15.6 16.1
Eb/No Rate 7/8 QPSK 0.1 0.8 1.6 2.2 2.9 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.3 5.9 6.5 7.0 7.6 8.1 8.7 9.2 9.7 10.3 10.8 11.3 11.8 12.4 12.9 13.4 13.9 14.4 14.9 15.4
Notes:
1 2 3
OQPSK values are the same as QPSK. In framed (EDMAC) modes, no R-S, add 0.2 dB to the values of Eb/No shown. Consult Factory for information on Rate 21/44 and Rate 5/16 Turbo BPS.
272
NOTES:
273
12
Connector Pinouts
Data Connector ............................ Alarms Connector......................... Remote Control Connector........... Auxiliary Serial Connector ............ 275 276 277 277
12.1
Pin 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 23 24
DATA CONNECTOR - 25 PIN D TYPE FEMALE

Table 54. Data Connector - 25 Pin D Type Female Generic Signal Description Shield Transmit Data A Receive Data A Signal Ground Receiver Ready A Receive Clock B Receiver Ready B Transmit Clock B Internal Transmit Clock B Transmit Data B Internal Transmit Clock A Receive Data B Receive Clock A External Carrier Off (EIA-232 1' or TTL low ) Transmit Clock A Notes: 1 2 3 4 Direction DTE to Modem Modem to DTE Modem to DTE Modem to DTE Modem to DTE DTE to Modem Modem to DTE DTE to Modem Modem to DTE Modem to DTE Modem to DTE DTE to Modem DTE to Modem EIA-422/ EIA-530 Shield SD A RD A SG RR A RT B RR B TT B ST B SD B ST A RD B RT A TT A V.35 FG SD A RD A SG RLSD * SCR B SCTE B SCT B SD B SCT A RD B SCR A SCTE A EIA-232 AN BA BB AB CF DB DD DA Circuit No 101 103 104 102 109 115 109 113 114 103 114 104 115 113
Receiver ready is an EIA-232-level control signal on a V.35 interface. DO NOT connect signals to pins which are not shown - these pins are reserved for use by the redundancy system. B signal lines are not used for EIA-232 applications. For X.21 operation, use the EIA-422 pins, but ignore Receive Clock if the Modem is DTE, and ignore Transmit clocks if the Modem is DCE.
275
12.2
ALARMS CONNECTOR - 15 PIN D TYPE MALE

Table 55. Alarms Connector - 15 Pin D Type Male Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: Description Ground Receive AGC voltage Receive Q sample (for constellation display) Unit Fault Relay Common Unit Fault Relay Normally Open Transmit Traffic Relay - Normally Closed Receive Traffic Relay - Common Receive Traffic Relay - Normally Open External Carrier Off input ---- No Connection ---Receive I sample (for constellation display) Unit Fault Relay Normally Closed Transmit Traffic Relay Common Transmit Traffic Relay - Normally Open Receive Traffic Relay - Normally Closed
Normally Open refers to the NON-FAIL state.
276
12.3
REMOTE CONTROL CONNECTOR - 9 PIN D TYPE MALE

Table 56. Remote Control Connector - 9 Pin D Type Male Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description
Ground EIA-232 Transmit Data (Out) EIA-232 Receive Data (In)
Reserved - do not connect to this pin Ground EIA-485 Receive Data B EIA-485 Receive Data A (In) (In)
EIA-485 Transmit Data B (Out) EIA-485 Transmit Data A (Out)
12.4
AUXILIARY SERIAL CONNECTOR HE1402 3 PIN HEADER

Table 57. Auxiliary Serial Connector - He1402 3 Pin Header Pin 1 2 3 Description EIA-232 Transmit Data Ground EIA-232 Receive Data
277
12.5
ASYNC-SERIAL CONSOLE
The Console Connector is a RJ11-6 modular jack located on the rear panel. The AsyncSerial Console interfaces the IP Telnet Configuration Port. This interface is a EIA-232 DCE interface.
Table 58. Async-Serial Console RJ11-6 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Function Ground Rx Tx Ground Not used Not used
12.6
ETHERNET INTERFACE CONNECTOR

The 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector is a RJ45-8 modular jack located on the rear panel. This interface is used for data traffic and M & C. This interface is a Network Interface Card (NIC) pinout.
Table 59. Ethernet Interface RJ45-8 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Tx+ TxRx+ N/C N/C RxN/C N/C
278
NOTES:
279
13
Quick-Start Guide
Introduction................................................ easyConnect Point-to-Point System Configuration Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration ............................................. Troubleshooting IP Module ....................... 281 284 286 290
13.1
INTRODUCTION
This quick start guide will allow a user to configure a pair of CDM-IP 550s or CDM-IP 300Ls (referred to as CDM-IP in rest of the document) from beginning (i.e., starting from factory default settings) and be able to pass traffic within minutes. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the configuration of the base satellite modem.
13.1.1 EQUIPMENT LIST

Following equipment is required:
Item 1 Equipment CDM-IP Modem Quantity 2 Comments Can be CDM-IP 550 or CDM-IP 300L Note: CDM-IP 550 can be used with a CDM-IP 300L, but customer will need to provide equipment to convert 70 MHz IF to L-band for a duplex connection. Provided by customer Note: Only 10BaseT operation is supported in easyConnect mode. RJ-45 crossover Ethernet cables can be substituted to directly connect PC to CDM-IP modem without the use of a hub. Provided by customer Supplied by Comtech EF Data Provided by customer Provided by customer (To interconnect TX-RX between both CDM-IP modems.)
10/100 BaseT Ethernet Hub
3 4 5 6
PC with NIC and a terminal emulation program Console cable (DB-9 to RJ-11) Ethernet cables (CAT 5) IF cables
2 1 4 2
281
13.1.2 EQUIPMENT SETUP

Step 1 2 3 4 Description Connect each CDM-IP to the PC via the Ethernet Hub. Connect the TX IF on CDM-IP 1 to RX IF of CDM-IP 2 and vice-versa. Connect the DB-9 end of the console cable to the COM1 or COM2 port of the PC and the RJ-11 end to the console port at the back of CDM-IP 1. Connect CDM-IP 1 and CDM-IP 2 to suitable power supply and turn them ON.
13.1.3 TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE IF CONFIGURATION

Step 1 Description Configure the transmit and receive IF parameters on CDM-IP 1 and CDM-IP 2 via the front panel. Note: 2 3 The IF parameters can also be set via console menu, Telnet, web interface and SNMP - but for this exercise, it is recommended that the front panel be used.
Set the TxPower to minimum level. Before proceeding to next step, make sure that each CDM-IP is appropriately carrierlocked to the other CDM-IP.
13.1.4 SERIAL CONSOLE PORT COMMAND LINE INTERFACE (CLI) CONFIGURATION

Step 1 2 Description Launch the terminal emulation program - such as HyperTerminal on Microsoft Windows. Select the appropriate COM port (to which the DB-9 end of the console cable is connected) and configure it for: 38,400 bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit no hardware flow control 3 Press return to bring up the Main menu.
282
13.1.5 MAIN MENU
Figure 21. Main Menu To use the Command Line Interface (CLI), select the appropriate sub-menu or the entry by pressing the character indicated at the right. Enter x to return to the previous menu.
Note: Any CDM-IP configuration changes need to be saved to permanent storage by selecting [S] from any menu screen and then typing [y] to save.
13.1.6 RESTORING FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION

The following sections in this guide assume that the CDM-IP is still in factory default configuration for IP. If that is not the case, the factory default configuration can be restored from the menu:
Step 1 2 3 4 Description From the Main Menu, select Operations and Maintenance sub-menu [O]. From the Operations and Maintenance menu, select Database Operations sub-menu [D]. From the Database Operations menu, select Restore Factory Default option [R]. Confirm when prompted by typing yes when the following prompt is displayed; Are you sure you want to restore factory default settings? WARNING: Choosing Yes will restore factory defaults and then reboot.
This will erase any user configuration and restore the CDM-IP to factory default configuration. Proceed to Section 13.2 to perform the easyConnect Mode configuration or to Section 13.3 to perform the Router Mode configuration.
283
13.2
easyConnect POINT-TO-POINT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

The steps in this guide will lead to the following configuration:
Ethernet Interface (fei0) IP Address: 172.16.10.1 Mask: 255.255.255.0 Ethernet Interface (fei0) IP Address: 172.16.10.2 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Satellite IP Modem (CDM-IP 1)
RF or IF
IP Address: 172.16.10.11 Mask: 255.255.255.0 IP Address: 172.16.10.12 Mask: 255.255.255.0
10 BaseT Ethernet Hub
PC 1
PC 2
10 BaseT Ethernet Hub
Figure 22. easyConnect Point-to-Point System Configuration
13.2.1 PC CONFIGURATION
Step 1 2 3 Description Set the IP address on PC 1 to 172.16.10.11, mask to 255.255.255.0. Set the IP address on PC 2 to 172.16.10.12, mask to 255.255.255.0. Reboot the PCs (if required).
13.2.2 CDM-IP CONFIGURATION

After restoring the factory default settings, the CDM-IP will be in easyConnect Mode, which will automatically put the CDM-IP in 10BaseT Half Duplex. Select Interface Configuration\Ethernet Interface(fei0) to verify the Speed Mode is 10 baseT Half Duplex. If desired 10BaseT Full Duplex can be selected, but the CDM-IP will not allow Auto Speed Mode or 100 BaseT when in easyConnect. The CDM-IP will also be in Point-to Point HDLC Addressing Mode. HDLC addresses are used to identify remote satellite interfaces when there are more than two CDM-IP modems sending and receiving traffic. In Point-to-Point Mode, there is no need to define any HDLC addresses since all of the traffic will be to and from a single remote CDM-IP.
284
13.2.3 SETTING IP ADDRESS(ES)

Step 1 2 3 Description From the Main Menu select Interface Configuration sub-menu [I]. From the Interface Configuration Menu select Ethernet Interface (fei0) sub-menu [E]. Set IP Address [I]. CDM-IP 1 to 172.16.10.1 CDM-IP 2 to 172.16.10.2 Set Subnet Prefix Length [M] to 24
The other parameters can be left to their factory default settings. At this point the basic configuration is over and you should be able to:
5 From PC1 Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 1) Ping 172.16.10.2 (CDM-IP 2) Ping 172.16.10.12 (PC 2) From PC2 Ping 172.16.10.2 (CDM-IP 2) Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 1) Ping 172.16.10.11 (PC 1)
IMPORTANT
Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or satellite link) on a CDM-IP modem operating in easyConnect when connected to a LAN. In this configuration, easyConnect will resend all layer 2 broadcast packets and cause a broadcast storm on the LAN. To perform a loop test to verify the modem or satellite link, do one of the following: (CDM-IP 550 Only) Reconfigure the CDM-IP 550 to CDM 550 Emulation Mode by selecting Configuration/Interface and then selecting EIA-422/530, V.35, or EIA-232. Set the CDM-IP modem to Router Mode.
285
13.3
ROUTER MODE POINT-TO-POINT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

The steps in this guide will lead to the following configuration:
Ethernet Interface (fei0) IP Address: 172.17.10.1 Mask: 255.255.255.0 Route Table Next Hop 0x02 Type To Sat IP Destination 172.16.10.0/24 Route Table Next Hop 0x01 Type To Sat
Ethernet Interface (fei0) IP Address: 172.16.10.1 Mask: 255.255.255.0 IP Destination 172.17.10.0/24
RX HDLC Address 0x01
RX HDLC Address 0x02
RF or IF
IP Address: 172.16.10.11 Mask: 255.255.255.0 GW: 172.16.10.1 IP Address: 172.17.10.11 Mask: 255.255.255.0 GW: 172.17.10.1
PC 1
PC 2
Figure 23. Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration
13.3.1 PC CONFIGURATION
Step 1 2 Description Set the IP address on PC 1 to 172.16.10.11, mask to 255.255.255.0. Set PC Gateway to 172.16.10.1 Set the IP address on PC 2 to 172.17.10.11, mask to 255.255.255.0. Set PC Gateway to 172.17.10.1 Reboot the PCs (if required).
13.3.2 SETTING CDM-IP MODEMS TO ROUTER MODE OPERATION

Perform the following steps on CDM-IP 1
Step 1 2 3 Description From the Main Menu, select Administration [A] sub-menu. From the Administration menu, select CDM-IP Working Mode [C]. Confirm when prompted by typing y when the following prompt is displayed: Changing Modem working mode requires system Reboot. Do you want to continue(Y/N)[Enter :No] Select [1] for Router Mode. Allow CDM-IP to reboot. After reboot, select Interface Configuration [I] from the Main Menu. From the Interface Configuration menu, select Satellite/HDLC Interface (hdl0) [H]. From the Satellite/HDLC Interface (hdl0) menu, select HDLC Addr Mode [M].
286
4 5 6
Confirm when prompted by typing y when the following prompt is displayed: Changing HDLC address mode causes system Reboot. Do you want to continue(Y/N)[Enter :No] Select [1] for Small Network Mode. Allow CDM-IP to reboot. After reboot, select Interface Configuration [I] from the Main Menu. From the Interface Configuration menu, select Receive HDLC Channel Addresses [H]. From the Receive HDLC Channel Addresses menu, select [1] for HDLC Addr 1. The following prompt will be displayed: Please enter a value for the HDLC Addr 1 Press ESC to abort HDLC address [SMALL NETWORK] in hex <0x1 - 0xFE, enter = 0001>: Enter [2] to set HDLC Addr 1 to 0x01. Note: HDLC Addr 1 will display as 0x0001, although only the last 2 digits are used in Small Network Mode, allowing up to 254 separate HDLC addresses.
8 9 10
11
Repeat Steps 1 - 9 on CDM-IP 2. Also, repeat Step 10, but set HDLC Addr 1 to 0x02.
Both CDM-IP modems are now in Router/Small Network Mode, which means that the CDM-IP modems will be on independent IP subnets and will require adding static routes to pass traffic between them. Section 13.3.4, Route Table, explains this procedure.
13.3.3 SETTING IP ADDRESS(ES)

Step 1 2 3 Description From the Main Menu select Interface Configuration sub-menu [I]. From the Interface Configuration Menu select Ethernet Interface (fei0) sub-menu [E]. Set IP Address [I]. CDM-IP 1 to 172.16.10.1 CDM-IP 2 to 172.17.10.1 Set Subnet Prefix Length [M] to 24.
287
13.3.4 ROUTE TABLE

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 Description From Main Menu, select Route Table [R]sub-menu. Enter 1 to configure the first route. Enter a suitable name. Set IP Address to 172.17.10.0 Set Number of Subnet Bits to 24. For Interface to which route is destined to <E-Ethernet S-Satellite Enter : S> select S. For HDLC address [SMALL NETWORK] in hex <0x1 - 0xFE, enter = 0000>: select 2. CDM-IP 1 Route Table should display the following: Route Name Dest IP/SNet Bits Next Hop Route001..[test 172.17.10.0/24 0x2 MultiCast N/A State toSat]

Step 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description From Main Menu, select Route Table [R] sub-menu. Enter 1 to configure the first route. Enter a suitable name Set IP Address to 172.16.10.0 Set Number of Subnet Bits to 24 For Interface to which route is destined to <E-Ethernet S-Satellite Enter : S> select S For HDLC address [SMALL NETWORK] in hex <0x1 - 0xFE, enter = 0000>: select 1 CDM-IP 2 Route Table should display the following: Route Name Dest IP/SNet Bits Next Hop Route001..[test 172.16.10.0/24 0x1 MultiCast N/A State toSat]
288
At this point the basic configuration is over and you should be able to: Ping PC 1 from PC 2 and vice versa Ping CDM-IP 2 from PC 1 and vice versa Pass any other data between the 2 PCs
1 From PC1 Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 1) Ping 172.17.10.2 (CDM-IP 2) Ping 172.17.10.11 (PC 2) From PC2 Ping 172.17.10.1 (CDM-IP 2) Ping 172.16.10.1 (CDM-IP 1) Ping 172.16.10.11 (PC 1)
289
13.4
TROUBLESHOOTING IP MODULE
The CDM-IP comes with a variety of diagnostic tools to aid in identifying the traffic path going into and out of the CDM-IP modem. This troubleshooting section shows how to use some of these tools and also identifies several common problems encountered when first setting up two CDM-IP modems. If following these troubleshooting steps fails to resolve the problem, contact a Customer Support representative at: Comtech EF Data Attention: Customer Support Department 2114 West 7th Street Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA (480) 333-2200 (Main Comtech EF Data Number) (480) 333-4357 (Customer Support Desk) (480) 333-2161 FAX or, E-Mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at: cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com
13.4.1 easyConnect MODE TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following troubleshooting steps if unable to successfully send traffic in easyConnect.
easyConnect Mode Troubleshooting
Step 1 Problem No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the CDM-IP Ethernet port. ICMP response is Request timed out. a) b) Action Verify correct IP address/subnet on PC and CDM-IP. Verify Ethernet connection cables, hub, etc. PC, hub, and CDM-IP should have Ethernet activity LED lit. Note: A PC must be connected to the CDM-IP using a hub, switch or a RJ45 crossover cable. When the CDM-IP Ethernet port senses an Ethernet connection, the CLI will display:
phymon_callback(): enet link change! link=1

If the connection is broken, the CLI will display:
phymon_callback(): enet link change! link=0
290
No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the remote CDM-IP or remote PC. ICMP response is Request timed out.
a) Verify both CDM-IPs are in easyConnect/Pointto-Point Modes. b) Verify IF link between modems for proper settings and carrier quality (RX signal level, Eb/N0, etc.). It is possible that there is a spectrum inversion, particularly if you are using the CDM-IP with RF converter equipment. If this is the case, the signal level & Eb/N0 may be OK, but no data will be received. To correct this, invert the TX and RX Spectrum on one of the CDM-IPs. c) Send a constant ping from the PC 1 ping 172.16.10.2 t to PC 2. In the CDM-IP1, go to Operations and Maintenance/Diagnostics. Enable Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite Interface. Verify that the Pings are being transmitted by observing 1 packet on CLI every second. If not displayed, reverify PC 1 and CDM-IP 1 settings. Disable Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite Interface by entering T. d) Continue sending constant ping from the PC 1 to PC 2. In the CDM-IP 2, go to Operations Maintenance/Diagnostics. Enable Dump Packets received from Satellite Interface. Verify that the Pings are being received by observing 1 packet on CLI every second. If not displayed, reverify PC 2 and CDM-IP 2 settings. Disable Dump Packets received from Satellite Interface by entering R. Note: All pings transmitted will require a reply to be transmitted from the target host. Use the Diagnostics Dump Packets tools to isolate where packets are lost in the CDMIP duplex paths. Also, always disable Dump Packets before sending live traffic.
291
13.4.2 ROUTER MODE TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following troubleshooting steps if unable to successfully send traffic in Router Mode.
Router Mode Troubleshooting
Step 1 Problem No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the CDM-IP Ethernet port. ICMP response is Request timed out. Action a) Verify correct IP address/subnet on PC and CDM-IP. b) Verify Ethernet connection cables, hub, etc. PC, hub, and CDM-IP should have Ethernet activity LED lit. Note: A PC must be connected to the CDM-IP using a hub, switch or a RJ45 crossover cable. When the CDM-IP Ethernet port senses an Ethernet connection, the CLI will display:
phymon_callback(): change! link=1
enet link
If the connection is broken, the CLI will display:
phymon_callback(): change! link=0

2 No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the remote CDM-IP or remote PC. ICMP response is Request timed out.
enet link
a) Verify both CDM-IPs are in Router/Small Network Modes. b) Verify PCs Gateways are set to local CDM-IP address. c) Verify IF link between modems for proper settings and carrier quality (RX signal level, Eb/N0, etc.). It is possible that there is a spectrum inversion, particularly if you are using the CDM-IP with RF converter equipment. If this is the case, the signal level & Eb/N0 may be OK, but no data will be received. To correct this, invert the TX and RX Spectrum on one of the CDM-IPs. a) Verify CDM-IP Route Tables are correct.
No Ping response from PC 1 to PC 2 or vice versa. ICMP response is Reply from 172.XXX.10.1 Destination net unreachable
292
NOTES:
293
14 Flash Upgrading CDM-IP Satellite Modems
14.1
FLASH UPGRADE OVERVIEW

Many Comtech EF Data modems use "flash memory" internally, eliminating the need for physically replacing firmware. The advantages of using flash are many, but perhaps the greatest benefit is realized by not having to disassemble the modems to replace an integrated circuit. New firmware can simply be uploaded to the units from an external PC. The CDM-IP family of modems have base modem firmware (M&C) and CDM-IP module firmware.
Performing a base modem M&C flash upgrade erases the non-volatile RAM, which is where the modem's configuration is stored. Users must re-enter the desired configuration parameters.
IMPORTANT
Note: While the M&C and CDM-IP module firmware downloads are independent processes, the modem may require the latest firmware releases for both the M&C and CDM-IP module for proper functionality. Flash updating firmware is a simple process.Users can obtain upgrades by any of these methods: Download from the Comtech EF Data website (http://www.comtechefdata.com) Download from the Comtech EF data FTP Site (ftp://ftp.comtechefdata.com) Contact CDM-IP Modem Support for downloading information mailto:cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com) Request as E-mail attachments Request shipment on diskettes or CD-ROM.
M&C upgrade can be performed without opening the unit, by connecting the modem to the serial port of a computer and executing a flash uploader software program. The cable to connect the PC to the modem is the same as is used for normal EIA-232 remote control, and comprises three wires connected between two 9-pin "D" type female connectors. Ensure this cable is connected and working properly before proceeding with an M&C or BULK firmware flash upgrade. CDM-IP module firmware is upgraded by using an FTP utility to transfer flash files to the modem. The cable to connect the PC to the modem is a standard 8 pin Category 5 Ethernet cable. An Ethernet switch, hub or crossover cable is required to facilitate proper connectivity. Ensure connection is working properly before proceeding with CDM-IP module firmware flash upgrade.
The Remote Control port EIA-232 lines used for Flash upgrading are also connected to the Primary 25-pin data connector (P3B), and are used when 1:N Redundancy Switch is connected. Please ensure that NOTHING is connected to P3B pins 4, 21 and 22; if these pins are used, the EIA-232 remote control port will not function, and Flash upgrading will be impossible.
IMPORTANT
295
3/4/04
14.2
DOWNLOADING FLASH UPGRADES FROM THE WEB

The latest firmware releases and a free software utility are available on the Comtech EF Data web site (http://www.comtechefdata.com). This utility is designed to run under Windows 95/98 or Windows NT/2000/XP and provides all of the support required to perform a Comtech EF Data firmware reflash. If web downloading is not available or practical, contact the Customer Support department to obtain the firmware via an alternate method. The downloadable firmware files are provided in.zip or self extracting .exe formats. If your firewall does not permit downloading an .exe file, download the .zip file. The downloadable file contents are identical, usually comprising an uploader program, help file, and flashable data file.
How to Download Base Modem M&C Firmware Flash Upgrade Files Step 1 2 3 Procedure Create a new folder on the PC. This folder will be the destination folder for any flash upgrade files downloaded. On the Comtech EF Data web site (http://www.comtechefdata.com/), click the "downloads" link. Click the "flash upgrades" link for detailed downloading instructions. There are two primary instruction sheets, one for the base M&C/BULK firmware and one for the CDM-IP 550 and CDMIP 300L IP module firmware. The instruction sheet displayed will be for the M&C/BULK firmware. Click the "flash firmware data files" link (located at the bottom of the instruction page). The flash firmware data files are organized by product. Click the product type. Identify and download the latest base modem M&C firmware file to destination folder on the PC.
14.2.1 BASE MODEM (M&C OR BULK FIRMWARE)
4 5 6
How to Perform a Flash Upgrade for Base Modem M&C Firmware
Included in the M&C download is an uploader software utility program. Full online help is provided with this uploader program. However, if you experience a problem, or have a question, contact Comtech EF Data Network Customer Support for assistance.
Step 1 2 3 Procedure On the PC, double-click the .exe or .zip flash upgrade file to uncompress its contents. Identify and execute the uploader program. Follow the instructions presented on the screen to select a firmware file and initiate the upload.
Following a successful upload process, the modem will automatically restart, running the new version of the firmware.
296
3/4/04
14.2.2 CDM-IP MODULE FIRMWARE

Perform the CDM-IP Module upgrade by using an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) utility program. The latest firmware releases are available on the Comtech EF Data web site (http://www.comtechefdata.com). An FTP utility is required to perform a Comtech EF Data firmware reflash. If web downloading is not available or practical, contact the Network Customer Support department (cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com) to obtain the firmware via an alternate method. The downloadable firmware files are provided in .zip or self extracting .exe formats. If your firewall does not permit downloading an .exe file, download the .zip file. The downloadable file contents are identical, usually comprised of several flashable data files.
How to Download CDM-IP Module Firmware Step Procedure 1 Create a new folder on the PC. This folder will be the destination folder for any flash upgrade files downloaded. 2 3 On the Comtech EF Data web site (http://www.comtechefdata.com/), click the "downloads" link. Click the "flash upgrades" link for detailed downloading instructions. There are two primary instruction sheets: One for the base M&C/BULK firmware and one for the CDM-IP 550 and CDMIP 300L IP module firmware. The instruction sheet displayed will be for the M&C/BULK firmware. Click on the link for the CDM-IP module to display the CDM-IP firmware upgrade procedure. Click the "flash firmware data files" link (located at the bottom of the instruction page). The flash firmware data files are organized by product. Click the product type (CDM-IP 550 or CDM-IP 300L). Identify and download the latest IP Module firmware file to the destination folder on the PC.
4 5 6
297
3/4/04
How to Perform a Flash Upgrade for the CDM-IP Module Step

1
Procedure
On the PC, double-click the .exe or .zip flash upgrade file to uncompress its contents. Ensure that the following unzipped files are located in the directory:
fw9872-X-.mpp, where "x" is the version number (Boot). fw101741-1-.mpp, where "x" is the version number (Application). fw9784-X.mpp, where "x" is the version number (FPGA). fw9783-X.mpp, where "x" is the version number (FFPGA). fw101741-X-.mib, where "x" is the version number (cdmipController mib). fw101741-X-.mib, where "x" is the version number (cdmip550.mib). fw101741-X-.mib, where "x" is the version number (cdmip300L.mib). fw101741-X-.mib, where "x" is the version number (cdmip550Traps.mib). fw101741-X-.mib, where "x" is the version number (cdmip300Ltraps.mib). Notes on .mib files: The .mib files are only needed when using SNMP operation with a customersupplied MIB browser. The .mib files are compiled on a MIB Browser (cdmipController MIB must be compiled first; see compiling instructions provided with the MIB Browser that you are using). The cdmipController.mib (fw101741-X-.mib) file is required for proper SNMP operation of both the CDMIP 550 and CDM-IP 300L. The cdmip550.mib (fw101741-X-.mib) file is required if you are using CDM-IP 550 modems. The cdmip300L.mib (fw101741-X-.mib) file is required if you are using CDM-IP 300L modems. The cdmip550Traps.mib (fw101741-X-.mib) is required if you are only using the CDM-IP 550 and using SNMP v1 traps. The cdmip300LTraps.mib (fw101741-X-.mib) is required if you are only using the CDM-IP 300L and using SNMP v1 traps. The cdmip550Traps.mib and the CDMIP300LTraps.mib are not required if you are using SNMP v2 traps.
2 3 4 5 6 Connect the Client PC to the CDM-IP Modem via an Ethernet Hub, Switch, or Ethernet crossover cable. Verify the connection by issuing a "ping" command to the CDM-IP. Initiate an FTP session with the CDM-IP by typing "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the CDM-IP. Enter your admin user name and password to complete the login. Verify the FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin". Type "prompt" then type "hash" to facilitate the transfer process. Type "mput *.mpp" to begin the file transfers.
Note: This will load the Application fw9630-1x.mpp and the FPGA fw9781-1x.mpp files. 7 8 After verifying a successful file transfer, terminate the FTP transfer by typing "by". Reboot the CDM-IP. Verify the new software versions are booting by observing the following messages on the terminal screen: "Booting flash image fwXXXX-YY, version Z.Z.Z (Appl #2)" where XXXX-YY is the firmware number/revision and Z.Z.Z is the version number. "Programming FPGA using image UART (FPGA #2) Done"
If you experience a problem, or have a question, contact Comtech EF Data Network Customer Support for assistance:
Comtech EF Data Network Customer Support Phone 480.333.2089 Email - cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com
298
3/4/04
14.3 CDM-IP MODULE FIRMWARE

Perform the CDM-IP Module upgrade by using an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) utility program. The latest firmware releases are available on the Comtech EF Data web site (http://www.comtechefdata.com). An FTP utility is required to perform a Comtech EF Data firmware reflash. If web downloading is not available or practical, contact the Network Customer Support department (cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com) to obtain the firmware via an alternate method. The downloadable firmware files are provided in both .zip or self extracting .exe formats. If your firewall does not permit downloading an .exe file, download the .zip file. The downloadable file contents are identical, usually comprised of several flashable data files.
How to Download CDM IP Module Firmware Step Procedure 1 Create a new folder on the PC. This folder will be the destination folder for any flash upgrade files downloaded. 2 3 On the Comtech EF Data web site (http://www.comtechefdata.com/), click the "downloads" link. Click the "flash upgrades" link for detailed downloading instructions. There are two primary instruction sheets: One for the base M&C/BULK firmware and one for the CDM-IP 550 and CDM300L IP module firmware. The instruction sheet displayed will be for the M&C/BULK firmware. Click on the link for the CDM-IP module to display the CDM firmware upgrade procedure. Click the "flash firmware data files" link (located at the bottom of the instruction page). The flash firmware data files are organized by product. Click the product type (CDM-IP 550 or CDMIP-300L). Identify and download the latest IP module firmware file to the destination folder on the PC.
4 5 6
Comtech EF Data Network Customer Support Phone 480.333.2089 Email - cdmipsupport@comtechefdata.com
299
3/4/04
NOTES:
300
Appendix A. Theory of Operation

A.1 Functional Description ........................... A.2 Offset QPSK Operation ......................... A.3 EIA-232 Operation ................................. A.4 AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control)......................................................... 301 302 303 308
A.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

The CDM-IP has two fundamentally different types of interfaces, IF and data. The data interface is a bi-directional path which connects with the customers equipment (assumed to be the DTE) and the modem (assumed to be the DCE). The IF interface provides a bi-directional link with the satellite via the uplink and downlink equipment. Transmit data is received by the terrestrial interface where line receivers convert the clock and data signals to CMOS levels for further processing. A small FIFO follows the terrestrial interface to facilitate the various clocking and framing options. If framing is enabled, the transmit clock and data output from the FIFO pass through the framer, where the EDMAC data is added to the main data. Otherwise, the clock and data are passed directly to the Forward Error Correction encoder. In the FEC encoder, the data is differentially encoded, scrambled, and then convolutionally encoded. Following the encoder, the data is fed to the transmit digital filters, which perform spectral shaping on the data signals. The resultant I and Q signals are then fed to the QPSK/BPSK modulator. The carrier is generated by a frequency synthesizer, and the I and Q signals directly modulate this carrier to produce an IF output signal. The received IF signal is first translated to a fixed IF frequency, using a frequency synthesizer. An AGC circuit maintains the composite level within the IF bandwidth constant over a limited range. Following this, the signal is sampled by a high-speed (flash) A/D converter. All processing beyond this conversion is purely digital. The signal is translated down to near zero frequency by a complex mix, and then is processed by a digital Costas Loop, which performs the functions of Nyquist filtering, carrier recovery, and bit-timing recovery. The resultant demodulated signal is fed, in soft decision form, to the FEC decoder (Viterbi, Sequential or Turbo, if installed). After decoding, the recovered clock and data pass to the de-framer (if EDMAC is enabled) where the overhead information is removed. Following this, the data passes to the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer, which has a programmable size, or may be bypassed. From here, the receive clock and data signals are routed to the terrestrial interface, and are passed to the externally connected DTE equipment.
301
A.2 OFFSET QPSK OPERATION

Offset QPSK modulation is a variation of normal QPSK, which is offered in the CDM-IP. Normal bandlimited QPSK produces an RF signal envelope which necessarily goes through a point of zero amplitude when the modulator transitions through non-adjacent phase states. This is not considered to be a problem in most communication systems, as long as the entire signal processing chain is linear. However, when bandlimited QPSK is passed through a non-linearity (for instance, a saturated power amplifier), there is a tendency for the carefully filtered spectrum to degrade. This phenomenon is termed spectral re-growth, and at the extreme (hard limiting) the original, unfiltered sinx/x spectrum would result. In most systems, this would cause an unacceptable level of interference to adjacent carriers, and would cause degradation of the BER performance of the corresponding demodulator. To overcome the problem of the envelope collapsing to a point of zero amplitude, Offset QPSK places a delay between I and Q channels of exactly 1/2 symbol. Now the modulator cannot transition through zero when faced with non-adjacent phase states. The result is that there is far less variation in the envelope of the signal, and non-linearities do not cause the same level of degradation. The demodulator must re-align the I and Q symbol streams before the process of carrier recovery can take place. For various reasons this makes the process of acquisition more difficult. The two consequences of this are: Acquisition may be longer, especially at low data rates. The acquisition threshold is higher than for normal QPSK, although the demodulator will maintain lock down to its normal levels. The acquisition thresholds are as follows: 7.0 dB Eb/No for Rate 1/2 5.2 dB Eb/No for Rate 3/4 4.8 dB Eb/No for Rate 7/8 4.0 dB Eb/No for Uncoded operation (No FEC)
302
A.3 EIA-232 OPERATION

The CDM-IP supports asynchronous EIA-232 in addition to synchronous EIA-232 formats. This is useful, for example, in connecting two computers together, via their serial ports, at opposite ends of a satellite link. There are, however, some restrictions and limitations when using this mode, and the user may have to experiment a little in order to get reliable communication.
A.3.1 ASYNC EIA-232 SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum operating baud rate: Additional data overhead required: Maximum allowable baud rate tolerance: Character formats supported: Flow control: Handshaking line supported: Connectivity required: 57.6 kbaud (QPSK and OQPSK) 28.8 kbaud (BPSK) Zero. A 9.6 kbaud connection uses a 9.6 kbps carrier. +/- 600 ppm Any, except those using 1.5 stop bits (see note below) None Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Rx data, Tx Data and Ground (DCD optional)
A.3.2 SETUP
The setup required for this mode is remarkably simple. Select EIA-232 as the interface type, and then select the required baud rate for both transmit and receive data rates. Detection of the asynchronous mode is fully automatic. If no clock is detected, asynchronous mode is assumed, and the internal circuitry is switched accordingly. The settings for both Tx and Rx clocking are irrelevant; the selected clocking options are ignored, and the internal clock circuitry is reconfigured for this special mode.
A.3.2.1 BAUD RATE ACCURACY

When connecting devices where the baud rate is not within the tolerance of +/- 600ppm, the Tx FIFO and Rx Buffer will occasionally underflow or overflow, causing characters to be lost. To avoid this, while the external device is connected, and transmitting data, connect a frequency counter to pin 15 of the rear panel Data Connector (the 25 pin D type female). Measure the frequency, then set the transmit frequency equal to this value on the local modem, and set the receive frequency to this value at the other end of the link. If a frequency counter is not available, 10 minutes of trial and error will be an adequate substitute. Set the modem to an IF loop, and then try changing the baud rate by approximately 500 ppm at a time. At 9600 baud, this equates to either 9605 or 9595 baud, with further increments of 5 bps. If changing the baud rate in a positive direction results in more frequent buffer and/or FIFO slips, then move it in the opposite direction. Do this until the slips are eliminated.
A.3.2.2 ASYNC CHARACTER FORMATS USING 1.5 STOP BITS

For situations where an async character format using 1.5 stop bits cannot be avoided, set the modem data rate to exactly twice the incoming baud rate. This uses twice as much bandwidth, but will permit this mode of operation.
303
A.3.3 CLOCKING
This section describes the various clocking options which are available only when the CDM-IP is operating in CDM-550 Emulation Mode (using either EIA-422/530, V.35, or EIA-232 as the interface rather than IP). When the IP interface is selected, all of the clocking is set internally. IP traffic is not synchronous traffic and does not require any external, loop-timing, or buffer clocks to compensate for satellite Doppler.
IMPORTANT
When dealing with satellite modems, the subject of clocking can be a complex issue.
Note: Clocking is not configurable when the CDM-IP has IP selected as the data interface.
A.3.3.1TRANSMIT CLOCKING
There are four transmit clocking modes in the CDM-IP. EIA-422/449 signal mnemonics will be used for illustration, but the description applies equally to V.35, and synchronous EIA-232.
A.3.3.1.1 Internal Clock

In this mode, the modem, assumed always to be the DCE, supplies the clock to the DTE. (The EIA-422/449 name for this signal is Send Timing, or ST.) The DTE then clocks from this source, and gives the modem transmit data (Send Data, or SD), synchronous with this clock. It is optional whether the DTE also returns the clock (Terminal Timing, or TT). The modem can accept if it is present, but uses ST if it is not.
A.3.3.1.2 External Clock

In this mode, the modem expects to see the DTE provide the clock so that it can phase-lock its internal circuits. In this case, the modem does not provide any signal on ST, but instead requires a clock signal on Terminal Timing (TT), synchronous with the data. If no clock is present, an alarm will be generated.
A.3.3.1.3 Loop-Timed, RX=TX

In certain circumstances, a terminal at the distant-end of a satellite link may be required to provide a clock to the DTE equipment which is locked to the receive satellite signal. This is similar to Internal Clock mode, in that the modem will source Send Timing (ST) to the DTE, but now the timing is derived from the demodulator. The DTE then clocks from this source, and gives the modem transmit data (Send Data, or SD), synchronous with this clock. It is optional whether the DTE also returns the clock (Terminal Timing, or TT). The modem can accept if it is present, but uses ST if it is not. If the demodulator loses lock, the modems internal clock will be substituted, so an accurate and stable clock is present on ST, rather than a clock which may jitter and wander in a random fashion.
A.3.3.1.4 Loop-Timed, RX<>TX (Asymmetric Loop Timing)

The CDM-IP incorporates circuitry which permits loop timing when the TX and RX data rates are not the same. In this case the clock frequency appearing at ST will be whatever the TX data rate is programmed to, but phase-locked to the demodulators receive symbol clock. In all other respects the operation is the same as for standard loop timing.
304
A.3.3.2 RECEIVE CLOCKING

There are three receive clocking modes in the CDM-IP.
A.3.3.2.1 Buffer Disabled

When the buffer is disabled, the receive clock (Receive Timing, or RT) is derived directly from the demodulator, and hence will be subject to plesiochronous and Doppler offsets. In certain instances, this may be acceptable, and in the case of Loop Timing, it is essential that the buffer is disabled (which is done automatically).
A.3.3.2.2 Buffer Enabled, RX=TX

In this instance, it is required that the buffer be enabled, so that the clock and data appearing on Receive Timing and Receive Data (RT and RD respectively) are synchronous with the transmit clock. This is a relatively simple case, as the output clock for the buffer is derived directly from either ST or TT.
A.3.3.2.3 Buffer Enabled, RX<>TX

This is an uncommon case, where the receive and transmit data rates are not equal. The modem will generate a phase-locked buffer output clock which uses the transmit clock, regardless of its frequency in relation to the receive data rate.
A.3.3.3 X.21 NOTES

For X.21 operation, use the EIA-422/530 pins, but ignore Receive Clock if the Modem is DTE, and ignore Transmit clocks if the Modem is DCE.
A.3.3.4 LOOP TIMING WITH SYNC EIA-232

The CDM-IP distinguishes between synchronous and asynchronous EIA-232 by detecting clock activity on the TX Clock pin of the interface. If no clock is detected, it is assumed that the mode is asynchronous. Therefore, if loop timing is employed in a synchronous EIA-232 application, it is essential to provide an external loop between the ST and TX clock pins. If this is not done, the modem will assume an async mode, which is not compatible. The loop should be placed between pin 15 and pin 24 on the 25 pin D type interface.
305
A.3.4 TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE CLOCKING

INTERNAL TX CLOCK
DATA TO MODULATOR CIRCUIT TX DATA TX FIFO TX CLOCK (TT) TRANSMIT DATA INTERFACE PLL CIRCUIT CLOCK VCXO
INTERNAL CLOCK (ST)
DIRECT DIGITAL SYNTHESIZER
14.4 MHz TCXO
THIS CLOCK IS USED AS THE SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE FOR THE EQUIPMENT ATTACHED TO THE MODEM
EXTERNAL TX CLOCK
DATA TO MODULATOR CIRCUIT TX DATA TRANSMIT DATA INTERFACE TX FIFO PLL CIRCUIT CLOCK VCXO
TX CLOCK (TT)
THE MODEM LOCKS ITS CLOCK CIRCUITS TO THIS CLOCK COMING FROM THE EXTERNALLY CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
LOOP-TIMED TX CLOCK TX=RX OR

DATA TO MODULATOR CIRCUIT TX DATA TX FIFO TX CLOCK (TT) TRANSMIT DATA INTERFACE PLL CIRCUIT CLOCK VCXO
CLOCK VCXO
PLL CIRCUIT
INTERNAL CLOCK (ST) THIS CLOCK IS USED AS THE SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE FOR THE EQUIPMENT ATTACHED TO THE MODEM
RX SYMBOL CLOCK FROM DEMOD
Figure 25. Tx Clock Modes
306
BUFFER DISABLE CLOCK

RX DATA RX BUFFER RX CLOCK (RT) RECEIVE DATA INTERFACE DATA FROM FEC DECODER/DEFRAMER
CLOCK VCXO
PLL CIRCUIT
RX SYMBOL CLOCK FROM DEMOD
BUFFER TX=RX CLOCK

RX DATA RECEIVE DATA INTERFACE RX BUFFER DATA FROM FEC DECODER/DEFRAMER
RX CLOCK (RT)
DATA TO MODULATOR CIRCUIT TX CLOCK (TT) TRANSMIT DATA INTERFACE TX FIFO PLL CIRCUIT CLOCK VCXO
BUFFER TX<>RX CLOCK

RX DATA RX BUFFER RX CLOCK (RT) RECEIVE DATA INTERFACE DATA FROM FEC DECODER/DEFRAMER
CLOCK VCXO
PLL CIRCUIT
TX CLOCK (TT)
TRANSMIT DATA INTERFACE
TX FIFO
Figure 26. RX Clock Modes
307
A.4 AUPC (AUTOMATIC UPLINK POWER CONTROL)

Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) is a feature whereby a local modem is permitted to adjust its own output power level in order to attempt to maintain the Eb/No at the remote modem.
The user MUST obtain permission from the Satellite User to use this feature. Improper use of this feature could result in a transmitting terminal seriously exceeding its allocated flux density on the Users satellite. This could produce interference to other carriers, and could cause transponder saturation problems.
IMPORTANT
NOTICE
To accomplish this, the framed (EDMAC) mode of operation must be used. The remote modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator Eb/No using reserved bytes in the overhead structure. The local modem then compares this value of Eb/No with a pre-defined target value. If the Remote Eb/No is below the target, the local modem will increase its output power, and hence, a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link. A particularly attractive benefit of this feature is that whenever framed operation is selected, the remote demodulators Eb/No can be viewed from the front panel display of the local modem. Note also that AUPC can be used simultaneously with EDMAC. There are several important parameters associated with this mode of operation, and the user needs to understand how the AUPC feature works, and the implications of setting these parameters.
A.4.1 SETTING AUPC PARAMETERS

Step 1. Direction The user, under the menu (CONFIG, FRAME) first ensures that Framed mode is selected. EDMAC may be disabled, or the unit may be defined as an EDMAC Master or Slave. The important consideration is that Framing should be enabled. The user should verify that the remote modem also has Framing enabled. The user, under the menu (CONFIG, TX, PWR) sets the nominal output power of the modem. This is done by selecting the MANUAL mode, then editing the TX output power level displayed. The user will then select AUPC as the operating mode. At this point the user will be prompted to define four key parameters:
2. 3.
4.
308
A.4.1.1 TARGET Eb/No

This is value of Eb/No that the user desires to keep constant at the remote modem. If the Eb/No exceeds this value, the AUPC control will reduce the TX output power, but will never drop below the nominal value set. If the Eb/No falls below this value, the AUPC control will increase the TX output power, but will never exceed the value determined by the parameter MAX RANGE. The minimum value the user can enter is 0.0 dB The maximum value the user can enter is 9.9 dB The default value is 3.0 dB The resolution is 0.1 dB
A.4.1.2 MAX RANGE

This defines how much the modem is permitted to increase the output level, under AUPC control. The minimum value the user can enter is 0 dB The maximum value the user can enter is 9 dB The default value is 1 dB The resolution is 1 dB
A.4.1.3 ALARM
This parameter defines how the user wants the modem to act if, under AUPC control, the maximum power limit is reached. The two choices are: NONE (no action) TX ALARM (generate a TX alarm) The default setting is NONE.
A.4.1.4 DEMOD UNLOCK

This defines the action the modem will take if the remote demodulator loses lock. The two choices are: NOMINAL (reduce the TX Output Power to the nominal value). MAXIMUM (increase the TX Output Power to the maximum value permitted by the parameter MAX RANGE). The default setting is NOMINAL.
Note: If the local demod loses lock, the modem will automatically move its output power to the nominal value.
309
A.4.2 COMPENSATION RATE

As with any closed-loop control system, the loop parameters must be chosen to ensure stability at all times. Several features have been incorporated to ensure that the AUPC system does overshoot, or oscillate. First, the rate at which corrections to the output power can be made is fixed at once every 4 seconds. This takes into account the round trip delay over the satellite link, the time taken for a power change to be reflected in the remote demodulators value of Eb/No, and other processing delays in the modems. Second, if the comparison of actual and target Eb/No yields a result that requires a change in output power, the first correction made will be 80% of the calculated step. This avoids the possibility of overshoot. Subsequent corrections are made until the difference is less than 0.5 dB. At this point, the output power is only changed in increments of 0.1 dB, to avoid hunting around the correct set point.
A.4.3 MONITORING
The remote demodulators value of Eb/No can be monitored at all times, either from the front panel (MONIT, AUPC) or via the remote control interface. The resolution of the reading is 0.2 dB. For all values greater than or equal to 16 dB, the value 16.0 dB will be displayed. As long as framing is enabled, the value will still be available, even though AUPC may be disabled. Also displayed is the current value of TX power increase. If Framing is enabled, but AUPC is disabled, this will indicate 0.0 dB. This value is also available via the remote control interface. Comtech EF Data strongly cautions against the use of large values of permitted power level increase under AUPC control. Users should consider using the absolute minimum range necessary to improve rain-fade margin.
310
NOTES
311
Index
A
Address ......................................................81 Administration Page.................................107 Alarms Connector 15 Pin D Type Male276 ASYNC EIA-232 Specifications .............303 Async-Serial Console...............................278 AUPC-(Automatic Uplink Power Control308 AUPC...........................................................2 Auxiliary Serial Connector He1402 3 Pin Header ................................................277 easyConnect Point-to-Point System Configuration .....................................284 Eb/N0 MEASUREMENT .........................271 EDMAC CHANNEL ...............................265 EGP Group...............................................199 EIA-232......................................................80 EIA-232 Operation...................................303 EIA-485......................................................79 End Of Packet ............................................84 Equipment List.........................................281 Equipment Setup......................................282 Ethernet Interface Connector ...................278
B
Basic Protocol ............................................80
C
CDM-550 Emulation Mode .........................4 CDM-IP 550 MIB Tree............................247 CDM-IP 550 Objects Group ....................223 CDM-IP 550 Private MIB........................223 CDM-IP Administration Group ...............202 CDM-IP Configuration ............................284 CDM-IP Controller MIB Tree .................238 CDM-IP Demo Mode ................................21 CDM-IP IP Controller Private MIB.........202 CLI AND TELNET INTERFACE ..........103 CLOCKING.............................................304 Compensation Rate ..................................310 Configuration .............................................32 Connect External Cables............................32 Connector Description ...............................33 CONNECTOR PINOUTS .......................275 Contact Information .................................179
F
FLASH UPGRADING CDM-IP SATELLITE MODEMS....................295 FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION OPTIONS...........................................251 FRONT PANEL MENUS..........................41 Front Panel Operation ................................38 Front Panel Operation ................................41 Functional Description.............................301
H
Header Compression..................................13 Home Page ...............................................178
I
ICMP Group.............................................196 IGMP Support for Multicast ........................4 INSTALLATION ......................................31 Instruction Code.........................................82 Instruction Code Qualifier .........................82 Interface Configuration Page ...................121 Interface Group ........................................190 Interface Group ........................................209 INTRODUCTION .......................................1 Introduction..............................................251 IP Header Compression .............................13 IP Traffic Classifying.................................11
D
Data Connector 25 Pin D Type Female 275 Data Interfaces .............................................3 Dimensional Envelope ...............................28 easyConnect Mode ...................................4 easyConnect Mode Troubleshooting....290
K
Keypad .......................................................41
313
L
LED Indicators...........................................43 Logoff ......................................................180
Route Table Configuration Page..............132 Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration .....................................286 Router Mode Troubleshooting.................292
M
M&C Connection.....................................267 Main Menu...............................................283 Main Menu Page ......................................105 Major Assemblies ........................................2 Measuring Eb/N0 ......................................271 Menu Screens.............................................47 Menu Tree..................................................44 Message Arguments...................................84 Methods of Operation ................................37 MIB-II ......................................................188 Modem Parameters Page..........................142 Modem Summary Page............................143 Monitoring ...............................................310 Mounting Kits ............................................31
S
Select Internal IF Loop ..............................32 SELECT\INFO ..........................................64 SELECT\MONIT.......................................68 SELECT\ODU ...........................................76 SELECT\STORE\LD.................................73 SELECT\UTIL...........................................74 SELECT\UTIL\DEMO..............................75 SELECT\UTIL\FAST................................75 Sequential.................................................252 Serial Command Line Interface (CLI) Operations ............................................38 Serial console port Command Line Interface (CLI) Configuration ...........................282 SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL ................79 Serial Remote Control Operations .............38 Setting AUPC Parameters........................308 Setting CDM-IP Modems to Router Mode Operation............................................286 Setting IP Address(es)..............................285 Setting IP Address(es)..............................287 Setup ........................................................303 Setup Summary........................................268 SNMP Community String Access Levels187 SNMP Group ...........................................199 SNMP INTERFACE................................187 SNMP Operations ......................................39 Software .......................................................3 Specifications.............................................22 Standard Features.........................................2 Start Of Packet ...........................................81 Support.....................................................179 System Group...........................................189
O
Offset QPSK Operation ...........................302 On the receive side...................................266 On the transmit side .................................265 OPERATION.............................................37 Operations and Maintenance Page...........156 Options.......................................................12
P
Packet Structure .........................................81 Payload Compression.................................19 PC Configuration .....................................284 PC Configuration .....................................286 Private MIB Implementations..................202 Protocol Configuration Page....................136
Q
QoS (Quality of Service) Configuration Page....................................................126 Quality of Service ......................................14 QUICK-START GUIDE .........................281
T
TCP Group ...............................................197 Telnet - Logout Option ............................173 Telnet Operations.......................................38 THEORY OF OPERATION....................301 Transmission Group.................................199 Transmit and Receive Clocking...............306 Transmit and Receive IF Configuration ..282
314
R
Redundancy Configuration ..........................3 Redundancy Configuration Page .............153 Remote Control Connector - 9 Pin D Type Male ...................................................277 Route Table..............................................288
Triple DES Encryption with Ability to Change Keys ........................................12 Troubleshooting IP Module .....................290 Turbo Product Codec (Option) ................253 Turbo Product Coding (TPC).....................12
U
UDP Group ..............................................198 Uncoded Operation (No FEC) .................256 Unpacking and Inspection..........................31
V
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) .........42 Verification ..................................................3 Viterbi ......................................................251
W
Web Server Menu Tree............................177 Web Server Operation................................38 WEB SERVER PAGES...........................175 Web Server Usage....................................175
315
NOTES
316
METRIC CONVERSIONS
Units of Length
Unit 1 centimeter 1 inch 1 foot 1 yard 1 meter 1 mile 1 mm 1 kilometer Centimeter 2.540 30.480 91.44 100.0 1.609 x 105 Inch 0.3937 12.0 36.0 39.37 6.336 x 104 0.03937 Foot 0.03281 0.08333 3.0 3.281 5.280 x 103 Yard 0.01094 0.2778 0.3333 1.094 1.760 x 103 Mile 6.214 x 10-6 1.578 x 10-5 1.893 x 10-4 5.679 x 10-4 6.214 x 10-4 0.621 Meter 0.01 0.254 0.3048 0.9144 1.609 x 103 Kilometer 1.609 Millimeter 25.4
Temperature Conversions
Unit Fahrenheit Centigrade 0 (water freezes) 100 (water boils) 273.1 (absolute 0) Formulas
32 Fahrenheit 212 Fahrenheit -459.6 Fahrenheit
C = (F - 32) * 0.555 F = (C * 1.8) + 32
Units of Weight
Unit 1 gram 1 oz. avoir. 1 oz. troy 1 lb. avoir. 1 lb. Troy 1 kilogram Gram 28.35 31.10 453.6 373.2 1.0 x 103 Ounce Avoirdupois 0.03527 1.097 16.0 13.17 35.27 Ounce Troy 0.03215 0.9115 14.58 12.0 32.15 Pound Avoir. 0.002205 0.0625 0.06857 0.8229 2.205 Pound Troy 0.002679 0.07595 0.08333 1.215 2.679 Kilogram 0.001 0.02835 0.03110 0.4536 0.3732
317
2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA 480 333 2200 PHONE 480 333 2161 FAX

Cd-Cdm-Ip 550 - r1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cd-Cdm-Ip 550 - r1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CDM-IP 550

Comtech EF Data is an ISO 9001 Registered Company.

IP-Centric Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual

This information will be incorporated into the next revision.

s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-a1.doc

Figure 6. CDM-IP Dimensional Envelope

s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-a1.doc

This information will be incorporated into the next revision.

s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-b1.doc

This information will be incorporated into the next revision.

COMTECH EFDATA PART # PL/9923-1

Figure 13. CRS-100CDM-IP Cabling Details

s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\ip_cim\cdm-ip 550_r1\erratas\cdm-ip 550 errata e-c1.doc

IP-Centric Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3

5.8 Packet Structure.............................................................................................................. 81 5.8.4 Start Of Packet .......................................................................................................... 81

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

5.8.5 5.8.6 5.8.7 5.8.8 5.8.9 6 6.4

CLI AND TELNET INTERFACE .......................................................................... 103 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 103

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

8.6.4 8.6.5 8.6.6 8.6.7 8.6.8 8.6.9 8.6.10 8.6.11 8.7

Private MIB Implementations ..................................................................................... 202

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

11.4 12 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 13

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

CONVENTIONS AND REFERENCES

RECOMMENDED STANDARD DESIGNATIONS

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

REPORTING COMMENTS OR SUGGESTIONS CONCERNING THIS MANUAL

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

SAFETY COMPLIANCE EN 60950

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE (LVD)

Definition Alternating Current.

Definition Protective Earth.

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem Preface

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem

1.2 MAJOR ASSEMBLIES

1.3 STANDARD FEATURES

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem

1.3.4 DATA INTERFACES

1.3.5 1:1 REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem

1.3.6 IGMP SUPPORT FOR MULTICAST

1.3.7 CDM-550 EMULATION MODE

1.3.8 easyConnect MODE

1.3.8.1 easyConnect OPERATION

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem

1.3.9 CDM-IP WORKING MODES AND HDLC ADDRESSING MODES

CDM-IP 550 IP-Centric Satellite Modem

Satellite dish 10 BaseT LAN 10.10.1.0 /16

Satellite dish 10 BaseT LAN 10.10.2.0 /16

Hub CDM-IP 1 (efi0) 10.10.1.1/16